Home

SMART TERMINAL EST-Z Series User`s Manual

1. Chapter 1 SMART OBJECT LIBRARY CONFIGURATION dots Digital clock 24hours 76 x 20 Digital clock 12hours 92 x 20 Analog clock 80 x 80 Digital calendar 116x 20 External clock adjustment 40 x 40 State control External backlight control External backlight ON External buzzer control External buzzer OFF Battery alarm notification Data write when opening the panel B instrumentation Smart Objects Smart object type Smart object name 2402 5 dots PID controller SDC10 80 x 160 SDC20 21 80 x 200 0 30 31 80 x 200 SDC40A standard remote SP type 80 x 200 DMC10 2 channel model 320 x 200 160 x 150 DMC10 4 channel model 320 x 200 280 x 150 CB508 320 x 200 Recipe Manual write 320 x 200 Manual write with message 320 x 220 Manual write comment display 640 x 440 Manual write all display 640 x 440 Auto write 320 x 200 Auto write with message 320 x 200 Auto write comment display 640 x 440 Auto write all display 640 x 440 Trend EST240Z 320 x 240 Variable trend EST240Z 320 x 240 Trend 5 5552 640 x 255 640 x 455 Variable trend 5 5552 640 x 255 640 x 455 Graphic movement Rail movement Vertical Rail movement Horizontal Free movement PLC monitor MELSEC A C Link Word device 320 x 216 640 x 440 MELSEC A C Link Bit device 320 x 216 640 x 440 MELSEC A C
2. 5 41 Interval change 5 43 Appendix LIST OF SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS Switch and Lamp A 2 B Rocker Switch 4 B Slide Switch A 5 B Inching Switch A 6 Border 7 Piping 11 B Tank 11 B Meter 11 Analog Clock 12 Numeric Keypad Graphic for Password A 12 UP DOWN Setter Graphics 12 B Alarm History Graphics 13 B Alarm Summary 16 Alarm Count Display 18 SDC10 21 SDC20 21
3. 3 11 Alam silenGe 3 14 Word Type 3 17 Word data aa eS Ba 3 17 Constant 3 20 Data 3 23 3 4 Panel Change Switches 3 27 Panel change switch panel selector 3 27 Panel change switch panel overlay 3 29 Panel change switch open 3 31 Panel change switch special package selector 3 34 Panel change switch multi panel selector 3 36 Panel change switch multi panel overlay others 3 39 Panel change switch background panel selector others 3 42 Panel change switch background panel close others 3 44 Panel change switch panel selector background change menu others 3 46 Panel change switch panel selector background close others 3 48 Panel change switch panel close others 3 50 Panel change switch panel replace others 3 52 Panel change switch panel to front others 3 54 Exte
4. Coordinate Enter the call coordinates ofthe clock adjustment Switch communications Switch communications function Select the switch communications function lt Supplementary Explanation Timing of writing of date time data to the PLC is as follows The current date time data is written to the PLC if the clock data has been corrected when the call source panel is returned to from the clock correction panel The EST sets the notification device after the date time data is written The EST does not reset the device Reset the device on the PLC after confirming the ON state of the bit For details on the clock correction panel see 5 4 Clock Correction page 5 10 For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions Be sure to enter a multiple of 16 when entering the bit device on the PLC to write devices Enter the bit device on the PLC for the Notify device Do not enter word devices such as registers User cannot be selected at Graphic type The clock correction panel cannot be called when an opened pop up panel is active 3 13 3 2 Function Switches Smart object name Alarm silence Function switches Scaling Paste Scaling factor coordinates Q Ay B Function This smart object turns the EST buzzer output OFF when the switch is
5. 21 SDC30 31 21 SDCAOA 22 B DMC10 2 channel A 22 B DMC10 4 channel 23 508 25 B Trend 26 Recipe 50 B PLC monitor A 56 B Recorder A 58 xi Conventions Used This Manual The following conventions are used in this manual Handling Precautions Handling Precautions indicate items that the user should pay attention to when handling the EST Z Series Note Notes indicate useful information that the user might benefit by knowing A B C etc This indicates a key on the personal computer s keyboard Chapter 1 SMART OBJECT LIBRARY CONFIGURATION 1 1 Library Configuration B Smart Objects The application data is the data created to operate the smart terminal EST Z Series The panel data in the application data consists of the following elements Points Straight l
6. 4 104 MELSEC FX CPU Bit 4 108 MELSEC C Link Word 4 112 MELSEC C Link Bit 4 116 Recordet dura eR d 4 121 B Recorder 4 121 B When using 4 122 Recorder 4 124 B Trend Digital 4 126 Trend Display Selection 4 127 B Interval Change 4 127 B Check Panel 4 128 Recorder anelli a 4 129 SYSTEM PANELS Conventions Used In System Panel Specifications 5 1 B System 5 1 B List of System 1 5 1 Basic Layout of Specification Descriptions 5 2 B Names of System Panel 5 3 B Function RS Yer RR RE E he AR ee in 5 3 B Example erre i oe Eee era I Ron ee da ation 5 3 B S
7. Selectwhen using interlocked operation Graphic Graphic ype Select he graphic generalrockersideuser FOFFGraphic Selectie graphic displeyed when OF OoOo O Color when OFF Select the display coor ofthe graphe when OFF Bink when OFF Selectto cause biinkingwhen oF T Selectthe font size tom B and ides T Valgnmen Select verical alignment from toprcenterfbotom Halignment Seledorzontaalgnmentiomlef cenerig OFF sting Enterthe display text when OFF OFF color EmeriedispiytexicorwhenOFF Switch communications Switch communications function Select the switch communications function Interlock action according to ON OFF state or bt devico Rame interlock action according tobitdevicerange 3 2 3 1 Switches B Supplementary Explanation Select OFF Graphic for the graphic selection when a lamp device is used OFF Graphic is paired with ON Graphic and is automatically selected Note however that OFF Graphic ON Graphic can be freely selected when User has been selected at Graphic type The switch device and the lamp device may be the same The hide device can be set when a lamp device is used When the hide device is ON the display of the switch graphic and the string will be hidden For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main
8. Basic Method om This item is for selecting the startup method of Basic Desien e panel selection panel change switch Method Type SW start C External start This item is for selecting the type of panel change switch operation panel selector ype Selector Special packa SW comm C Overlay C Others Select this item when using switch C Pop up communications functions Interlock Select this item when using the interlock SWc function Call panel Eel pt p b zb This item is for entering the startup panel No and the call coordinates of the panel peor zl 0 P OK Help Design Set the switch graphic and the display string Switch Communications Set the operation of switch communications functions Interlock Set the entry enabled conditions for the switch 3 27 3 4 Panel Change Switches B Example Call panel 10 call coordinates 20 10 Panel 5 in operation status Panel 5 closed 10 coordinates 20 10 Selector Panel selector ON M Panel 10 activated B Smart Object Prameters Selection setting item Basic Enter the panel No to be started up Enter the call coordinates of the panel to be started up o Select when using switch communications oo OS Select when using interlocked operation Design Select the graphic type from general user e Cr cole d
9. od al OK Cancel Help 4 6 p P A Operation This item is for setting the timing for displaying the marker Disp when ON A marker appears on the line when the bit device for the alarm is turned ON Disp when OFF A marker appears on the line when the bit device for the alarm is turned OFF Disp when ON OFF A marker appears on the line when the bit device for the alarm is turned ON or OFF No This item is for selecting the graphics of the marker when an alarm has occurred Color This item is for selecting the color of the graphics for the marker Sampling control configuration Basic l Channel Alarm View Marker Control Control dev Monitor mode This item is for entering the start device for data sampling Always Control by dev Control dev 4 Monitor time C Monitor time Start This item is for entering the start end times of data sampling End ep OK Cancel Help Control dev when Control by dev has been selected The start and end of sampling are controlled by the bit device on the PLC Data is sampled and saved at the specified sampling cycle while the control device is ON Start End when Monitor time has been selected Specifies the sampling start end times Data is sampled and saved from the set start time up to the s
10. M000 OFF B Smart Object Parameters Basic Select multi panel selector 2200 Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Panel Enter the panel No to be started up Enter the call coordinates of the panel to be started up 222 2 Enter the panel No to be started up 0 to 899 No 2 coordinates Enter the call coordinates of the panel to be started up Po No 3 call panel Enter the panel No to be started up 0 to 899 No 3 coordinates Enter the call coordinates of the panel to be started up Po Supplementary Explanation The EST turns the startup device OFF at panel selection Screens other than the newly started up panel stay displayed however their operations are suspended To start up two panels specify 0 as the panel No of No 3 Panels are started up in order from the No 1 specified panel Accordingly the last started up panel is displayed on top when the panel display areas are overlapping This is a transparent smart object and may be pasted anywhere There is no change to operation of the background panel 1 Handling Precautions When an unregistered panel No is entered the panel does not change The EST however turns the startup device OFF If the panels specified by panel No 1 2 and 3 do not exist all panel operations other than the background panel are suspended If the overlapping panels are the same as those specified w
11. 000 OFF 3 76 3 4 Panel Change Switches B Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic Select panel selector BG close Startup device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Call panel Enter the panel No to be started up 1 to 899 Enter the call coordinates of the panel to be started up B Supplementary Explanation The EST turns the startup device OFF at panel selection When selection of the background panel is executed all active panels are restarted This is a transparent smart object and may be pasted anywhere Handling Precautions When an unregistered panel No is entered the panel startup is ignored The EST however turns the startup device OFF Panels cannot be started up when a started up pop up panel is currently active This smart object does not function even if pasted to a background panel Execute setting of the startup device bits by one shot instructions One shot instructions may not function properly on circuits that set bits to ON at all times Ladder circuit example Rise condition SET M000 start device 3 77 3 4 Panel Change Switches Smart object name External panel close others Panel change switches Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates o cd di ae B Function This smart object forcibly closes the panel from the
12. Cross I y o e _ O _ O _ O vVIvivi 54 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 44 eee 55 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 61001 a i adrs F c 4 eadrs 4 56 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 61111 App 57 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS B Recorder Graphics 53101 EF FHFER MS ste meo KREIS e Ls EXE 53102 757 INTERVAL lt DCO CF CARD MARKER RW ERR 53103 FEES LE e lt gt gt MARKER J App 58 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 53111 a 53112 9 ale xt App 59 Revision History Date 07 02 S Coros rec o oo PLC monitor added 4 5 PLC monitor added 5 9 PLC monitor Menus added PLC Monitor Graphics added 4th Edition All are revised for correspondence in EST555Z el lie a RESTRICTIONS ON USE changed 4 3 4 6 4 9 Items of Handling Precautions added 4 12 4 16 4 20 4 24 4 40 4 46 4 63 4 73 4 91 4 95 4 99 4 103 4 107 4 111 4 115 4 119 4 122 4 142 5
13. T elock acion according o ONOFF state tobi device range 3 40 3 4 Panel Change Switches B Supplementary Explanation To start up two panels specify 0 as the panel No of No 3 Panels are started up in order from the No 1 specified panel Accordingly the last started up panel is displayed on top when the panel display areas are overlapping There is no change to operation of the background panel For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions Up eight panels including the background panel can be started up simultaneously When an opened pop up panel is active other panels cannot be started by this smart object When User is selected at Graphic type and registered graphics are used for the switch graphic the smart object size becomes the size of the graphic and the smart object cannot be scaled 8 41 3 4 Panel Change Switches Smart object name Panel change switch background panel selector others Panel change switches Scaling Paste Scaling factor 9 OQ O Ay B Function This smart object starts up the specified panel as the background panel and closes the currently active background panel when a switch is touched Each of the call coordinates of the panels to be started up can be specified Configurati
14. When using CF NCAUTION Do not turn OFF the power or insert or remove the CF card into from the slot while accessing the CF card This may corrupt data in the CF card Be sure to press the STOP button of the recorder smart object wait until BUSY changes to START and then turn OFF the power or remove the CF card Also take the following handling precautions Do not bend it drop or cause a strong shock Do not spray water or expose it to direct sunlight Do not disassemble it or insert metallic objects such as a clip Wrong handling of the CF card may corrupt its data In such a case Yamatake will not assume any responsibility Before switching the screen of the EST to the system screen or downloading or uploading be sure to press the STOP button of the recorder smart object and make sure BUSY changes to START Wrong handling of the CF card may corrupt its data In such a case Yamatake will not assume any responsibility Handling Precautions There are certain precautions that should be observed when using the CF card Carefully read the following precautions and have a thorough understanding of the characteristics of the CF card before using it About the operaiton when data is sampled anew When downloading sampling cycle change and clear device are executed the sampling is started anew When sampling is started anew take the following precautions The data in a dedicated st
15. Smart objects that do not have editing functions also can be called according to the smart object s setting gt 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 oj Recipe data setting Call the numeric keypad panel and change the value of the recipe data currently displayed at the cursor Recipe edit panel Perform copy delete operations on the recipe data Control Program No 001 Control Program No 002 Control Program No 003 Control Program No 004 Control Program No 005 Copy from No to No 4 33 4 2 Recipe Operation of Auto Write Smart Objects Recipe edit panel Perform copy delete operations on the recipe data The following shows the operation of smart objects when Auto Write has been selected for recipe smart objects Copy ftom No to No Control Program No 001 Control Program No 002 Control Program No 003 Recipe data setting The recipe data to be displayed at the smart object is set at Set Recipe Data in AP Editor Data Name 1000 DMC10 1 CH1 SP Value 150 0 DMC10 1 CH2 SP Value 130 0 DMCIO0 2 CH1 SP Value E ser valua i i AP valve 2277 0108 22787 i i 2 SP Valu
16. Te ove ass aw I Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device esa Graphic Select the graphie when the lamps OFF Color when OFF Select the delay color ofthe graphic when the lamp 6 OF J Blink when OFF Select to cause binking when te lamp is FON Graphic Select he graphic when the lamp is OoN J Color when _ Select the display color of the graphicwhenthelampisON Blink when Select to cause blinking when the lampisON Font size Select he font size rome and 16 gots LVaignment Select vercalalgnment rom FHaignment Select horizontal aignment rom eee J OFF sting Ener me dspay tent when the lamps OFF OFF color Enter the display tex color when the lamp O Oooo i iE l Bink when OFF Select to cause binking when he ampio T_T FON sting Select the display text when the lamp is ON FON color Select the display text color when he Bink when ON Select cause binking when the amp is ON TL Select the ON state display range of the lamp Po Select the data format of the lamp device data Enter the upper limit value of the lamp ON range Enter the lower limit value of the lamp ON range B Supplementary Explanation Select Graphic at OFF for the graphic selection when a lamp device is used Graphic at OFF is paired with Graphic at ON an
17. Clear processing is executed after 10 seconds elapses B Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic Enter the switch input validity time Select when the interlock function is used o ooo O Graphic Type Select general _______________________________L Color Selectthedisplaycolorofthegraphic onse Select the Tontaize from Valignmeni Select vertical alignment from H alignment Select horizontal alignment from left center right sin E Text color SC Enter the display text color mrok Interlock action according to ONOFF slate fbi doves Range Ci Interlock action according to bit device range 02 2 Supplementary Explanation For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 The alarm monitor contacts the alarm names and the messages are registered at Set Alarms in AP Editor For details see the Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Application Preparation Manual No CP SP 1088E Handling Precautions User cannot be selected as the graphic type selection 3 186 3 12 B Function B Configuration Basic B Example Digital clock Clocks Smart object name Scaling Scaling factor Text size O interlocked 3 12 Clocks Paste coordinates This smart object displays the EST inte
18. Trend information display Displays the information for the sampling channels Also displays the current values units trend names and alarm information for the sampling trends Name Unit Alarm Current value 4 126 4 6 Trend Display Selection Panel Touching the trend display selection panel call switch displays the trend display selection panel Select the channel of which the trend is to be displayed Up to 8 channels can be specified 1b m Channel selection switch Channel selection switch Select the channel of which the trend is to be displayed The selected channels are displayed in blue Those not selected are dimmed Unused channels are displayed in cyan Name Displays the data name of the sampling channel interval Change Panel Touching the sampling cycle display change switch for 5 seconds calls up the interval change panel Touch the Interval switch and the numeric keypad pops up allowing you to change the sampling cycle for recorder data Handling Precautions When the sampling cycle is changed sampling is started anew At this time the data written to the CF card remains without being erased However this data cannot be read from the EST 4 127 4 6 Recorder B CF Card Check Panel Touching the CF card check panel call switch calls up the CF card check panel The information contained in the CF card application
19. lt gt gt 4 cn cn c lt gt J o 00776 OQfiT c 1 gt oo m 2 5 ME Mi e IL App 3 Appendix LIST OF SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS Rocker Switch Graphics With smart objects for which the ON graphic is automatically selected when the OFF graphic is selected the graphic No of ON graphics is the No obtained by adding 500 to the OFF graphic No 04001 04002 04051 o 04151 04152 04155 04501 04502 04551 04552 04601 04602 04605 04651 04652 04655 Appendix LIST OF SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS B Slide Switch Graphics With smart objects for which the ON graphic is automatically selected when the OFF graphic is selected the graphic No of ON graphics is the No obtained by adding 500 to the OFF graphic No 05001 05002 05005 05004 85005 05006 02007 05009 si fi 05451 05052 05055 05054 05055 05056 0505 05058 05101 05182 05105 05104 05105 05186 05107 E 0 05151 05152 05155 05154 05155 On Ont Uh Uh il MEFR 05501 05502 05502 65504 05505 05506 05507 me mo 085551 05552 05555 05554 055552 05556 05557 Cisa 05601 05602 05605 05604 E E E EM 05605 05606 05607 E z 3 E 05051 05052 05055 05654 05855 05656 05057 05056 DER DER App 5 Appendix LIST OF SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS
20. n E c Bi 2 gt gt gt em ra e ra ra Do n2 co na hi gt LEJ LI lt ba cn mim cS ne cm mo C ro cri CN a Fa cn on ma Ho i e ne T a j gt em c eo ee 4 2 2 5 ah CH a App 2 Appendix LIST OF SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS c c n lt gt c cn c 00509 00510 00519 00520 NN 00601 00602 00605 00604 00505 00607 00615 00614 00615 00650 00651 c c n pi c c n no LI ln lt gt gt n c c n mo n gt lt gt n I E KE lt gt lt gt c e lt gt lt gt o ec lt gt lt gt c gt c lt gt c lt gt co o L L L c c CM lt lt gt c Ix c c o c c o le E gt gt 5 gt gt gt M gt gt gt I gt gt gt gt e J gt c c c N c c c J CN 29 E lt 00751 00752
21. 549 100 Touch switch D101 D102 D103 D104 D105 7 Keyboard panel call ABCD JKLMNOP 12345678 ON state display Keyboard panel Input data is written to the string device area Notify device M000 ON Li OFF state display PLC device D100 D101 D102 D103 D104 D105 3 149 3 9 Keyboard Call B Smart Object Parameters Basic String device Enter the communications channel the device address and the word device Notify device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Hide device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device SW comm Select when using switch communicatos _________ _ _ interlock Selectwhenusinginterlocked operator Graphic Seeamegraphic ype tom generaus Mi OFF Graphic Select the display OFF Graphic Color when OFF____ Select the display coloro ihe OFF Graphic BinkwhenOFF SectocauebinkngwhenOFF O ON Graphic Select the display graphic when the numeric keypad is called up Color when ON Select the graphic display color when the numeric keypad caledup Binkwnen ON Select to cause blinking when the numeric Keypadiscalledup Seecmetntsizetom8andtedos Valgnment Select vertical alignment from fop eenterfbotiom Halignment____ Select horizontal alignment from OFF sting OFF c
22. Counter contact Enter address range upper limit value of Counter contact CS 0 to 1023 upper limit value Counter contact Enter address range lower limit value of Counter contact CS 0 to 1023 lower limit value imi CC CC Timer coil lower Enter address range lower limit value of Timer coil TC 0 to 2047 limit value Counter coil upper Enter address range upper limit value of Counter coil 0 to 1023 limit value Counter coil lower Enter address range lower limit value of Counter coil 0 to 1023 limit value 4 102 4 5 PLC monitor Supplementary Explanation The monitor start address becomes the lower value device address when the monitor start address is changed by the device modify panel under the monitor range of one screen with less than 32 words The device display of PLCs and monitor smart objects may be partially different from those of the manufacturer The following shows the cross reference of each device Covo The detail of smart object settings is given in 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions the driver for monitor smart objects to be used for each channel with Setup information Basic setting gt Communications setting of the AP Editor For detail on the settings refer to Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Application Preparation Manual No CP SP 1088E When the monitor range is less than 32 words in one screen and th
23. Fil color display color ofthe graphic Select the numeric display color ofthe PV J SP color SsechenumeicdspaycooronheSP Mv coor the numeric value display color of WW 1 Enterihe mam _ Use decimal point Select when using a numeric keypad panel with decimal point input 4 23 4 1 PID controller Supplementary Explanation Changes to the SP value of each channel are executed on the SP value of the currently selected SP set of the CB508 For example when the SP value is changed while SP3 is selected SP3 will be rewritten The settable range of the SP value is the lower SP limit to the upper SP limit in the setup on the CB508 When the SP lamp is operating the SP value in the lamp is displayed For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions Set the communications channel to which the PID controller is to be connected to Yamatake CPL general host link The panel may not function properly when the below items on the CB508 are changed while a panel to which this smart object is pasted is activated The panel will function properly by restarting the panel after the change has been made Common setup Temperature unit PV range type CB518 is not supported Do not use this s
24. Select o cause binking when he amp is OFF T_T FON sting display txt men epson S FON color Select the display text color when the lamp ig 0N Bink when ON to cause inina when Supplementary Explanation Select Graphic at OFF for the graphic selection when a lamp device is used Graphic at OFF is paired with Graphic at ON and is automatically selected Note however that Graphic at OFF Graphic at ON can be freely selected from registered graphics when User has been selected at Graphic type For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 1 Handling Precautions Enter the bit device on the PLC for the Lamp Hide device Do not enter word devices such as registers When a registered graphic is used for the lamp graphic the OFF graphic and ON graphic to be displayed must be created at the same size When a registered graphic is used for the lamp graphic the smart object size becomes the size of the graphic and the smart object cannot be scaled 3 82 3 5 Lamps Smart object name Bit type 3 state lamp Lamps Scaling Paste Scaling factor coordina O Ay Fixed Ay B Function Lamp graphics are changed according to the ON OFF state of the lamp device state 1 2 3 on the PLC The following table shows the display of lamp graphics according to the ON OFF state of the 3 bi
25. aa a putei Exe 0 2 9 4 Switch enabled ranges 1 Upper limit value Data of interlock device Lower limit value 2 Data of interlock device 2 Upper limit value or Data of interlock device lt Lower limit value 3 Data of interlock device Upper limit value 4 Data of interlock device Lower limit value Select the data format of the interlock device from Unsigned binary Signed binary Hex BCD Enter the word device on the PLC by which interlock control is to be controlled Enter the upper lower limit values of the data that is specified by Switch enabled range The PLC device can also be entered to the upper lower limit values Chapter 2 SMART OBJECT SPECIFICATIONS 2 12 Example Case Momentary switch switch device 000 bit state judgment switch enabled condition bit ON interlock device M100 Input Touch switch OFF xp ON Interlock device M100 i D i 7 OFF ON Switch device M000 OFF When the interlock device is enabled at touch switch input the switch device is turned ON However the switch device will not turn ON when the interlock device is disabled In the case of a momentary switch the switch device is reset to OFF if the interlock device is enabled at touch switch input even if the interlock device is disabled when the touch switch is deactivated Chapter 2 SMART OBJECT SPECIFICATIONS Switch Communications Input notification Switch code
26. specified device when the write execution device is started up By the write execution device the EST is reset to OFF when wiring of recipe data ends Notify Success The bit device entered to this item is set to ON when writing of recipe data has ended normally On the EST the normal end notification device is not reset to OFF On the PLC reset the normal end notification device to OFF after confirmation that the device has turned ON 4 43 4 2 Recipe Notify Error The bit device entered to this item is set to ON when a recipe data write error occurs when writing of recipe data has ended abnormally On the EST the abnormal end notification device is not reset to OFF On the PLC reset the abnormal end notification device to OFF after confirmation that the device has turned ON Recipe No device x Recipe No i Write execution device OFF Recipe write processing CO on Notify Success Notify Error Group Up to four groups can be set to each recipe data For writing of recipe data set the write execution device to the group of each recipe data Smart Object Parameters smart object size Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device interlock is used Disign Data title Enter the display title of the recipe data field Name title Enter the display title of the recipe name field Comment title Enter the display title of the recipe data comment field At mm EST555Z
27. 011 6 No 006 Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic Select the display format of the rail from vertical horizontal 222000 Enter the number of graphics to be displayed on the Enter the communications channel the device address and the word device Enter the communications channel the device address and the word device Enter the communications channel the device address and the word device Enter the communications channel the device address and the word device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Select the display graphic of graphic 1 Select the display graphic of graphic 2 Graphic 3 Select the display graphic of graphic 3 Graphic Graphic type Select user 22000 Select the display graphic of graphic 4 B Supplementary Explanation 4 76 The range in which the top left of the graphic moves is displayed as the size of the smart object For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions Be sure to enter a multiple of 16 when entering the bit device to Graphic position Set binary data within the range 1 to 12 as the graphic position data Graphics are not displayed when 0 is set as the position data When position data is set to 12 or more graphics are displayed at display position 12 The interval between graphic display positions on rail move
28. Enterthedisplaytextcolor Switch communications Switch communications function Select the switch communications function meroak TT Tnerockactonaccordigio ON OFF state obide Range action according to bit device ange Supplementary Explanation Pop up return is used only to close an active pop up panel The call panel setting is not available when pop up return is selected There is no change to operation of the background panel For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 3 32 3 4 Panel Change Switches 1 Handling Precautions If an unregistered panel No is entered to the call panel when pop up startup is selected nothing happens by touching this switch This smart object does not function when an open pop up panel is active Set pop up return smart objects to the panel to be pop up started up Open active pop up panels cannot be cleared by other smart objects When User is selected at Graphic type and registered graphics are used for the switch graphic the smart object size becomes the size of the graphic and the smart object cannot be scaled When pop up return is selected all the panels including panel overlay indication in operation before pop up are restarted with the status of panels reopened 3 33 3 4 Panel Change Switches Smart object name Panel change switch special
29. Handling Precautions When an unregistered panel No is entered the panel startup is ignored The EST however turns the startup device OFF Panels cannot be started up when a started up pop up panel is currently active Execute setting of the startup device bits by one shot instructions One shot instructions may not function properly on circuits that set bits to ON at all times Ladder circuit example Rise condition SET M000 Start device 3 71 3 4 Panel Change Switches Smart object name External background panel close others Panel change switches Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates cd di des di ee ee B Function This smart object forcibly closes the background panel from the PLC t also stops operation of currently active background panels B Configuration Basic Cat Method Basic This item is for selecting the startup method of panel selection external Method C SW start 6 Extemal start start Type Type Y Dedicated package This item is for selecting the type of sea dee panel change switch operation others C Pop up Mode Mode BG panel close This item is for selecting the operation s mode of the smart object Stertup dev BG panel close mj Startup device This item is for entering the PLC mmi p ap device for stopping backg
30. Maximum Enter the maximum value of the address range to monitor Minimum Enter the minimum value of the address range to monitor Initialize This sets the maximum and the minimum values of each device address of devices selected with the CPU kind 4 113 4 5 PLC monitor B Smart Object Parameters Basic Select CPU kind Select from monitor write monitor Smart object size dot Select the smart object size Enter EST communications channel 1 to 4 Node Enter station address of computer link module 0 to 127 Select at interlock use At write monitor selection Graphic Select display graphic Color Select graphic color Panel Enter call up coordinates of device modify panel Data modify panel Enter call up coordinates of data modify panel Hexadecimal HEX Data modify panel Enter call up coordinates of data modify panel Decimal BIN Maximum Minimum Data Register upper Enter device range upper limit value of Data Register to 12287 values limit value D Data Register lower Enter device range lower limit value of Data Register D 0 to 12287 W limit value Link Register upper Enter device range upper limit value of Link Register limit value Link Register lower Enter device range lower limit value of Link Register W 0 to 1FFF limit value File Register upper Enter device range upper limit value of File Register R 0 to FF7FE limit value File Register lower Enter de
31. Supplementary Explanation 3 170 Select OFF graphic for the graphic selection OFF graphic is paired with ON graphic and is automatically selected For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 The alarm monitor contacts the alarm names and the messages are registered at Set Alarms in AP Editor For details see the Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Application Preparation Manual No CP SP 1088E Handling Precautions User cannot be selected as the graphic type selection History is monitored regardless of the previous switch state as operation when the EST is turned ON when recording the alarm history 3 11 Alarm Monitor Smart object name Summary display alarm information display Alarm monitor Scaling Paste Scaling factor cubo oe dl E B Function This smart panel displays the state of occurrence of alarms registered to the alarm monitoring information of the application data The cursor is displayed and the alarm name and messages currently displayed at the cursor position is displayed Up to 100 summaries are stored When an alarm occurs that alarm No and the alarm name are stored in the alarm No order When 100 or more alarms simultaneously occur up to 100 alarms can be stored in the ascending order of alarm No The cursor or displayed alarm can be scrolled by using the scr
32. With edit function ect presence of the edit Select presence of the edit panelcallswitch call switch elect when displaying the recipe data comment At EST555Z plication No f Selcttedipaygraphi Fill color Select the display color of the graphic Select the display color of the cursor At the EST555Z application Comment Select the display text color of the recipe data comment When the data comment is displayed Number Coordinates Emer he cal coordinates ofthe numenio Keypad pane keys Select when the numeric keypad panel with decimal point inputisused Coordinates Enter the coordinates of the keypad panel Recipe No doy Ener communcaon channel devio ess and ie word doce Group T Wt executan device Eer The chanel the device adress andthe deve Group T Noty Success Enter the communications channel The device address and he Bt deves Group 2 Success selected Group 3 Noy Success l selected When gua Group lt Notify Success selected 4 44 4 2 Recipe B Supplementary Explanation Writing of recipe data is executed by PLC control regardless of the display state of the smart object Accordingly writing of recipe data is executed if writing is performed from the PLC even in a state where a panel on which a recipe smart object is not displayed is displaye
33. Clear device Enter the bit device on the PLC for forcibly clearing the sampled data Data format Select the display format of the sampled trend data from Unsigned binary Signed binary BCD Trend buffers The number of trend buffers to be used on the smart object is displayed Points words Set the size of the data to be saved for a single channel The setting range for data size is as follows EST Z Data setting range EST240Z 320 to 101400 EST555Z 640 to 207800 If the number of storage is changed the trend buffer is automatically secured in the dedicated storage area The settings where the trend buffer exceeds the capacity of dedicated storage area cannot be executed Set by confirming the remained capacity from the detail information Details This item displays the usage window of dedicated storage area Basic Trend Event View Control Sample dev Name Disp col Line type Line type This item is for selecting the display line type of the trend graph Display color This item is for selecting the display color of the trend graph Name This item is for entering the name of the trend data Sample device This item is for entering the word device to be sampled and saved cer Ju OK Cancel Trend Sample device Enter the word device whose trend is to be sampled When the 2 axis display format is selected for the trend channels 1 to 4 a
34. Data modify panel At the bit device monitor This is the panel to change the word data of PLC devices HT HAA ARE 4 Device address Data Device address This displays the device address that modifies data Scroll key Scrolls the device address by one word The scrolling range will be the range as set by the Min Max values of PLC monitor smart objects A Scrolls the address by one word Data The status of current data is shown in color When the red color is reversed the bits are ON and when the color is gray the corresponding bits are OFF Also if the data section is touched the device of the corresponding bits can be changed faars HAG ABE LI Device address esses Hanar 1 169092 ESSET ESC key This makes the mode return to the call up panel 4 87 4 5 PLC monitor Smart object name MELSEC A C Link Word device PLC monitor Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates dq ad B Function The Mitsubishi A MELSEC A series CPU is used in case of the direct coupling via the computer link C Link module The word device zone of the CPU can be monitored The data of PLC devices can be modified B Configuration Basic PLC kind monitor Select the PLC kind of PLC monitor MELSEC A C
35. HAAS No CP SP 1089E SMART TERMINAL EST Z Series User s Manual Smart Object Library Thank you for purchasing the AP Editor for Smart Terminal EST Z Series This manual describes the smart objects which can be used with the AP Editor to prepare application data for the EST Z Series This manual should be read by those who use AP Editor to design EST Z Series display screens and those responsible for determining operation of the application Yamatake Corporation RESTRICTIONS ON USE This product has been designed developed and manufactured for general purpose application in machinery and equipment Accordingly when used in applications outlined below special care should be taken to implement a fail safe and or redundant design concept as well as a periodic maintenance program Units for concerning to control and safety of transportation vehicles auto mobiles trains and ships etc Traffic control systems Anti disaster systems anti crime systems Safety equipment Medical equipment not specifically designed for life support Never use this product in applications which require extremely high reliability such as those outlined below Aeronautical machines Aerospace machines Submersible repeaters Nuclear reactor control systems Life support systems medical equipment etc Never use this product
36. be used This item is for entering the bit device Data format This item is for selecting the display data format of the trend data Points words for clearing the data Details This item is for displaying the usage of dedicated storage area This item is for entering the buffer size per channel Trend buffers This item displays the number of trend buffers to be used on the smart object Alarm monitoring This item is selected for sampling the alarm information Only at the time of the EST555Z application preparation CH Total A Enter the number of channels by which trends are to be sampled and displayed The number of channels that can be sampled and displayed on a single smart object is 1 to 8 Note however that the number of channels that can be displayed when 2 axis display format is selected is 1 to 4 CH Total B when 2 axis display is selected Sampled data is displayed in the form of a 2 axis trend graph Enter the number of channels to be displayed on the 2nd axis B axis The number of channels that are displayed on the 2nd B axis is 1 to 4 Intervals Enter the data sampling cycle within the range 1 second to 60 minutes 59 seconds With events when with event is selected Enter the number of channels by which event data is to be sampled and displayed The range of event channels that can be sampled and displayed on a single smart object is 1 to 3 4 3
37. 1 For 10 single byte characters 10226 10227 10228 10251 10252 10255 10256 10257 E App 8 10150 10157 10154 10160 10179 19135 19204 10151 10155 10161 10180 10186 1 10205 10211 10229 10132 10156 10162 10181 10187 10206 10212 10250 10255 Appendix LIST OF SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS For 11 single byte characters 10251 19252 10256 10257 10261 10262 For 12 single byte characters 10276 10277 EI 10280 10281 as 10284 10285 EN For 13 single byte characters 10501 10502 10505 10506 ai 10509 10510 10253 19254 10255 10258 10259 10260 10278 10279 pru 10282 10285 nn 10286 10287 10303 _ 10804 _ 10507 10508 10511 10512 App 9 Appendix LIST OF SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS For 14 single byte characters 10326 10327 Ey 10329 10330 m 10332 10333 mE 10335 10336 SSS lt For 15 single byte characters 10351 10352 10554 10555 mu GM Ty i 10357 10358 10560 10361 10551 19554 10557 For 16 single byte characters 10576 10577 Eu 10579 10580 10581 10582 10585 10584 7 777 10585 10586 10587 10 Appendix LIST OF THE OBJECT GRAPHICS B Piping Graphics 08001 08002 08005 08004 08005 08006 08007 08008 08009 0801
38. 3 9 Keyboard Call Smart object name Numeric keypad Keyboard call Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates meger nterlocked B Function This smart object calls up the numeric keypad panel as a pop up panel and stops the startup source panel and other active panels when a switch is touched On the numeric keypad panel the data can be written to the write device on the PLC Selecting With calculation executes calculation processing on the value entered on the numeric keypad panel and writes the result of that calculation to the write device The data write timing can be notified to the PLC When entry of data on the numeric keypad ends the numeric keypad closes and the state before the numeric keypad was called is returned to The coordinates of the numeric keypad to call can be specified B Configuration Basic Type This item is for selecting the type of keyboard call smart object Keyboard Call 3 SW comm Select this when using switch communications functions Basic Graphic Text Num Interlock Type Select this item when using the interlock function Num keypad C With calculation Select this item when using the calculation function Format This item is for selecting the format of the data to be entered on the numeric keypad panel With calculation Format Unsigned bin
39. B Configuration Basic Function Switches Cont Type This item is for selecting the type of function switch smart object Basic Graphic Text Panel SW comm SW comm C Radio switch Clock adjustment Select this item when using switch Inching C Alam silence communications functions SW comm PLC write PLC write Mark this checkbox to write date time data that has been changed on the clock setting panel to edad the PLC Two settings Write device and Notify device are displayed Notify dev Write device This item is for entering the start word device on the PLC to which the date time data is be written Notify device This item is for entering the bit device on the PLC to be notified of completion of writing of the date time data Write device Enter the PLC address to which the date time data is to be written when the with PLC write function is used The date time data is in a 7 word data structure Year 19 50 to 99 20 00 to 35 BCD 01 to 12 BCD 0 1 to 31 BCD Day of week 0 Sunday 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Tursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday 00 to 23 BCD 00 to 59 BCD 00 to 59 BCD Notify device When the date time data is written to the PLC the bit device entered at Notify device is set and the PLC is notified that writing of the date time data has been executed 3 11 3 2 Function Switches Graphic Set the switch grap
40. B Function Panel change switch multi panel overlay others Scaling Scaling factor Lo O Ay Fixed 3 4 Panel Change Switches Paste This smart object starts up a maximum of three panels simultaneously The startup source panel and other active panels remain active Each of the call coordinates of the panels to be started up can be specified B Configuration Basic Panel Change Switches x Omnt o oo M MM Basic Design Panel SW comm Interlock Method SW start C External start Type C Selector Overlay Pop up Mode Multi panel overlay SW comm Poa fp bi iss D fe e OK Special package Others Panel Panel Change Switches Omnt Basic Design Panel sw comm Interlock q xp 22 w2p 4 a up nos P b OK Method This item is for selecting the startup method of panel selection panel change switch Type This item is for selecting the type of panel change switch operation others Mode This item is for selecting the operation mode of the smart object multi panel overlay SW comm Select this item when using switch communications functions Interlock Select this item when using the interlock function Startup panels No 1 2 3 This item is for selecting up to three panels to be s
41. Index Reg Z upper Enter address range upper limit value of Index Reg Z Z limit value Index Reg Z lower Enter address range lower limit value of Index Reg Z Z limit value Index Reg V upper Enter address range upper limit value of Index Reg V V limit value V Index Reg V lower Enter address range lower limit value of Index Reg V limit value to 199 1 4 106 4 5 PLC monitor Supplementary Explanation The monitor start address becomes the lower value device address when monitor start address is changed by the device modify panel under the monitor range of one screen with less than 48 words The device display of PLCs and monitor smart objects may be partially different from those of the manufacturer The following shows the cross reference of each device The detail of smart object settings is given in 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions Set the driver for monitor smart objects to be used for each channel with Setup information Basic setting gt Communications setting of the AP Editor For detail on the settings refer to Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Application Preparation Manual No CP SP 1088E The Data Resisters from 6000 to 7999 can not be monitored due to the difference in the monitor ranges in device dependency When the panel pasted with PLC monitor smart objects is started up by panel overlay the oper
42. Notify device This item can be set when numeric keypad use has been selected This item is for entering the bit device to be set turned ON at completion of writing of the data entered on the numeric keypad Hide device This item is for entering the bit device for clearing the graphic or text display Digits This item is for entering the number of display digits Decimal point This item is for entering the decimal point position Alarm display When this checkbox is marked the numeric display smart object has an alarm display function Numeric keypad When this checkbox is marked the numeric display smart object has a numeric keypad call function When number keypad use is selected the SW comm interlock use write device and notification device settings can be used Numeric device Enter the word device of the PLC on which data to be displayed is currently stored When numeric keypad use has been selected the data entered on the numeric keypad is written to the word device of the PLC entered to the numeric device Note however that when the write device has been set the data entered on the numeric keypad will be written not to the numeric device but to the word device on the PLC entered to the write device Graphic Value 3 6 Numeric Indicators Write device Enter the word device when data entered on the numeric keypad panel is to be written to a PLC device other than a numeric device Notify de
43. Remarks 220 x 240 5 28 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS Panel classification Bit device modify panel 1403 to 1405 B Function B Example This panel pops up and is displayed by touching the device display section of the PLC monitor smart objects The display head device address to display can be modified with the PLC monitor smart objects When the ENT key is touched the entered device address is changed to the display head device address of the PLC monitor smart objects At this time the panel closes and returns to the status before the menu panel call up When the ENT key is touched a short high pitched alarm buzzers in the case of exceeding the upper or lower limit values of device range of the device address entered with the ten key When the ESC key is touched the data entered with the ten key become invalid and the panel closes The mode returns to the status before the menu panel call up adrs adrs x zi en 5 Device kind TER GER n LJ Le Le LA 45 6 esl 1 Lo adrs The entered device address is displayed Device kind A device kind to display is selected Ten key This inputs the device address to display ENT The key determines the device address of adrs display section and makes the menu panel return to the status before call up by closing the panel e ESC The data enter
44. The size of scalable smart objects can be changed after they have been pasted at their basic size B Basic Smart Objects dots 40x40 O JOTO Function switches Word type switches Panel change Switches Radio switch 2 items 80 x 40 Radio switch 3 items 120 x 40 Radio switch 4 items 160 x 40 Inching Horizontal 80 x 40 Inching Vertical 40 x 80 Inching 4 way 120 x 120 Inching 8 way 120 x 120 Clock adjustment 40 x 40 Alarm silence 40 x 40 Word data write Constant write Data calculation Panel change switch panel selector Panel change switch panel overlay Panel change switch open pop up Panel change switch special package selector Panel change switch multi panel selector others Panel change switch multi panel overlay others Panel change switch background panel selector others Panel change switch background panel close others Panel change switch panel selector background change menu others Panel change switch panel selector background close others Panel change switch panel close others Panel change switch panel replace others Panel change switch panel to front others External panel selector External panel overlay External open pop up External special package selector External multi panel selector others External multi panel overlay others External background panel selector others External background panel close others External panel selector b
45. This item is for selecting the Smart object size via CMC10B Select this item when connecting the CB508 via the CMC10B EST comm CHI This item is for entering the communications channel on the EST CMC10B device address This item is for entering the device address of the CMC10B Controller device address This item is for entering the device address of the CB508 CB508 CB508 CB508 This sheet is for setting the graphic to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic Set the display text color and name of the PV SP and MV values to be displayed on the smart object 4 1 PID controller Numeric keypad PID controller x Basic Design Numeric keypad Use decimal point Select this item when a numeric Bj keypad panel with decimal point entry is to be used Use decimal point Call the numeric keypad panel having a decimal point entry function The numeric keypad panel is displayed at the right of the screen for channels 1 2 5 and 6 and at the left of the screen for channels 3 4 7 and 8 For details on the numeric keypad panel see 5 2 Numeric Keypad page 5 4 Smart Object Parameters Basic Select when connecting the CB508 via the CMC10B 1 Enter the communications channel on the EST Enter the device address of the CMC10B Enter the device address of CB508 Selectitegraphietpe OT fe
46. This sheet is for setting the switch communications functions when switch communications is used Switch communications is a function for notifying an external device host computer etc that an input operation was performed on a switch on the EST In switch communications the EST functions as a slave device An advantage of switch communications is that it reduces the program load on the external device Switch communications is not used when the device to which the EST is connected is a PLC There are two types of switch communications functions input notification and completion notification With input notification notification is executed at input on a touch switch such as a smart object With completion notification notification is executed when setting of data is completed for example on a numeric keypad call smart object This item executes switch notification operation at input on a touch switch Omnt Basic Graphic Text comm Interlock Switch code 0 Switch code This item is for setting data within the SW functions range 32768 to 32767 Send at ON 9 Switch functions This item is for setting the operation functions in switch communications C Send at ON OFF C Buffer at ON C Buffer at ON OFF OK Cancel Help Set the switch code to be notified Set the data within the range 32768 to 32767 2 13 Chapter 2 SMART OBJECT SPECIFICATIONS 2 1
47. When rotating a graphic do not set the background color of the registered graphic to transparent Doing so will prevent normal rotation Set the data of Graphic display X Y and Display angle in binary within the following ranges Graphic position X 0 to horizontal size of panel 1 Graphic position Y 0 to vertical size of panel 1 Display angle 0 to 360 When the specified coordinates are out of the panel range the graphic will be displayed inside the nearest panel Display angles exceeding 360 will be displayed as 0 Enter the bit device on the PLC as the Hide device Do not enter word devices such as registers 4 79 4 4 Graphic Movement 4 80 4 5 PLC monitor 4 5 PLC monitor The PLC monitor smart objects enable the display of PLC device data on the EST and can change the data The PLC monitor smart objects include objects to monitor the word device and the bit device Word device monitor smart objects PLC device Displays for 48 words B popora 000A 09008 080847 0000 Bit device monitor smart objects PLC device MO to M15 M16 to M31 M32 to M47 Displays for M48 to M63 512 bits M64 to M79 32 words M80 to M95 M96 to M111 M IN _ M496 to M511 4 81 4 5 PLC monitor B PLC monitor smart objects Word device 4 82 The objects can make the monitor displays of 48 words for specified PLC data
48. lt lt lt 0 30 31 Graphics 21 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS SDC40A Graphics 50501 50502 TIO lt h D mmt o DID DTI 3 1 8 AAA 5 App 22 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS DMC10 4 channel model 32101 oni One Ong ond si ITHE r 23 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS JU TT DU 5 j EL NNNM rm ud PESE UOTE E05 U EM NNI r5 D SEEN 24 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS CB508 Graphics 51001 Te 2 mi gt r 5 E 25 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS B Trend Graphics 1 axis trend Without events 50001 App 26 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 50011 27 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 150101 150102 50103 App 28 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 4 4 50112 kel 44 1 910 50113 4 252 App 29 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 150201 150202 50203 30 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 50211 150
49. o L Panel Hal m m ee This item is for entering the panel No to be called and the call coordinates OK Panel call panel selector panel 300 one of the registered alarm contacts turns ON Error Error occurrence occurrence The panel is switched to No 300 when the switch is touched Panel 1 Panel 300 Error display screen The display is switched to the display at ON when Error occurrence 3 164 3 11 Alarm Monitor B Smart Object Parameters function is used from panel selector panel overlay the bit device Graphic Type Seeetgenrd T_T OFF Graphic Select the display graphic when tne alarmis OFF Color when OFF Select the display color of the graphic when the alarmis Blink when OFF Select to cause biking when the is ON Graphic Select the display graphic when the Color when ON Selectthe graphic display color when the BinkwhenON Selectto cause blinking when the alarmisON __ Fontsize font size from and 16dots FVaignment Selectvertical alignment from topfcenteribotiom Halignment Selecthofizontl alignment OFF siring display sting when the alam OFF color Selectthe display text color when he alarm is Bink when OFE_ Selectto cause blinkin
50. registered graphic is used for the switch graphic the smart object size becomes the size of the graphic and the smart object cannot be scaled The range of the string data is expressed as an ASCII code value Text exceeding the smart object size is not displayed Data is displayed for the maximum number of characters that can be displayed When the smart object size is smaller than the text size to be displayed strings are not displayed When the string data on the PLC contains 00 Hex string data from 00 Hex onwards is not displayed When the number of entered characters on the keyboard panel is less than the number of characters to be called from the PLC when Keyboard use is selected 00 Hex is written to areas to which strings are not entered 00 Hex is not written when the number of characters entered on the keyboard panel is the same as the number of characters to be called from the PLC 3 137 3 8 Text Display Smart object name Message call Text display Scaling Paste Scaling factor coordinates Lo O Oo Ay Fixed B Function This smart object calls up message panels and closes the startup source panel and closes other active panels The message panel displays the same registered string No as the value specified on the string device When the Return key is pressed on the called up message panel the message panel closes and the state before the mess
51. 3 99 3 6 Numeric Indicators Alarm This sheet is for setting the upper lower limit values of the data when the alarm display is used Numeric Indicators Omnt Basic Graphic Value Alarm Upper value This item is for entering the upper limit value of the numeric data An alarm state occurs when the numeric data exceeds the upper limit value Alarm state numeric data gt upper limit value Upper val 999 v Lower val Jal 4 Lower value This item is for entering the lower limit value of the numeric data An alarm state occurs when the numeric data falls below the lower limit value Alarm state lower limit value gt numeric data OK numeric keypad 3 100 This sheet is for setting the numeric keypad panel when the numeric keypad is used Numeric Indicators Lx Omnt Basic Graphic Value Num keypad sw PRIL Coords qu y p Num keypad Use decimal point Coordinates This item is for entering the call coordinates of the numeric keypad panel Use decimal point Input limits Select this item when a numeric keypad panel Upper val 999 2 with decimal point entry is to be used Lower D Upper lower value This item is for entering the data entry upper lower limit values on the numeric keypad panel OK Gancel Help Use decimal point Call the numeric keypad panel having a decimal point entry functi
52. B Smart Object Parameters Selection seting Rem Basic Select the pop up action from pop up return 220020 Startup device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Call panel Enter the panel No to be started up When open pop up is selected Enter the call coordinates of the panel to be started up 110 899 B Supplementary Explanation The EST turns the startup device OFF at pop up startup return Pop up return is used only to close an active pop up panel The panel setting is not available when pop up return is selected There is no change to operation of the background panel This is a transparent smart object and may be pasted anywhere Handling Precautions If an unregistered panel No is entered to the call panel when pop up startup is selected nothing happens The EST however turns the startup device OFF If there is no active pop up panel when pop up return is selected nothing happens The EST however turns the startup device OFF This smart object does not function when an open pop up panel is active Set pop up return smart objects to the panel to be started up Open active pop up panels cannot be cleared by other smart objects Execute setting of the startup device bits by one shot instructions One shot instructions may not function properly on circuits that set bits to ON at all times Ladder circuit example Rise condition SET M000 Start device
53. Design This sheet is for setting the graphic to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic Set the display text color and name of the PV SP and MV values to be displayed on the smart object Numeric keypad PID controller x Basic Design Numeric keypad Use decimal point Select this item when a numeric keypad panel with decimal point entry is to be used Coordinates This item is for entering the call coordinates of the numeric keypad panel OK Cancel Help Use decimal point Call the numeric keypad panel having a decimal point entry function For details on the numeric keypad panel see 5 2 Numeric Keypad page 5 4 B Smart Object Parameters Basic Select when a SDC is connected via the CMC10B NEN Enter the communications channel on the EST Enter the device address of the CMC10B Enter the device address of the SDC40A Dess Graphic ype Selectthe gaphioype me Seamore vo Select he numere color ofthe SP color Select he numeric display color ofthe SP TT FM color Select the umeris value spay olor of WY Name Text color Entertienametextcoor Numeric Select when using a numeric keypad panel with decimal keypad Enter the call coordinates of the numeric keypad panel 4 1 PID controller Supplementary Explanation Changes to
54. Selection setting item Alarm display Select display function of alarm state Cannot be selected when the numeric keypad is used Numeric keypad Select the call function of the numeric keypad panel Cannot be selected when the alarm display is used ere 7c WEE binary signed binary Hex BCD Numeric device Enter the communications channel the station address and the word device Hide device Enterthe communications channel the station address andthe bitdevice Digis Entrtenumberofdiplaydgisoftenumencdata CS Decmalpom Enterthe display position ofthe decimalpoint Grapho Tye Selectthe graphic type trom generaluser OFF Graphic SeeciedspayOFFGrphc Color when OFF Select the display color of the OFF Graphic o o When the numeric keypad or alarm i ji display lower case display OFF numeric color Select the numeric display color when OFF 2 When the numeric keypad or alarm ue Asta Calculation Read calculation mode Select the calculation mode for the display data from an Read calculation device Enter the constant or the communications channel the station Write calculation data Select the calculation mode for the write data from add subtract multiple divide ee i i address and the word device pee esu ede c i eue address and the word device E address and the word dev
55. Write interlock This item is for entering the bit device for enabling the write switch Recipe Norn der Error dey Notify device use This item is for notifying the external PLC of the state during recipe writing Items Selects the display content When the 640 x 370 smart object size is selected Selects only at the EST555Z application preparation Comment Displays the data and comments All items Displays the data name and comments Interlock Enter the bit device on the PLC for enabling editing of recipe smart objects Recipe smart object change functions include functions for setting the recipe data setting the recipe name and editing recipes These functions can be set when the setting interlock device is ON 4 35 4 2 Recipe Recipe data setting Touching the key or touching the recipe data line displayed calls up the numeric keypad panel changing the recipe data into the data entered on the numeric keypad panel Recipe name setting Touching the recipe name display field calls up the keyboard panel Change the recipe name to the data entered on the keyboard panel Recipe edit Touching the Edit key calls up the recipe edit panel Recipes can be duplicated and deleted on this panel Write interlock Enter the bit device on the PLC for enabling operation of the Write switch when executing writing of recipe data by the Write switch on the recipe smart object The Write switch can
56. _ Interval change switch Touching this switch causes the Device Selection Menu to pop up and you can change the sampling device for each channel The switch is not displayed for unused channels Selection No name display This item displays the No of the currently selected device and its name Trend display This item controls display of trends on each channel This function is only at the time of the EST240Z application preparation ON Displays the trend data OFF Clears display of the trend data N C Unused channel Trend display settings are the settings of a temporary display state Trend display settings are cleared when a panel is switched Interval change switch Touching this switch causes the numeric keypad panel to pop up and you can change the trend data sampling cycle 4 51 4 3 Device selection menu This menu pops up and is displayed by touching the device change switch This menu displays the name of selection devices set in the smart object paste parameters and is used for changing the device to be sampled to the device of the selected name Change channel Selection No name display Cursor 004 1 Change channel This item displays the channel to be changed Selection No name display This item displays the current selection No and trend name of the channel to be changed Cursor The trend devices to be ch
57. page 2 5 Handling Precautions Enter the multiple of 16 when entering the bit device to the write destination device Do not enter the final address of the PLC to the write device 3 152 3 10 Data Setter Smart object name UP DOWN setter Scaling Paste Scaling factor Text size coordinates meger interlocked B Function This smart object displays 1 word data of the numeric device on the PLC e Numeric values are incremented or decremented by touching the up arrow key or the down arrow V key The numeric value is written to the PLC by releasing the key Holding down the keys fast feeds incrementing and decrementing The input upper limit value and the input lower limit value can be set B Configuration Basic Data Setter Cmnt Type Basic Graphic Setter SW comm Interlock This item is for selecting the type of keyboard call smart object Type C Password keypad Bit pattern setter SW comm ne UP DOWN setter Select this item when using switch communications functions SW comm Interlock Select this item when Interlock use is Format 1 dieit BCD selected Numeric dev 4800000 Format This item is for selecting the data format of the numeric device Numeric device This item is for inputting the word device on the PLC to be displayed OK Cancel Help and set Format Select the data format for the numeric
58. 200 300 Binary unsigned numeric keypad with decimal point key Remarks EST240Z 140x180 EST555Z 200 X 250 Binary signed numeric keypad with decimal point key Remarks EST240Z 140x180 EST555Z 200 X 250 5 6 BCD numeric keypad with decimal point key EST240Z 140x180 515557 200 X 250 Hexadecimal numeric keypad with decimal point key EST240Z 140 220 575557 200 X 300 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS 5 7 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS 5 3 Keyboard Panel classification Keyboard B Function This panel is activated to pop up by string display smart objects or keyboard call smart objects On the keyboard panel up to 64 characters for strings can be written to the word device of the PLC Touching the ENT key writes the entered string to the PLC word device closes the panel and returns to the state before the keyboard panel is called B Example Keyboard use ON and string device D100 when the keyboard panel is called by string display smart objects EST display ABCD JKLMNOP Touch the string indicator Keyboard panel call ABCD JKLMNOP Keyboard panel ON state display Input string 12345678 PLC device Reading at data WING 0100 3231h 12345678 0101 3433h 0102 36358 0103 3837h 0104 00008 0105 0000h Input string 123456789 PLC device Reading at data WIRS 0100 3231h 123456789 0101 3433h 0102 3635h 010
59. 3 11 Alarm Monitor Smart object name Alarm information clear Alarm monitor Scaling Paste Scaling factor ol Oo Ay Fixed B Function This smart object clears the alarm information history number of occurrences sampled according to the alarm monitoring history of the application data nadvertent clearing of data can be prevented by setting an entry wait time B Configuration Basic Crant Basic Graphic Text Interlock Type Alam lamp C Display alarm info c This item is for selecting the type of alarm monitor smart object Details fo c 5 meson x Validity time s P This item is for setting the touch wait Validity time s time of the switch Interlock use DE Select this item when using the interlock function Validity time s Set the touch wait time of the switch in seconds If the switch is not held down for the time set here the data is not cleared Graphic This sheet is for setting the graphic to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic Text This sheet is for setting the string to be displayed on the smart object and the display text color Interlock This sheet is for setting the entry enabled conditions for the switch 3 185 3 11 Alarm Monitor B Example Validity time 10 Clear Continuously touch Switch for 10 seconds
60. 3 12 Clocks B Supplementary Explanation The following smart objects are used for correcting the time Smart object type Smart object name Function switches Clock setting call Corrects the internal clock Clock External clock adjustment Adjusts the internal clock second time to 0 by external bits turning ON Handling Precautions Only General can be selected for the graphic type User cannot be selected 3 190 Smart object name Digital calendar Clock B Function Scaling Scaling factor Text size O ntegermuttiple interlocked 3 12 Clocks Paste coordinates This smart object displays the date Month Day Year and day of the week in digital format Configuration Basic Omnt Basic C Digital clock C Analog clock Ext clock adjust No 10301 A E E Text color OK November 26 Sunday 2000 Sun 11 26 2000 Type This item is for selecting the type of clock smart object Type This item is for selecting the graphic type to be displayed No This item is for selecting the graphic to be displayed Color This item is for selecting the display color of the graphic Text color This item is for selecting the display text color of the calendar 3 191 3 12 Clocks B Smart Object Parameters Selecioniseling tem Basic Selec general pou
61. Alarm message 16 characters x 4 220 x 120 lines Alarm message 32 x 2 Panel No 1246 n Remarks Alarm name 16 characters x 1 line Alarm message 32 characters x 2 300 x 100 lines 5 15 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS 5 7 Trend Menus Panel classification 1300101319 B Function This panel is activated to pop up by touching the icon display field on trend smart objects for three seconds or more The upper and lower limit values of trend displays can be changed Display non display of trends can be set to each channel Touching the SET key closes the panel and returns to the state before the menu panel was called B Example SET Range Display aoe Upper 1234 Ranes Lower 1234 Trend ON Display Range display This item controls display of the upper lower limit values ON Displays the upper lower limit values OFF Clears display of the upper lower limit values Upper lower This item changes the upper lower limit values Touching a switch area displays a numeric keypad on which you can change the value Trend display This item controls display of trends on each channel ON Displays the trend data OFF Clears display of the trend data N C Unused channel B Supplementary Explanation New values after the upper lower value displays and upper lower limit value settings are changed are held in memory until the EST is reset Trend display settings are the settings of a tempo
62. B Inching Switch Graphics Lett right 07001 07002 07005 07004 07005 Up down 07051 07052 07055 07054 07055 4 way 07101 07102 07105 gt CER m a 07104 07105 al sl 6 Appendix LIST OF SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS Border Graphics For 1 single byte character 10001 10000 10005 10004 10005 10006 10087 El Ej B E 10008 10009 10010 10011 10012 E E m For 2 single byte characters 10026 10027 10028 10029 10050 10051 10052 i mu mM N 10055 10054 10055 10056 10057 For 3 single byte characters 10051 10052 10054 10055 10056 10057 E 10058 10059 10060 10061 10062 For 4 single byte characters 10076 10077 10078 10079 10080 10081 10082 ER 10083 10084 10088 10086 10087 5 single byte characters 10101 1010 10105 10104 10105 10106 10107 mg lh EN 10108 10109 10110 10111 10112 p is E App 7 Appendix LIST OF SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS For 6 single byte characters 10126 10127 10128 10129 10155 10154 10155 10156 HEN fe ae For 7 single byte characters 10151 10152 10155 10157 10158 10159 For 8 single byte characters 10176 10177 10178 10182 10185 10184 For 9 single byte characters 10201 10202 10207 10208 10209 0210 EE
63. Design This sheet is for setting the graphic to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic Set the display text color and name of the PV SP and MV values to be displayed on the smart object 4 1 PID controller Numeric keypad Example1 4 14 PID controller Use decimal point Select this item when a numeric keypad panel with decimal point entry is to be used coms p zb gt Upper val Lowerval 82763 Use decimal point Call the numeric keypad panel having a decimal point entry function For details on the numeric keypad panel see 5 2 Numeric Keypad page 5 4 Name Up to 16 1 byte characters can be entered PU MAR HT SO Channel individual monitors Common monitors Channel individual monitors PV This displays the PV process variable value SP This displays the SP set point value MV This displays the MV manipulated variable value RDY This lights when each channel is in the Ready mode MAN This lights when each channel is in the Manual mode AT This lights when auto tuning is being executed on each channel SP SET Touching the SP SET button for each channel causes a numeric keypad to pop up so that the SP value can be changed Common monitors OUT This lights when the output terminal of each channel is ON EV This lights when the EVENT terminal is ON BUS This lights when BUS outp
64. Left alignment Center Right alignment Set the string and string color to be displayed on the smart object The number of setting items in the string setting changes according to the function of the smart object Specify the blink operation Blink operation can be specified on smart objects that have a string display switching function When blink is selected the ON and OFF string colors are alternately displayed The blink interval setting can be changed in the General Configuration Information using the AP Editor and with the System screen of the EST unit Chapter 2 SMART OBJECT SPECIFICATIONS B Interlock Bit state Select Use interlock when assigning conditions to touch switch input Two interlock conditions are available Bit state and Range judgment Input on touch switches is controlled enabled disabled by the ON OFF state of the bit device that is specified as the interlock device Omnt Basic Graphic Text SW comm Interlock Device useage Bit state C Range Bit state Switch conditions Bit ON Bit OFF Switch enable conditions This item is for selecting the conditions ON OFF state of the interlock device for enabling input on touch switches Interlock dev zl Interlock device This item is for entering the bit device OK Cancel Help Switch enable condition Interlock device 2 10 Select the condition for enabling touch switch input condi
65. OFF st data is not written PLC device The numeric keypad panel does not close D100 1000 Press the ENT key to write input data M000 ON 1000 it write device D100 and set notify device M000 to ON 3 101 3 6 Numeric Indicators B Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Alarm display Select when using the alarm display function Cannot be selected when the numeric keypad is used Numeric keypad Select when using the numeric keypad call function Cannot be selected when the alarm display is used ome binary signed binary Hex BCD Numeric device Enter the communications channel the station address and the worddevice Hidedevice Enterthe communications channel the station address and the Diis Emere number of display digits ofthe numericdata SSCS Decimal point Enterthe display position ofthe Graphe Tye from generalluser OFF Grapho SelcthedspaygrphicatoFF Color at OFF Select the display color of the OFF graphic When the numeric keypad or alarm display lower case display OFF numeric Select the numeric display color when OFF When the numeric Keypad or alam Blink when ON _ e address and the word device c DNE 5500 address and the word device Coordinates Enter the cal coordinates of the numeric Keypad pane Us
66. ON OFF data X002 trend buffers storage areas are used as e 3 alarm information channels Eight dedicated Sampling of trend data is started by control device M000 ON 4 60 4 3 Smart Object Parameters Basic When displaying by two axes enter the number of channels on the A axis axes intervals Trend buffers 640 to 207800 Data format Select the data format of the trend data from unsigned binary signed en Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device With events Enter the number of samples and display channels for the event data When with event is selected CH Total B Enter the number of channels on the B axis When 2 axes is selected 1 to4 Trend Sample device Enter the communications channel the device address and the word device Display color Select the display color of the trend graph for each channel Po Name Enter the trend data name for each channel 16 single byte alphanumeric characters EST240Z 12 single byte alphanumeric characters EST555Z Line type Select the display line type of the trend graph for each Sample device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device 220 Name Enter the event data name for each channel 16 single byte alphanumeric characters Enter the display text color of the event name Select the display
67. Recipe name Cursor display field Data field Data name field Data comment field Data setting keys Write switch Recipe edit switch Recipe selection switch 5 5557 Recipe No Data field Recipe name Data name field Data comment field Write switch Data Comment 4 28 Recipe edit switch Recipe selection switch Recipe No Recipe name Data field Data name field Data comment field Cursor display field Data comment field Scroll keys 4 2 Recipe This displays the No of the currently displayed recipe This displays the name of the currently displayed recipe using up to 28 1 byte characters Touching the recipe name display area causes the keyboard panel to pop up and you can change the recipe name Note however that when Interlock has been set in the recipe smart object settings the keyboard panel is not called if the setting interlock device is OFF This field displays the data currently set to the selected recipe This field displays the name corresponding to the data No using up to 21 1 byte characters The data name that is displayed is set at Application Manager Configuration Information Recipe Data in AP Editor This field displays the data comment corresponding to the data No using up to 21 1 byte characters The data comment that is displayed is set at Application Manager Configuration Information Recipe Da
68. This item is for entering the alarm information device Monitor device Up to 40 devices whose data is to be sampled can be set The data set here becomes the trend sampling device that can be changed on the EST Name Enter using up to 16 1 byte characters at the EST240Z application preparation and using up to 12 1 byte characters at the EST555Z application preparation To change the trend device select the trend to be sampled from these names On the EST the name is displayed and the sampling device is not displayed Alarm device Enter the bit device of alarm sampling 4 69 4 3 Example To change the sampling device 0 E gt m Speed Speed Touch the icon at the top right of the smart object for 3 seconds Touch the icon at the top right of the smart object for 3 seconds Trend Selection Panel cur 001 oos 05 m Label ooe 06 wm ETA 97 pw i oor 01 Selector Type Trend Menu Panel 002 TEMP 02 003 03 004 TEMP 04 4 When the trend to be sampled of the sampling cycle has been changed all trend data sampled so far will be cleared and sampiling of the data at the newly set trend settings will be started E DM 4 70 4 3 Smart Object Parameters Basic When displaying by
69. This sheet is for setting the entry enabled conditions for the switch B Example Numeric device D100 EST display PLC device At startup of the AV keys the set data is written to the numeric device 0100 123 The set data value is incremented while the A key is held down The set data value is decremented while the V key is held down 3 154 3 10 Data Setter B Smart Object Parameters Basic Format Select the data format of the setter from 4 digit BCD 5 digit iy ee NN Numeric device Enter the communications channel the device address and the word device SWcomm Select when using switch communications melo Select when using the interlock function Gehe Te N display graphic ofthe UPDOWNeeter O O Ge rie SET point Enter the display position of the decimal point 4 digit BCD 0 to 3 5 digit binary 0 to 4 Select the display text color of the numeric value 555 Alarm Select the display text color when the upper lower limit values are exceeded Upper value Enter the upper limit value when the data is updated 4 digit BCD 0 to 9999 5 digit binary 32768 to 32767 Lower value Enter the lower limit value when the data is updated 4 digit BCD 0 to 9999 5 digit binary 32768 to 32767 Switch communication Switch communications function Select the switch communications function Interlock T Interock oper
70. Upper limit value gt Lower limit value 3 Trend buffer Two dedicated storage areas are used as trend buffers PLC device Trend display Event display Sampling 4 trend channels Data save area 5000 words 2 event channels When the sampling data exceeds 5000 data is deleted in order from the oldest data and the latest sampling data is stored M010 ON OFF data Sampling of trend data is started by M011 ON OFF data control device M000 ON D000 Numeric data 0001 0002 0003 4 59 4 3 Trend Example 2 EST555Z Number of channels A 3 D000 2CH D001 D003 number of events 2 M010 2CH M011 Alarm device ICH X000 2 X001 3CH X002 number of stores 7000 number of trend buffers 8 control by device control device M000 Upper limit value Trend display Event name wr EE o z Event display ge is F SCALE gh Temp Tenp Menu panel call switch B n 14161 4 gt Speed Speed Scale switch Scroll keys Sampling cycle Data save area 7000 words 3 trend channels When the sampling data exceeds 7000 data is deleted in order from the oldest data and the latest sampling data is stored ON OFF data M010 ON OFF data M011 aaa ON OFF data X000 ON OFF data X001
71. When a new CF card is used the volume of data to be saved is 25 M words 50 MB as a standard The number of storage points and storage period when using the CF card on the recorder smart object dialog box of the AP editor are calculated and displayed based on this value When an application whose first 8 characters 8 single byte characters are the same as those of an existing application is downloaded when using the recorder the sampled data in the CF card is overwritten and the data so far can no longer be read This is because the first 8 characters of an application name are used to identify the data in the CF card The following single byte characters cannot be used for this application name space When operating recorder smart object When CF card is in use if the CF card is formatted an operation such as a display of the oldest data or a thumbnail display using the recorder smart object will result in the CF card being read continuously preventing the CF card from being removed In such a case display the latest data increase the display magnification and do not read data to the CF read STOP and START are the buttons to enable a write to the CF card When the display magnification is reduced even during a START display the data in the CF card is always read In this condition the CF card cannot be removed Before removing the CF card return the contraction rate to x1 and display the latest data
72. When an opened pop up panel is active other panels cannot be started by this smart object When User is selected at Graphic type and registered graphics are used for the switch graphic the smart object size becomes the size of 3 30 the graphic and the smart object cannot be scaled 3 4 Panel Change Switches Smart object name Panel change switch open pop up Panel change switches Scaling Paste Scaling factor Lo ol O Ay B Function Startup This smart object causes the specified panel to pop up and start and closes the startup source panel and closes other active panels The call coordinates of the panel to be started up can be specified Return This smart object clears the active pop up panel and returns to the state before the panel was activated This smart object is pasted to the panel to be started up Configuration Basic Panel Change Switches x Method DS Design SW comm Interlock This item is for selecting the startup method of panel selection panel change switch Method 6 SW start C External start Type Type This item is for selecting the type of panel change Selector Special package switch operation pop up C Overlay C Others Mode c i This item is for selecting the operation mode of the smart object from Pop up Return Mode NL SW comm SW com Select this item when using switc
73. When the corresponding device is not found in the menu select the General Monitor method Monitor Monitor the device value The data can not be modified Modify The device values can be monitored and modified Smart object size dot Selects only at the EST555Z application preparation Selects the 320 x 160 pixels automatically on the EST240Z Interlock device The Interlock device can be selected when the terms are added at the time of data write If the Modify has not been selected with Monitor method the Interlock device can not be selected Enter a PLC bit device to control the interlock operation The data modify panel can be called up when the bit device is ON 4 112 4 5 PLC monitor E s X Graphic Set the graphic to display with smart objects and set the display color Panel Designate the call up coordinates of the device modify and the data modify panels PLC monitor Device modify panel Enter the call up coordinates of device modify panel Data modify panel HEX Enter call up coordinates of data modify panel HEX hexadecimal Data modify panel BIN Enter call up coordinates of data modify panel BIN decimal Maximum Minimum values Enter the device range to monitor PLC monitor Initialize Initialize the maximum and the minimum values
74. When the pop up panel is active a numeric keypad panel cannot be called 4 12 4 1 PID controller Smart object name DMC10 2 channel model PID controller Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates __ ee eee a B Function This smart object enables monitoring of the run state of the DMC10 2 channel model The SP value can also be changed B Configuration Basic This item is for selecting the IMEC type Basic Design Numeric keypad E Smart object size dot C 0610 DMC10 CCH This item is for selection the Smart 50020 21 UCH object size C SDO30 31 68508 via CMC1 OB C SDO40A STD RSP Select this item when connecting the DMC10 via the CMC10B Smart object size dot 240 X 120 C 320 x 200 EST comm CH This item is for entering the Mig communications channel the EST EST comm CH p CMC10B device address dev This item is for entering the device Controller dev adrs address of the CMC10B 7 24 Controller device address This item is for entering the device address of the DMC10 Smart object size dot Selects only at the EST555Z application preparation Selects the 320 x 200size automatically on the EST240Z via CMC10B Select this item when the DMC10 is to be connected to the EST via the CMC10B
75. alarm monitor smart object con Lamp type Repireentative This item is for selecting the type of alarm lamp operation Call panel This item is for selecting the panel call Call panel Panel selector hd Hide dev method when the panel call function is used Hide device This item is for entering the bit device for clearing graphic or text display Call panel Select this item when the panel call function is used Select from Panel selector Panel overlay as the call method Panel selector The specified panel is started up and the startup source panel and other active panels are stopped Parts that are not overwritten on the newly started up panel are not cleared and remain displayed Note however that updating of displays is stopped There is no change to operation of the background panel Panel overlay The specified panel is displayed overlapping The startup source panel and other active panels stay active Up to eight panels including the background panel can be started up simultaneously 3 163 3 11 Alarm Monitor Graphic Set the OFF ON Graphic to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic Text Set the display string at OFF ON to be displayed on the smart object the display string and the display text color Panel This sheet is for setting the panel call when Call panel is selected Omnt Basic Graphic Text Panel P if
76. graphic position D101 display angle D102 graphic specification device graphic device 2110 EST display Registered graphic Y coordinate 120 coordinate 150 Nw angle 45 Jesss 0 Graphic No 2 PLC device D100 D101 D102 4 78 Graphic position X Graphic position Y Display angle Graphic device 4 4 Graphic Movement B Smart Object Parameters Basic Select when the display angle setting is used Po Enter the communications channel the device address and the word device Enter the communications channel the device address and the word device Enter the communications channel the device address and the word device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Graphic Select user Seect Select the graphie designation method from constant device e Select the display graphic Select constant is selected Graphic device Enter the communications channel the device address and the word device Select device is selected B Supplementary Explanation Only functions are pasted Anywhere is acceptable as the past position The size of the registered graphic to be displayed is unlimited Specify the display coordinates of the graphic center as the graphic s display position Handling Precautions Be sure to enter a multiple of 16 when entering the bit device to Graphic display X Y Display angle and Graphic device
77. manual are indicated by various icons As the following describes the icons and their meanings be sure to read and understand the descriptions before reading this manual WA R N Warnings are indicated when mishandling this product might result in death or serious injury to the user A CA U TI O N Cautions are indicated when mishandling this product might result in minor injury to the user or only physical damage to this product Examples wrongful operation or misuse of this product These icons graphically represent the actual danger The example on the left warns the user of the danger of electrical shock Triangles warn the user of a possible danger that may be caused by White circles with a diagonal bar notify the user that specific actions are prohibited to prevent possible danger These icons graphically represent the actual prohibited action The example on the left notifies the user that disassembly is prohibited Black filled in circles instruct the user to carry out a specific obligatory action to prevent possible danger These icons graphically represent the actual action to be carried out The example on the left instructs the user to remove the plug from the outlet A CAUTION Do not turn OFF the power or insert or remove the CF card into from the slot while accessing the CF card This may corrupt data in the CF card Be sure to press the STOP button of the recor
78. used for the switch graphic the smart object size becomes the size of the graphic and the smart object cannot be scaled 3 43 3 4 Panel Change Switches Smart object name Panel change switch background panel close others Panel change switches Scaling Paste Scaling factor 9 O Ay B Function This smart panel stops operation of currently active background panels when a switch is touched B Configuration Basic Method Basic Design SW Interlock This item is for selecting the startup method of Miete panel selection panel change switch SW stat External start Type Type This item is for selecting the type of panel C Selector Dedicated package change switch operation others Overlay Mode Pop up This item is for selecting the operation mode of the smart object background panel close Mode BG panel close SW comm V SW comm Interlock Select this item when using switch communications functions 4 BE E Interlock ps 4 zi Select this item when using the interlock amp Ei function OK Design Set the switch graphic and the display string Switch Communications Set the operation of switch communications functions Interlock Set the entry enabled conditions for the switch 3 44 3 4 Panel Change Switches B Example Panel 5 in ope
79. with the display head device addresses Also these objects can call up a data modify panel and enable the change of the specified device data Head device address HEX Address range Ladrs data adrs data adrs Bana Bana Head device address Address range HEX BIN Scroll key adrs This displays the head address of a PLC device to be monitored Displays the address range of the maximum and the minimum values that are possible to be displayed Selects the display format of data The data can be displayed with the hexadecimal when the HEX switch is touched When the BIN switch is touched the data is shown with a coded binary This makes scrolling the device address to be displayed with 16 word segment The scroll range will be the specified range with the Min Max of the PLC monitor smart objects There will be no scrolling when the difference between the upper and lower values becomes less than 48 words MIA Scroll the display address to 16 words Displays the device address of the PLC being monitored When the adrs display section is touched the device modify panel is called up In this device modify panel the display head device address is changed data 4 5 PLC monitor This displays the data of the PLC device address currently being displayed When the Modify is specified with the PLC monitor smart object the data can be modified by calling up the data m
80. 0 to 8191 limit value Inner Relay lower Enter address range lower limit value of Inner Relay M 0 to 8191 limit value Latch Relay upper Enter address range upper limit value of Latch Relay L 0 to 2047 limit value Latch Relay lower Enter address range lower limit value of Latch Relay L 0 to 2047 limit value Spec Relay upper Enter address range upper limit value of Spec Relay SM 9000 to 9255 limit value Spec Relay lower Enter address range lower limit value of Spec Relay S 9000 to 9255 limit value Step Relay upper Enter address range upper limit value of Step Relay 0 to 8191 limit value Step Relay lower Enter address range lower limit value of Step Relay S 0 to 8191 limit value 5 5 Link Relay upper Enter address range upper limit value of Link Relay 0101 FFF limit value iator F Link Relay lower Enter address range lower limit value of Link Relay 0 to 1FFF limit value Annunciator upper Enter address range upper limit value of Annunciator 0 to 2047 limit value Annunciator lower Enter address range lower limit value of Annunciator 0 to 2047 limit value M Timer contact upper Enter address range upper limit value of Timer contact TS 0 to 2047 limit value Timer contact lower Enter address range lower limit value of Timer contact TS 0 to 2047 limit value Timer coil upper Enter address range upper limit value of Timer coil TC 0 to 2047 limit value
81. 00 or later editing the variable trend smart objects and then pressing the OK Switch If the message appeared change the number of storage points and set the displayed No of trend buffers to a value other than O If the actual free space in the CF card is less than the number of storage points in the CF card secured with ring write an error message appears on the screen of the EST main unit data sampling of recorder smart objects and trend smart objects is stopped and sampling of some data fails To recover from this error insert a new CF card or reformat the card If an application is downloaded including changes and specified panels recorder smart objects and trend smart objects start sampling anew When sampling is being conducted with a CF card store the data in the CF card before downloading if necessary Do not use this smart object for panels that are to be started up as pop up panels When the pop up panel is active a numeric keypad panel and trend menu panel cannot be called 4 63 4 3 Smart object name B Function 4 64 Variable trend Trend Scaling Paste Scaling factor Goofdingles L p d dead ee This smart object is for selecting the device to be sampled on the EST Up to 40 devices can be set for the device to be selected The data of the selected address is sampled and displayed as a trend Trends for up to eight channels can be displayed The ON OFF st
82. 0to FFF limit value Inner Relay upper Enter address range upper limit value of Inner Relay M 0 to 8999 limit value Inner Relay lower Enter address range lower limit value of Inner Relay M 0 to 8999 limit value o z X X M M L limit value limit value S S S B B F F Step Relay upper Enter address range upper limit value of Step Relay 0 to 8191 limit value Step Relay lower Enter address range lower limit value of Step Relay 0 to 8191 limit value Link Relay upper Enter address range upper limit value of Link Relay 0 to FFF limit value Link Relay lower Enter address range lower limit value of Link Relay 0 to FFF limit value Annunciator upper Enter address range upper limit value of Annunciator 0 to 9999 limit value Annunciator lower Enter address range lower limit value of Annunciator 0 to 9999 limit value Latch Relay upper Enter address range upper limit value of Latch Relay 0 to 4095 limit value Spec Relay lower Enter address range lower limit value of Spec Relay SM 9000 to 9999 limit value TS Timer contact upper Enter address range upper limit value of Timer contact limit value Timer contact lower Enter address range lower limit value of Timer contact TS 0 to 4095 limit value Timer coil upper Enter address range upper limit value of Timer coil TC 0 to 4095 limit value Timer coil lower Enter address range lower limit value of Timer c
83. 1 System Error 2 Error in carrier system No 2 Assembly Error Assembly part supply halt Assembly Error B Assembly part B supply halt Inspection Err Failure in part inspection Inspection Err B Failure in part B inspection Temperature Error Automatic solder furnace temperature is too high Temperature Error Automatic solder furnace temperature is too low Alarm Message Alarm Message 16 charcters Max 48 charcters Max ALM ID Displays the No of the alarm that occurred by the alarm name currently registered to the history information ALARM NAME Displays the name of the alarm currently registered to the history information of the currently occurring alarm using up to 16 1 byte characters MESSAGE Displays the alarm message currently registered to the history information of the currently occurring alarm ID using up to 64 1 byte characters i Scrolls the display alarm one cursor at a time Scrolls the display alarms 15 alarms at a time B Smart Object Parameters Basio Seea mesmas Design Graphic Fill color Select the graphic display color ALM ID Select the display text color of the alarm No ALARM NAME Select the display text color of the alarm name At the selection of smart object size MESSAGE Select the display text color of the alarm message uA Select the display color of the cursor At the selec
84. Basic Type Word write SW comm Interlock st Write data 0 Number of words 1 Lamp dev Hide dev Graphic Type This item is for selecting the type of function switch smart object SW comm Select this item when using switch communications functions Interlock Select this item when using the interlock function Format This item is for selecting the data format of constants to be entered to the write data Write device This item is for entering the write destination device for the data Write data This item is for entering the constants to be written to the PLC Number of words This item is for entering the number of data constant words to be written Lamp device This item is for entering the bit device to be monitored for switching graphic or text display Hide device This item is for entering the bit device for clearing the graphic or text display Set the switch graphic to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic When a lamp device is used the graphic setting becomes OFF Graphic and ON Graphic Text Set the string to be displayed on the smart object and the display text color When a lamp device is used the string setting becomes OFF string and ON string 3 20 3 3 Word Type Switches Switch Communications Set the operation of switch communications functions Interlock
85. Configuration Omnt Basic Design Num keypad Control Recipes 100 Manual write Recipes This item displays the number of recipes set in the recipe data settings Data This item displays the number of data items set in the recipe data settings Items Type Interlock This item is for selecting the type of recipe smart object Write interlock 4 P I Notify dev Items Ee This item is for selecting the display Notify dev setup item Recipe Interlock Norn dey Error dey This item is for entering the bit device for enabling editing of recipe data Basic Items Selects the display content When the 640 x 370 smart object size is selected Selects only at the EST555Z application preparation Comment Displays the data and comments All items Displays the data name and comments Interlock Enter the bit device on the PLC for enabling editing of recipe smart objects Recipe smart object change functions include functions for setting the recipe data setting the recipe name and editing recipes These functions can be set when the setting interlock device is ON 4 41 4 2 Recipe Recipe data setting Touching the key or touching the recipe data line displayed calls up the numeric keypad panel changing the recipe data into the data entered on the numeric keypad panel Recipe name setting Touching the r
86. Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions Enter the bit device on the PLC for the Switch Lamp Hide device Do not enter word devices such as registers When User is selected at Graphic type and registered graphics are used for the switch graphic the OFF graphic and ON graphic to be displayed must be created at the same size When User is selected at Graphic type and registered graphics are used for the switch graphic the smart object size becomes the size of the graphic and the smart object cannot be scaled 3 3 3 1 Switches 3 4 3 2 Function Switches 3 2 Function Switches Smart object name Radio switch Function switches Scaling Paste Scaling factor Lo O Ay B Function e With these smart objects when one switch is touched only that switch turns ON other switches turn OFF Switch graphics are changed according to the ON OFF state of the switch device in the PLC Configuration Basic Function Switches x Type Cront This item is for selecting the type of function Basic Graphie Test SW comm Interlock switch smart object Type SW comm 6 Radio switch Clock adjustment Select this item when using switch Inching 3 lu communications functions Interlock 7 5 esum Select this item when using the interlock function Switch dev Switch device This item is for entering the bi
87. Example Supplementary explanation System panel configuration Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS Names of System Panel Types This item shows the name of system panel types B Function This item describes the functions of system panels B Example This item provides examples of how the system panel operates using certain settings as an example B Supplementary Explanation This item provides supplementary explanations for functions and method of use B Panel Shapes This item provides the shape and size of system panels 5 3 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS 5 2 Numeric Keypad Panel classification Numeric keypad B Function This panel pops up and is displayed by numeric indicator smart objects or keyboard call smart objects When the numeric keypad is displayed and the ENT key is touched after the data is set that data is written to the specified device and the panel closes When the data entered on the numeric keypad exceeds the upper or lower limit values when the ENT key is touched a short high pitched alarm buzzers and the entered data is cleared to 0 At this time writing of the data is not performed and the panel does not close B Example Calling a numeric keypad panel by a numeric indicator smart object Numeric keypad use ON numeric device D100 number of digits 4 decimal point position 1 write device D100 numeric keypad input upper limit value 1500 nu
88. External panel selector background close others Panel change switches Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates ol cds e JI Ane B Function This smart object forcibly selects the panel from the PLC It also starts up the specified panel and closes the startup source panel and other active panels t also stops operation of currently active background panels Each of the call coordinates of the panels to be started up can be specified B Configuration Basic Method This item is for selecting the startup Basic method of panel selection external start Method C SW start Extemal start Type This item is for selecting the type of Type y 1 panel change switch operation Selector Dedicated package others C Overlay Others C Pop up Mode This item is for selecting the operation Mode Panelselector BG close mode of the smart object panel selector BG close Startup dev a Startup device cupa alp 4 This item is for entering the PLC i l w 9 device for starting up the panel D 4 zi zl 21 b p Ed Call panel This item is for entering the startup panel No and the panel call coordinates B Example Startup device 000 call panel 10 Panel 5 in operation status Panel 5 close Panel 10 i in operation status i M000 ON background panel close Panel selector 077777 M000
89. Mode Bit m This item is for entering the PLC device for Sea dss starting up the panel selector when Bit has been selected at Mode Gall panel p p 0 sj 3 OK Cancel Mode Select the operation mode of the panel selector from Bit type and Word type Bit The specified panel is started up and the startup source panel and other active panels are closed when the bit device on the PLC is activated When a panel is selected the EST turns the bits of the startup device to OFF Word By entering the panel No to panel device on the PLC that specified panel is started up and the startup source panel and other active panels are closed When a panel is selected the EST resets the panel device to 0 Call panel This item is for entering the startup panel No and call coordinates of the panel when Bit has been selected at Mode Startup device Enter the bit device on the PLC that is to be used as the panel selector trigger when Bit type has been selected at Mode Call panel Enter the No of the panel to be started up and its call coordinates when the startup device is activated 3 56 Panel Example Bit type Word type 3 4 Panel Change Switches This sheet is for setting the word device on the PLC to which panel data is stored and the call coordinates of the panel when Word is selected at Mode Panel Change Switches Omnt Ba
90. PLC This smart object stops the specified panel and closes the panel display Other active panels stay active B Configuration Basic Panel Change Switches Method Gmt TT This item is for selecting the startup method of panel selection external Basic start Method C SW start External start Type This item is for selecting the type of Type 5 panel change switch operation Selector Special package others C Overlay Pop up Mode This item is for selecting the operation Mode Panel cose x mode of the smart object panel close Startup d 2 Startup device Clear panel This item is for entering the PLC 2 Al si I device for starting up smart object Po S operation Clear panel ok omen This item is for entering the clear panel No B Example Startup device 00 clear panel 20 Panel 5 in operation status Panel 1 in operation status Panel 10 Panel 20 in operation in operation status status Panel 10 in operation status M000 ON Panel 20 clear M000 000 OFF 3 78 3 4 Panel Change Switches B Smart Object Parameters Basic Select panel close Startup device Enter the communications channel the station address and the bit device Clear panel Enter the panel No to be started up 1 to 899 B Supplementary Explanation The EST turns the startup
91. Paste Scaling factor Textsize Coordinates Ay B Function This smart object displays the data of the numeric device on the PLC in the form of a pie chart Data is displayed clockwise in the data order B Configuration Basic Cront Basic Pis chart This item is for selecting the type of smart object for he graph meter Type C Bargraph C Meter C Slide meter Data format gite This item is for selecting the data of numeric devices 2 Numeric device This item is for entering the start word device to which the pie chart data is currently stored fom Data fint Unsigned binary Update device This item is for entering the bit device for upgrading pie chart display Hide device This item is for entering the bit device for clearing the display Data format Select the data of the numeric device from Unsigned binary BCD Update device The pie chart display is updated when the panel to which a smart object is pasted is started up and when the bit of the update device is set If necessary set the bit of the update device to ON The EST resets the update device to OFF when the display is updated 3 123 3 7 Graphs Meters Pie chart Graphs Meters x Omnt Basic Pie chart Data num 10 Data number This is for entering the number of data items to be displayed on the pie Data 1 je Data 6 Data
92. Q C Link Select the data kind of a device to display GPU kind General Monitor method Words Select the monitor method Monitor method Smart object size dot C Monitor only With modify This item is for selecting the smart object size Smart object size dot 320 160 C 640 x 440 EST comm CH Enter the EST communications channel EST comm Node Enter the station address of C Link module Interlock device Select this in the case of interlock function use CPU kind Select the CPU kind to monitor from the pull menu When the corresponding device is not found in the menu select the General Monitor method Monitor Monitor the value of a device The data can not be modified Modify The device value can be monitored and changed Smart object size dot Selects only at the EST555Z application preparation Selects the 320 x 160 pixels automatically on the EST240Z Interlock device The Interlock device can be selected when the terms are added at the time of data write If the Modify has not been selected with Monitor method the Interlock device can not be selected Enter a PLC bit device to control the interlock operation The data modify panel can be called up when the bit device is ON 4 116 4 5 PLC monitor E s X er Graph
93. Relay X 0 to 337 values limit value Input Relay lower Enter device range lower limit value of Input Relay X 0 to 337 limit value Output Relay upper Enter device range upper limit value of output relay Y 0 to 337 limit value Output Relay lower Enter device range lower limit value of output relay Y 0 to 337 limit value Aux Relay upper Enter device range upper limit value of aux relay M 0 to 3071 limit value Aux Relay lower Enter device range lower limit value of aux Relay M 0 to 3071 limit value vs upper limit Enter device range upper limit value of state S 0 to 999 value Stale lower limit Enter device range lower limit value of state S 0 to 999 value Timer Contact upper Enter device range upper limit value of timer contact 0 to 255 limit value TS Timer Contact lower Enter device range lower limit value of timer contact TS 0 to 255 limit value Counter Contact Enter device range upper limit value of counter contact CS 0 to 255 upper limit value Counter Contact Enter device range lower limit value of counter contact CS 0 to 255 lower limit value 2 Color Device modify panel Supplementary Explanation The monitor start address becomes the lower value address when monitor start address is changed by the device modify panel under the monitor range of one screen with less than 32 words The device displays between the PLC and monitor smart object are partiall
94. This item is for entering the startup panel No and the panel call coordinates Background panel This item is for entering the startup background panel No and the call coordinates of the panel Design Set the switch graphic and the display string Switch Communications Set the operation of switch communications functions Interlock Set the entry enabled conditions for the switch 3 46 3 4 Panel Change Switches B Example Call panel 10 background panel 110 Panel 5 in operation status Panel 5 close Panel 10 in operation status Panel selector B6 Selector switch ON nn Ng Background panel 100 Background panel 110 B Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic Select panel selector BG Enter the panel No to be started Enter the call coordinates of the panel to be started up Po Background panel panel Background panel Enter the background panel No to be started up 110899 to 110899 Coordinates Enter the call coordinates of the background panel No to be started up SWoomm Select when using swich communications Interlock 7 5 using interlocked operation Design 7 Select the graphic type generaus Sete diari Color display color ofthe graphic Font see SeediheioiszetomBaniidos Vaigmmen Select vertic
95. When setting is changed The sampling cycle of the recorder can be changed from the EST When the sampling cycle is changed sampling is started anew At this time the data written to the CF card before the change remains without being erased However this data cannot be read from the EST The clear device of the recorder smart object erases the sampled data saved in the dedicated storage area of the EST and starts sampling anew The sampled data in the CF card before execution of the clear device remains without being erased However this data cannot be read from the EST When an application is used by two or more ESTs the device addresses of the respective ESTs are used to distinguish data of the CF card from one another Therefore once a device address is changed the data sampled so far may be regarded as data of another application preventing the existing data from being further read 4 123 4 6 When there is insufficient free space on the CF When the actual free space of the CF card is smaller than the number of storage points of the CF card secured by a ring write an error message is displayed on the screen of the EST sampling of data of the recorder smart object and trend smart object is stopped resulting in a data sampling omission To cancel this insert a new CF card or reformat the card Others When a recorder smart object using a CF card is used and the CF card is inserted in the EST
96. as those of the data area at the data area of the write source Source D010 D010 device 0011 0011 0012 0012 0013 0013 0014 0014 Destination D015 D015 device D016 D016 D017 7 words of data from D017 D018 D010 are written to D013 201S D019 N 0019 0020 0020 For details smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions Enter the bit device on the PLC for Lamp Hide device Do not enter word devices such as registers Enter the word device on the PLC as the write source write destination device Do not enter bit devices such as relays When a registered graphic is used for the switch graphic the OFF graphic and ON graphic to be displayed must be created at the same size When a registered graphic is used for the switch graphic the smart object size becomes the size of the graphic and the smart object cannot be scaled 3 19 3 3 Word Type Switches Smart object name Constant write Word type switches B Function Scaling Paste Scaling factor coordinates O Fixed This smart object writes up to 64 words of constants entered to write data starting from the write device by touching a switch Switch graphics are changed according to the ON OFF state of the lamp device The display of the graphic and text can be cleared by setting the Hide device to on the PLC ON B Configuration
97. be notified to the PLC When entry of data on the numeric keypad ends the numeric keypad closes and the state before the numeric keypad was called is returned to The coordinates of the numeric keypad to call can be specified 3 97 3 6 Numeric Indicators B Configuration Basic Type em X This item is for selecting the type of smart object for numeric display Basic Graphic Value Num keypad Alarm display This item enables display of numeric data alarms Type gas Ses Numeric keypad r E 7 Num keypad This item calls the numeric keypad panel so that data can be set SW comm nia SW comm This item can be set when numeric keypad use has been selected Fomat Ursigedbinay T ws 7 Select this item to use the switch communications functions Numeric dev White dev 7 Notify dev V Hide dev Digits 4 Decimal point 0 OK Ca XN Interlock This item can be set when numeric keypad use has been selected Select this item to use the switch interlock functions Format This item is for selecting the data format of the numeric device Numeric device This item is for entering the word device on the PLC to be displayed Write device V This item can be set when numeric keypad use has been selected This item is for entering the word device when data entered on the 3 98 numeric keypad is written to a device different from the numeric device
98. can be specified Return This smart object forcibly clears the active pop up panel from the PLC t also clears the active pop up panel when the startup device is activated and returns to the state before the panel was activated This smart object is pasted to the panel to be started up B Configuration Basic Method Panel Change Switches Omt This item is for selecting the startup EXT method of panel selection external Method Type C SW start External start This item is for selecting the type of panel change switch operation pop Type Selector Special package C Overlay C Others Mode Pop up This item is for selecting the operation mode of the smart object from Pop up Mode Popup Return Startup dev Startup device This item is for entering the PLC device for starting up the panel selector Gall panel A d H p zb w p ie pi il Call panel This item is for entering the startup ome panel No and call coordinates of the panel 3 62 3 4 Panel Change Switches B Example Call panel 10 startup device startup M000 Return M001 Panel 1 close Panel 1 in operation status Baal io ane pop up startup Panel 5 in operation status Panel front switch ON M000 ON pop up startup M000 5 M000 OFF M001 OFF M001 ON M001 ON pop up return
99. continuous lamp devices Configuration Basic Type Data Setter This item is for selecting the type of Cmnt keyboard call smart object Basic Graphic SW comm Interlock SW comm Type Select this item when using switch keypad 5 Bit pattern se communications functions C UP DOWN setter Interlock Select this item when Interlock use is SW comm Interlock selected Switch device This item is for entering the start bit Switch dev NMoo0 0 device to be manipulated when a switch is touched Lamp dev 000 Lamp device This item is for entering the start bit device to be monitored for switching the graphic display _ omen DW Hide device This item is for entering the bit device for clearing the graphic display Switch device Set the ON OFF states of continuous eight bits starting from the bit device entered to the switch device Lamp device Set the ON OFF states of continuous eight bits starting from the bit device entered to the lamp device Graphic Set the display OFF Graphic ON to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic Switch Communications Set the operation of switch communications functions Interlock Set the entry enabled conditions for the switch 3 156 3 10 Data Setter B Example Switch device M000 lamp device M010 Switch device M007 M006 M005 M004 M003 002 M001 000 Lamp device M017 M016
100. data of the numeric device on the PLC in the form of a line graph Up to 128 points can be displayed The minimum and maximum values can be set to the X and Y axis B Configuration Basic r Type Basic Line graph This item is for selecting the type of Type smart object for he graph meter C Bar graph C Meter C Slide meter Data format Pie chart G Line graph This item is for selecting the data of numeric devices Numeric device V This item is for entering the start word device to which the graph data is Data fint Unsigedbinay 7 currently stored Numeric dev Update device This item is for entering the bit device 8 for upgrading graph display M rie ES Hide device This item is for entering the bit device OK Cancel Help for clearing the display Data format Select the data of the numeric device from Unsigned binary Signed binary BCD r I fate 4 Update device The pie chart display is updated when the panel to which a smart object is pasted is started up and when the bit of the update device is set If necessary set the bit of the update device to ON The EST resets the update device to OFF when the display is updated 3 125 3 7 Graphs Meters Line graph Data number This item is for entering the number of line mu Line data items to be displayed on the graph X axis D This item is for entering the dis
101. data of up 55 channels 8 trend channels x 5 3 event channels x 5 and displays the sampled data as trends The device on which trends are to be sampled and the sampling cycle can be also be changed on the EST These smart objects are for displaying movement of registered graphics These smart objects display monitoring of the PLC device data with table formats These smart objects sample and store data of up to 16 channels and display the data of up to 8 channels among them as trend graphs Data are stored in the EST main unit or a compact flash card hereafter referred to as CF card Chapter 1 SMART OBJECT LIBRARY CONFIGURATION 1 3 List of Smart Objects B List of Basic Smart Objects Function switches Radio switch 3 5 Inching Clock Adjustment Alarm silence Word type switches Word data write Constant write Data calculation Panel change Panel change switch panel selector switches Panel change switch panel overlay Panel change switch open pop up Panel change switch special package selector Panel change switch multi panel selector others Panel change switch multi panel overlay others Panel change switch background panel selector others Panel change switch background panel close others Panel change switch panel selector background change menu others Panel change switch panel selector background close others Panel change switch panel close others Panel change switch panel replace others Panel chan
102. display The mode for sampling of recorder data can be selected from among the following sampling all the time sampling start end by PLC device sampling start end by time Calling up the display change panel allows you to select up to 8 channels to be displayed from among 16 channels The maximum and minimum values for display can be changed Sampled data can be cleared by setting the Hide device to ON The capacity of the CF card is displayed in the form of a bar graph The remaining free space is displayed as a value If the remaining free space is small the Paper Out LED goes on On the CF card check panel you can check whether the contents of the sampling data in the CF card is the same as the application on the EST 4 129 4 6 B Configuration Basic configuration Basic Channel View Conty Alarm monitorine marke Total A fis 2 axes Intervals mo sec TT Change intervals at EST Data fmt binary Clear dev Recorder configuration Total time 04 19h 39m 005 Dedicated storage 6 Details Points words i e Cancel Help g Alarm monitoring Alarm monitoring This item is for specifying whether the alarm data is sampled or not Use marker This item is for specifying whether a marker is displayed on the line of the graph or not when an alarm has been issued CH Tot
103. display Failure in part inspection Do PAGINE Alarm ocurrence Failure in part B inspection Automatic solder furnace temperature is too high E00 text color display Automatic solder furnace temperature is too low MESSAGE Displays the alarm messages currently registered to the history information of the currently occurring alarm No using up to 44 1 byte characters Exceeded characters are not displayed OCCURRED Displays the date time month day hours minutes seconds that the alarm occurred RECOVERED Displays the date time month day hours minutes seconds that the alarm was recovered A Each touch of these switches scrolls the cursor display by history at a time Al Each touch of these switches scrolls the history display by 15 histories at a time keys scroll the display to the oldest latest history record B Smart Object Parameters Smarobjerszepo SeecimesumaTobjedsue uu gi i Design Select generi TT fio Seat the pay aap DT Alarm ON Select the display text color for alam occured sass Alam OFF Selectthe display text color for alam restored states MESSAGE Select the display text color ofthe alarm message CS Curso 3 178 3 11 Alarm Monitor B Supplementary Explanation The history display No shows the order in which alarms occurred No 001 indicates the old
104. displayed has not been registered no graphic will be displayed For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configurarion Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 o Handling Precautions Be sure to enter a multiple of 16 when entering the bit device to lamp devices Enter the bit device on the PLC for the Hide device Do not enter word devices such as registers Create all graphics to be displayed at the same size Scale and paste smart objects at the graphic size to be displayed If the size of the registered graphic to be displayed differs from the size of the paste smart object the graphic may not be displayed at the correct size 3 95 3 5 Lamps 3 96 3 6 Numeric Indicators 3 6 Numeric Indicators Smart object name Basic Numeric indicators Scaling Paste Scaling factor coordinates O interlocked B Function This smart object displays the data of numeric devices on the PLC When alarm display is used When the data of the numeric device exceeds the preset upper lower limit value the graphic and numeric value color to be displayed can be changed When numeric keypad is used When the numeric display is touched the numeric keypad is called as a pop up display At this time the startup source panel and other active panels are stopped Data entered on the numeric keypad is written to the write device on the PLC Completion of data writing can
105. function for when the ON OFF state changes OK Cancel Help Blink You can specify blinking at the ON OFF states on smart objects that have a graphic switching function for when the ON OFF state changes Type Select the type of graphic to be displayed on the smart object from the following options Genenal This is the basic graphic that is already provided in the library Rocker This is the graphic of a rocker switch Slide This is the graphic of a slide switch Piping lamp This is the graphic for displaying piping User Select this to use a graphic that has been registered to a registered graphic Common Set the ON graphic to the same graphic as the OFF graphic The Common button can be used only when 3 state lamp smart objects or graphic type has been set to User Graphic Select the graphic to be displayed The number of graphics that can be selected differs according to the smart object to be used Graphic Sets the display graphic of the smart object OFF ON Graphic Set the graphic in the OFF or ON states for smart objects that have a function for switching the graphic for the smart object according to the lamp bit or smart object state States 1 2 3 The graphic of each state can be specified for 3 state lamp smart objects Chapter 2 SMART OBJECT SPECIFICATIONS 2 8 Color Blink Change the display color of the graphic Note however that the fill color cannot be changed whe
106. is used for the switch graphic the smart object size becomes the size of the graphic and the smart object cannot be scaled 3 131 3 8 Text Display Smart object name Variable string data Text display Scaling Paste Scaling factor coordinates Lo ol Ay Fixed B Function This smart object displays the string data of ASCII code currently set to device area on the PLC starting from the string device When Keyboard use is selected When the string display field is touched this smart object calls up the keyboard panel and closes the startup source panel and other active panels On the keyboard panel the data for the number of display characters can be written to the string device on the PLC When entry of data on the keyboard panel ends the keyboard panel closes and the state before the keyboard panel was called is returned to The coordinates of the keyboard panel to be called up can be specified B Configuration Basic Type This item is for selecting the type of string display smart object Read conditions This item is for selecting the read conditions of the string data Text Display Basic Graphic Text Type Keyboard use Reg string data C Message call This item calls up the keyboard panel so that Var string data strings can be set Read conds String device This item is for inputting the word device on the PLC to which
107. so that the SP value can be changed Common monitors OUT This lights when the output terminal of each channel is ON EV This lights when the EVENT terminal is ON BUS This lights when BUS output is ON The state of the BUS output on the self module and not the OR ed output of the BUS output of linked modules is displayed RSW This lights when the external contact input is ON ALM PV This lights when the PV input terminal error occurs on each channel ALM OTH This lights when other errors occur B Smart Object Parameters Basic Select the smart object size Select when connecting the DMC10 via the CMC10B ia Enter the communications channel on the EST Enter the device address of the CMC10B Enter the device address of DMC10 No 1 Select he display soior otme gape PPV color Select the numeric display color ofthe PV SP cor SeecthenumencdisplycorohheSP T iV color Select the numeric value display color of _ Text color Use decimal poin when using a numeric Keypad panel with decimal pomtinput Coords Enter the call coordinates of the numeric keypad panel At the selection of smart object size 4 19 4 1 PID controller Supplementary Explanation 4 20 Changes to the SP value of each channel are executed on the SP value of the currently selected SP set of the DMC10 F
108. startup source panel and other active panels It also closes the currently active background panel Each of the call coordinates of the panels to be started up can be specified B Configuration Basic Method This item is for selecting the startup method of Basic rea SW comm Interlock panel selection panel change switch Method Type SW start C Extemal start This item is for selecting the type of panel change switch operation others Type C Selector C Dedicated package Mode C Overlay 6 Others This item is for selecting the operation mode Pop up of the smart object panel selector BG close Mode Panel selector BG close SW comm pica eeu Select this item when using switch communications functions ij al b ib Interlock Select this item when using the interlock En LE function Call panel This item is for entering the startup panel No and the panel call coordinates Design Set the switch graphic and the display string Switch Communications Set the operation of switch communications functions Interlock Set the entry enabled conditions for the switch 3 48 3 4 Panel Change Switches B Example Call panel 10 Panel 5 in operation status Panel 5 close Panel 10 in operation status Panel selector B6 dose Selector switch ON Background panel 100 background panel close Smart Objec
109. switch Specifies to enable disable to write data to the CF card In case of START display no data is written to the CF card In case of STOP display writing to the CF card is enabled While data is being written to the CF card BUSY is displayed When the application program does not use a CF card this switch is not displayed 4 125 4 6 Recorder H H d Qnis CF card check panel call switch Clicking the CHECK button compares the information contained in the CF card application name comment and data acquisition period with the application in the main unit and displays the result This switch is effective when START is displayed If the application does not use a CF card this button is not displayed Trend digital panel call switch Calls up the screen to display the current values of 16 channels in digital form Trend display selection panel call switch Calls up the screen to select the channel to be displayed CF error LED This LED goes on when an error has occurred while writing to reading from the CF card Clicking the START button resets the card error status CF card access LED This LED goes on while writing to reading from the CF card B Trend Digital Panel Touching the trend digital panel call switch displays the names current values units and alarm information for the set channels
110. the upper lower limit values of the Y axis Upper val 9999 Decimal point Lower val This item is for entering the decimal 0 point position of the upper lower limit values on the Y axis Decimal point Decimal point Amna Color This item is for selecting the display GNaphic No om 4 Al Goler pes color of the trend graphic elu No i314 EE Al fo A po Up low color This item is for selecting the numeric eX Cancel Help display color of the upper lower limit values Graphical No This item is for selecting the display graphic of the trend Menu No This item is for entering the menu panel to call up and the call coordinates 4 56 4 3 Sampling control Trend Ea Omnt Basic Trend Event View Control Sampling mode Control by device This item is for entering the start device for data sampling C Control by dev C Sampling time p p Sampling time This item is for entering the start end times of data sampling OK Cancel Help Control by device when control by device is selected Start end of sampling is controlled by bit device on the PLC Data is sampled and saved at the specified sampling cycle for the time that the control device is ON Sampling time when sampling time is specified Specify the sampling start end times Data is sampled and saved from the set start time up
111. the SP value are executed on the LSP value of the currently selected SP set of the SDC40A For example when the SP value is changed while LSP3 15 selected LSP3 will be rewritten The settable range of the SP value is the lower SP limit to the upper SP limit in the setup on the SDC40A For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions Set the communications channel to which the IMEC is to be connected to Yamatake CPL general host link The panel may not function properly when the following items on the SDCA0A are changed while a panel to which this smart object is pasted is activated The panel will function properly by restarting the panel after the change has been made C05 Input 1 temperature unit C06 Input 1 range type C07 Input 1 linear decimal point position C16 Local SP setting method C17 Upper SP limit C18 Lower SP limit When the following setting is made in the setup on the SDC40A the SP value cannot be changed At this time a short high pitched alarm buzzers and the numeric keypad does not pop up C16 3 LSP cannot be set When the SP value has been changed in the Remote mode when REM is lit on a remote SP type model the execution SP does not change However the new SP value after the change becomes valid when the Local mode is returned to Do not use this smart object for panels that are to be started up as pop up panels
112. the last device address is modified make sure to have the lower limit value of the monitor range set as a multiple of 16 When the panel pasted with PLC monitor smart objects is started up by panel overlay the operation is as described below Do not execute the panel overlay startup for the panels pasted with PLC monitor smart objects When the pop up panels displayed by PLC monitor device change or the pop up panels of other smart objects are returned to the panels pasted with PLC monitor smart objects the PLC monitor device and address of PLC monitor smart objects might be changed to the initial status or the device might not be displayed This happens when the panels pasted with PLC monitor smart objects are restarted at panel movement Do not use this smart object for panels that are to be started up as pop up panels When the pop up panel is active a device modify panel and data modify panel cannot be called 4 95 4 5 PLC monitor Smart object name MELSEC A CPU Word device PLC monitor Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates 9 qc B Function This is used in the case of Mitsubishi A series CPU module to be connected Can monitor the CPU word device zone Can modify the PLC device data B Configuration Basic PLC kind Select the PLC kind of PLC monitor PLO monitor MELSEC A CPU Basic Graphic Panel Min Max CPU kind S
113. the string data is currently Use always Panel start 7 Ext trigger Keyboard use stored String dev 2 si Size This item is for inputting the number of strings 9 E to be displayed by 2 byte conversion Update device a This item is for inputting the bit device for 22 V Hide dev OK Cancel Help updating the string display when External trigger is set to Read conditions Lamp device This item is for entering the bit device to be monitored for switching graphic or text color display Hide device This item is for entering the bit device for clearing the graphic or text display 3 132 3 8 Text Display Read conditions Select the conditions for reading the string data Normal String data is read from the PLC at each scan on the EST to update the display At startup String data is read from the PLC to update the display once when the panel is started up External trigger The string data is read from the PLC to update the display when the panel is started up and when the state of the update device changes to ON Keyboard use The smart object becomes a variable string smart object having a function for calling up the keyboard panel Lamp devices cannot be used at this time String device Enter the start address of the device area on the PLC to which the string data is currently stored The string data is displayed in byte units from the lower byte up to the uppe
114. to display with smart objects and set the display color Panel Designate the call up coordinates of the device modify and the data modify panels PLC monitor Device modify panel Enter the call up coordinates of data modify panel Data modify panel Enter the call up coordinates of data modify panel Maximum Minimum values Enter the device range to monitor PLC monitor Initialize Initialize the maximum and the minimum values Maximum Enter the maximum value of the address range to monitor Minimum Enter the minimum value of the address range to monitor Initialize This sets the maximum and the minimum values of each device address of devices selected with the CPU kind 4 109 4 5 PLC monitor B Smart Object Parameters Basic Select CPU kind Select from monitor write monitor Smart object size dot Select the smart object size Enter EST communications channel 104 Node Enter station address of CPU module 0 fixed Interlock device Select at interlock use At write monitor selection Graphic Select display graphic Color Select graphic color Panel Device modify panel Enter call up coordinates of device modify panel Data modify panel Enter call up coordinates of data modify panel Hexadecimal HEX Data modify panel Enter call up coordinates of data modify panel Decimal Maximum Minimum Input Relay upper Enter device range upper limit value of Input
115. to the set end time Sampling of trend data is stopped when the end time is exceeded Example If the set start time is 13 hr 00 min and the set end time is 15 hr 00 min the sampling period is from 13 hr 00 min 00 sec up to 15 hr 00 min 59 sec Handling Precautions If the set start time is later than the set end time sampling starts one minute after the set start time and ends one second before the set end time For example if the set start time is 17 hr 00 min and the set end time is 10 hr 00 min the sampling period is from 17 hr 01 min 00 sec up to 9 hr 59 min 59 sec If you set the start time later than the set end time set the start time one minute earlier than the desired start time 4 57 4 3 Alarm Alarm device This item is for entering the alarm information device E a lt E lt lt Z 4 2 EI 5 2 4 r E gt ES v Alarm device Enter the bit device of alarm sampling The alarm is displayed by sampling the bit data of alarm setting at the sampling cycle and by blinking the PV process variable of each channel 4 58 4 3 Example 1 EST240Z Number of channels A 4 1CH D000 2CH D001 3CH D003 4CH D004 number of events 2 M010 2CH M011 number of stores 5000 number of trend buffers 2 control by device control device M000
116. up panel is active numeric keypad panels cannot be started When the number of entered characters on the keyboard panel is less than the number of characters to be called from the PLC 00 Hex is written to areas to which strings are not entered 00 Hex is not written when the number of characters entered on the keyboard panel is the same as the number of characters to be called from the PLC The combined use of variable character string smart objects and keyboard call smart objects may prevent variable characters from being updated If this is the case paste the keyboard call smart objects before the variable character string smart objects or use the keyboard in the variable character string smart objects 3 150 3 10 Data Setter 3 10 Data Setter Smart object name Password numeric keypad Scaling Paste coordinates Sdi dE x B Function These smart objects set 8 digit BCD on the PLC 2 word data 0 to 99999999 The numeric value being entered is not displayed on the numeric keypad and is displayed instead of the numeric value for each entered digit Pressing the Return key writes the numeric value to the write device on the PLC B Configuration Basic Graphic SW comm pm Type Password keypad 7 Bit pattern setter This item is for selecting the type of UP DOWN setter data setter smart object e SW comm Select this item when u
117. y Pio Selectthe display graphic p Select the display color of the graphic o Select the display text color of the calendar Supplementary Explanation The following smart objects are used to change Year Month Date Smart object type Smart object name Function switches Clock setting call Corrects the internal clock 0 Handling Precautions Only General can be selected for the graphic type User cannot be selected 3 192 B Function B Configuration Basic B Example Smart object name External clock adjustment 3 12 Clocks Scaling Paste Scaling factor Goordinales __ dei The EST internal clock second time is adjusted to 0 by 30 seconds when the clock adjustment device on the PLC is started up Olock Lx Omnt Basic T C Digital clock C Digital calendar Type Analog clock I IE xd This item is for selecting the type of clock smart object Clock adjust dev 24 Clock adjustment device This item is for entering the bit device on the PLC for executing time adjustment Clock adjustment device The internal clock is adjusted to 0 when the clock adjustment device on the PLC is started up The EST sets the clock adjustment device to OFF when the clock is adjusted Clock adjustment device M000 adjustment of 12 hours 59 minutes 31 seconds 12 59 31 13 00 00 M0
118. 0 08011 Tank Graphics 55101 35102 35103 35104 35105 35106 35107 35108 Meter Graphics 37001 37026 37051 37076 11 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS Analog Clock Graphics 39001 59002 59005 59004 59005 59006 112 1 UP DOWN Setter Graphics 47001 47002 _ E 12 Appendix LIST OF THE OBJECT GRAPHICS B Alarm History Graphics 61005 HAA MMM App 13 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 61202 E m 61203 14 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 61212 61213 App 15 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS B Alarm Summary Graphics 52002 lt lt lt gt gt 62005 App 16 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 62112 a I L_ App 17 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS B Alarm Count Display Graphics 63002 ATATA 65005 18 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 63102 App 19 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 63112 App 20 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS B SDC10 Graphics 30002 SDC20 21 Graphics c Whee
119. 00 ON 5 000 OFF Clock adjustment device M000 adjustment of 15 hours 30 minutes 30 seconds 15 30 30 15 30 00 M000 ON 5 M000 OFF 3 193 3 12 Clocks B Smart Object Parameters Basic Clock adjustment device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device B Supplementary Explanation This is a transparent smart object and may be pasted anywhere Handling Precautions Enter the bit device on the PLC for the clock adjustment device Do not enter word devices such as registers Execute setting of the bits on the clock adjustment device by one shot instructions Ladder circuit example Rise condition SET 000 Clock adjustment device 3 194 3 13 State Control 3 13 State Control Smart object name External backlight control State contro Scaling Paste Scaling factor Goordinales __ ee eee sj B Function This smart object can turn the EST backlight ON and OFF from the PLC This can be used as a lock function of screen B Configuration Basic State Control x Basic Backlight control C Backlight ON m Type Rust Buzzer OFF This item is for selecting the type of external control smart object Notify batt alarm Write data at startup Control device This item is for entering the bit device for controll
120. 1 Trendi quels tele ated dern 4 47 Trend Buffers 3 ce sce cess re Se eae ed eee aes 4 47 Trend 4 48 Trend Menu 4 50 Variable Trend Menu 4 51 Trend Gil ERE AR ee SE AS Be EEE AS Db At 4 53 Variable trend RII WEE es Sk Sa 4 64 Graphic 4 75 Rail 4 75 Free movement bese eli ae ee EDD PA ian 4 77 4 81 B PLC monitor smart objects Word 4 82 B PLC monitor smart objects Bit device 4 83 Device modify 4 84 Data modify panel At the word device 4 86 Data modify panel At the bit device monitor 4 87 MELSEC A C Link Word 4 88 MELSEC A C Link Bit 4 92 MELSEC A CPU Word 4 96 MELSEC A CPU 4 100 MELSEC FX CPU Word
121. 159 Representative lamp alarm 3 163 Alarm DUZ vere eee ex IIR COT EROR UE EA ORI S 3 166 Monitor 3 168 Summary display alarm information display 3 171 History display alarm information 3 175 Number of occurrence display alarm information display 3 180 Alarm information 3 185 3 12 GlOCKS rie 3 187 Digital clock err A 3 187 Analog clok eeror reb a 3 189 Digital 3 191 External clock 3 193 3 13 State Control ooi eere RNA pe e Ee eS 3 195 External backlight 3 195 External backlight 3 197 External buzzer 3 199 External buzzer 3 201 Battery alarm notification 3 203 Data write when opening the 3 205 Chapter 4 INSTRUMENTATION SMART OBJEC
122. 2 Data 7 Display color xis S Em This item is for selecting the display Data 3 Data 8 color of each data Data 5 2210 ea OK Numeric device D100 update device M000 number of data items 3 PLC device EST display D100 55 D101 Data3 15 Data1 55 D102 Update device 000 ON Data2 30 B Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic Data format Select the numeric data format from unsigned binary BCD Enter the communications channel the device address and the word device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Pie chart Enter the number of data items to be displayed Data 1 to 10 Select the display color for data 1 to 10 Update device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Supplementary Explanation This smart object is transparent and has no graphic Frames are also not displayed for the pie chart Draw frames if necessary o Handling Precautions Enter the word device on the PLC as the numeric device Do not enter bit devices such as relays Enter the bit device on the PLC as the Update Hide device Do not enter the word devices such as registers 3 124 3 7 Graphs Meters Smart object name Line graph Graphs meters Scaling Paste Scalingfactor Textsize coordinates LO OE Ay B Function This smart object displays the
123. 212 50213 31 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS Trend Event 1 50026 00027 DIRT 50028 TK DUI App 32 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 50056 lt 2 33 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 50126 150128 34 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 50136 013539 50137 150138 So App 35 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 50226 50227 50228 App 36 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 50236 50237 50238 ETTI ETTI EE ER 83 ES uw www G App 37 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS Trend Event 2 50051 FTT TDI FM TIME App 38 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 50061 39 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 50151 150152 50153 App 40 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 50161 444 gt gt gt bi 50162 App 41 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 50251 50252 App 42 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 50261 50262 50263 App 43 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS Trend Event 3 50076 DIE TAD 2 TIE App 44 Appendix LIST OF THE SM
124. 25 Panel No changed graphic No changed Specifications are subject to change without notice WAMATAKE Yamatake Corporation Control Products Division Head office Totate International Building 2 12 19 Shibuya Shibuya ku Tokyo 150 8316 Japan Inquiries to International Business Division Phone 81 3 3486 2331 Fax 81 3 3486 2300 Sales Phone 81 466 20 2307 Fax 81 466 27 9264 Customer Service http www yamatake com This has been printed on recycled paper Printed in Japan 1st Edition Issued in Feb 2001 6th Edition Issued in Dec 2002 B
125. 3 3837h 0104 0000h 0105 0000h 5 8 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS B Supplementary Explanation When the number of entered characters on the keyboard panel are less than the number of characters to be called from the PLC 00 Hex is written to areas to which strings are not entered 00 Hex is not written when the number of characters entered on the keyboard panel is the same as the number of characters to be called from the PLC B Panel Shapes Keyboard EE s ei gt T ESSE IS S enn 200 ABC abo af SPACE ENT Remarks EST240Z 320 x 240 Keyboard O _ x fo escl 78 TER STU SES S eek sS a ABc abc it sect ENT Remarks EST555Z 440 x 320 5 9 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS 5 4 Clock Correction Panel classification Clock correction 1200 to 1202 B Function B Example 5 10 This panel is activated to pop up by clock setting call smart objects on function switches On the clock correction panel the built in clock of the EST can be corrected Numeric values can be changed by touching the top and bottom keys of the Month Date Year or Hour Minute Second display are touched While numeric values are being changed the numbers blink The currently displayed Month Date Year or Hour Minute Second values are written to the built in clock by touchi
126. 3 Scroll display data five items at a time Holding down these switches scrolls the display data at high speed 7 Scroll display data one item at a time Holding down these switches scrolls the display data at high speed Read This buttons displays the data of the recipe No at the cursor display field on the recipe smart object Close This button cancels the selection and returns to the call panel 4 31 4 2 Recipe B Recipe Edit Panels This panel is called by touching the Edit switch of a recipe smart object On this panel recipe data can be deleted and duplicated Recipe name field This item displays the name of the currently set recipe using up to 28 1 byte characters Recipe name field Cursor display field Operation message display field B Scroll keys Scroll keys These keys scroll the data to be displayed Lz 9 Display the start final data 11 Scroll display data five items at a time Holding down these switches scrolls the display data at high speed AVI Scroll display data one item at a time Holding down these switches scrolls the display data at high speed Delete This item deletes the data of the recipe No at the cursor display field The confirmation message is displayed Determine the delete by either the OK or Cancel key Copy This item duplicates the selected recipe data to the specified recipe Select the recipe to be duplicated using th
127. 3 7 Graphs Meters B Supplementary Explanation Signed binary data is displayed as a vertical horizontal bar with O as its origin Bar graph display Maximum data value 200 Plus data Minus data Minimum data value 100 PLC data D100 80 gt D100 80 Handling Precautions Enter the bit device on the PLC for the Hide device Do not enter word devices such as registers Be sure to enter a multiple of 16 when entering the bit device to the numeric device The maximum display width of the bar graph is 255 dots Bars of width 256 or more cannot be displayed 3 116 B Function B Configuration Basic Smart object name Graphs meters Scaling Ay 3 7 Graphs Meters Paste Text size coordinates This smart object displays the data of the numeric device on the PLC in the form of a meter DephsMee Cont Basic Meter Type C graph C Pie chart C Line graph Disp fmt Upwads Data frat fimedbinay gt Nmendv Cts E OK Cancel Help Display format Type This item is for selecting the type of smart object for he graph meter Display format This item is for selecting the display direction of meters Data format This item is for selecting the data of numeric devices Numeric device This item is for entering the word device on the PLC to be displayed as a meter Select the displa
128. 3 9 Keyboard Call B Smart Object Parameters Basic Format Selectihedatafomaterne wile device SSS Write device Enter the communications channel the device address and word device __ Notify device Enter tne communications channel the device address and the bit device Hide device T Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Number of digits Enter the number of display digits of the numeric data on the numeric keypad Decimal point Enter tne display position i he decimal point on ihe numer keypad Wih calculation Select when calcultion functions reused O SW comm Select when using switch communications menok Selecthenusing interlocked Graphic Type Seeche graphic type rom CS OFF Graphic Selectthe display OFF Graphic Color when OFF Select he display color ofthe OFF Grape Blink when OFF SelectiocausebinkngwhenOFE O ON Graphic Select tne display graphic when the numeric keypad is caledup Color when ON Select the graphic display color when the numeric keypad is caledup Sink when ON Selectio cause binking when the numeric keypad is caled up Fontsze Vaigmmen Select vertical aignment from topfeenteribotom Vertical scale Enterthe ventcal scale te siva
129. 32 Handling Precautions Channel configuration e When data is saved in the CF card while the writing method is linear fill the number of storage points cannot be specified If both ring fill and linear fill settings exist in the same application downloading to the EST main unit is not available CH This item displays the number of the channel to be displayed Disp This item is for setting the channel to be displayed as default on the EST main unit Select on to display it select off to hide it Up to 8 on s can be specified Monitor device NRODODO 800000 4800000 00000 NRODODO 800000 4800000 4800000 NRODOD0 NRODODO 800000 4800000 This item is for entering the word device to be sampled by the recorder Line Color This item is for selecting the color of the line displayed on the recorder graph Units This item is for entering the character string for unit displayed beside the current values of each channel Name This item is for entering the data names of each channel isl OK Cancel Help CH This item displays the number of the channel to be displayed Disp This item is for setting the channel to be displayed on the EST main unit when the power is turned on Select on to display it select off to hide it Up to 8 on s can be specified Monitor device This item is for entering the word device to be sampled by the re
130. 4 Switch functions Set the function of switch communications from the following options Send at ON The switch code is issued by the serial command Switch Notify response only sw when the switch turns ON The issued command is sent from the EST communications port currently set to Serial slave station communications Send at ON OFF The switch code is issued by the serial command Switch Notify response only sw when the switch turns ON or OFF The issued command is sent from the EST communications port currently set to Serial slave station communications Buffer at ON The switch code is written to the switch communications buffer when the switch turns ON When the switch code is written to the switch communications buffer the switch output on the EST turns ON For this reason use the Switch Communications Buffer Read SW command to read the currently stored switch code when switch output has turned ON on the external device Buffer at ON OFF The switch code is written to the switch communications buffer when the switch turns ON or OFF When the switch code is written to the switch communications buffer the switch output on the EST turns ON For this reason use the Switch Communications Buffer Read SW command to read the currently stored switch code when switch output has turned ON on the external device For details on switch communications command refer to the Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Communi
131. 4 5 PLC monitor Graphic Panel Set the graphic to display with smart objects and set the display color Designate the call up coordinates of the device modify and the data modify panels PLC monitor Maximum Minimum values Enter the device range to monitor PLC monitor Initialize This sets the maximum and the minimum values of each device address of devices selected with the CPU kind Device modify panel Enter the call up coordinates of device modify panel Data modify panel HEX Enter call up coordinates of data modify panel HEX hexadecimal Data modify panel BIN Enter call up coordinates of data modify panel BIN decimal Initialize Initialize the maximum and the minimum values Maximum Enter the maximum value of the address range to monitor Minimum Enter the minimum value of the address range to monitor 4 97 4 5 PLC monitor B Smart Object Parameters Seiectonrseting fem Basic CPU kind Select CPU kind Monitor method Select from monitor write monitor Smart object size dot Select the smart object size Enter EST communications channel 1to4 Node Enter station address of computer link module 0 fixed Interlock device Select at interlock use At write monitor selection Graphic Select display graphic Color Select graphic color Panel Device modify panel Enter call up coordinates of device modify panel HE pom panel Enter call
132. 9 Keyboard Call Graphic Text Keyboard Set the switch graphic to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic The graphic setting becomes OFF Graphic and ON Graphic ON Graphic is the display graphic in a keyboard called up state Set the string to be displayed on the smart object and the display text color The string setting becomes OFF string and ON string ON string is the display text in a keyboard called up state Keyboard Call Omnt Basic Graphic Text Keyboard Coords qu p Keyboard Setup Display string deviice data at strartup OK Keyboard setup Coordinates This item is for entering the call coordinates of the keyboard panel Keyboard Setup This item is for selecting the data display method of the input data display field when the keyboard panel is called up When the Display string device data at startup checkbox is marked the string data currently set to the string device is displayed at the input data display field when the keyboard panel is displayed Switch Communications This sheet is for setting the operation of switch communications functions Interlock 3 148 This sheet is for setting the entry enabled conditions for the switch 3 9 Keyboard Call B Example String device D100 number of display characters 6 notify device M000 EST display
133. 9E This manual is packaged with the EST555Z bogy This manual should be read by those who produce units that use the Smart Terminal This manual contains safety precautions when using the Smart Terminal installation methods and descriptions for wiring the power supply and signal lines Smart Terminal EST240Z User s Manual Installation Manual No CP SP 1065E This manual should be read by those who use the EST240Z to design units and those in charge of maintenance This manual describes safety cautions when using the Smart Terminal how to install for incorporating into units wiring methods maintenance and inspection troubleshooting and hardware specifications Smart Terminal EST555Z User s Manual Installation Manual No CP SP 1103E This manual should be read by those who use the EST555Z to design units and those in charge of maintenance This manual describes safety cautions when using the Smart Terminal how to install for incorporating into units wiring methods maintenance and inspection troubleshooting and hardware specifications Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Application Preparation Manual No CP SP 1088bE This manual This manual should be read by those who design screens that are displayed on the EST Z Series and operations This manual describes the environment of the personal computer on which AP Editor can be used installation methods startup system setti
134. ART OBJECT GRAPHICS 50086 45 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 50176 50177 50178 App 46 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 50186 50187 4 50188 kal lt gt 47 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 150276 150277 150278 48 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 50286 up ra tie ble um nm ntn e um nd ne sl end nad ne m n m n A A ib A DE A A A 4 hi A A mmm 50287 mm m OO PO 9 CT 9 CT C NE M0 0 0 I 4 00 9 0 EO OE OE EO OO MI a UU 6848 UR o 4 A A NR RU AS LA as App 49 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS B Recipe Graphics Manual write 51551 Auto write App 50 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS 51641 51651 App 51 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS App 52 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS PLC Monitor Graphics App 53 Appendix LIST OF THE SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS
135. Bar eraph Alarm Minimum This item is for entering the minimum value of the graph Maximum fil Mx pe This item is for entering the maximum value of the graph Bar color This item is for selecting the display color of bar graphs Graphic Graphic Type General gt Al Color This item is for setting the tank graphic to be displayed when tank type has been selected at Display format This item is not displayed in vertical horizontal bar graph displays OK Cancel Help Alarm This sheet is for setting the alarm when the alarm display function is used Upper m xl This item is for entering the upper limit value of the numeric data Basic Bargraph Alama An alarm state occurs when the numeric data exceeds the upper limit value Upper PI m imi Alarm state numeric data gt upper limit value Lower 0 Blink at alarm Lower This item is for entering the lower limit value of the SESS EM numeric data An alarm state occurs when the numeric data falls below the lower limit value Alarm state lower limit value numeric data Blink at alarm When this item is selected the bar graph is displayed blinking at the bar color and alarm bar color when an alarm occurs Cancel Help This item is for selecting the bar display color when alarm occurs 3 114 3 7 Graphs Meters Example Di
136. C 2 word device BIN Decimal Word data modify panel MELSEC 2 word device Bit data modify panel MELSEC PLC Bit data modify panel MELSEC PLC 2 word device Recorder Trend digital panel Trend display selection panel CF card check panel Interval change panel 5 1 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS B Basic Layout of Specification Descriptions The below conventions are used in descriptions of each system panel 5 2 The below items describe each of the items in these specification descriptions Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS 5 5 Messages W Function This panel is activated to pop up by message call smart objects on string displays Messages display the registered strings of No set in the smart object parameters of message call smart objects Touching the Close key closes the panel and returns to the state before the message panel was called Example Lel Touch HELP Message registered string String indicator Message call smart object Touch Retur Message panel Supplementary Explanation Registered strings are set during registered string editing on AP Editor For details see the Smart Terminal EST240Z User s Manual Application Preparation Manual No CP SP 1088E Panel Shapes Message 16 x 5 Panel No 1215 Remarks Registered string data 16 single byte characters x 5 lines 220 x 120 2 IN JN A Names of system panel group Function
137. C whose graphic display Y coordinate is to be set Display angle This item is for entering the word device on the PLC whose graphic display angle is to be set Hide device This item is for entering the bit device whose graphic display is to be cleared Graphic position X Specify the X coordinate where the graphic is to be displayed Graphic position Y Specify the Y coordinate where the graphic is to be displayed Display angle Specify the angle of rotation of the display graphic Y coordinate X coordinate Display angle 4 77 4 4 Graphic Movement Graphic Graphic Display x Omnt Basic Design Type DENE e Type This item is for setting the type of Select graphic to be displayed on the smart Const C Device object este Select Salle This item is for selecting how the graphic is to be specified Graphic This item is for entering the graphic No to be displayed Graphic device This item is for entering the word device on the PLC to which the graphic No to display is currently OK stored Select Select how the graphic is to be specified Const Enter the registered graphic No to be displayed The display graphic is a specified fixed graphic Device Specify the graphic to be displayed by a word device on the PLC The registered graphic of the graphic data 1 to 999 set to Graphic device is displayed B Example Graphic position X D100
138. Control by dev C Sampling time Sampling time This item is for entering the start end times of data sampling Control by device when control by device is selected Start end of sampling is controlled by bit device on the PLC Data is sampled and saved at the specified sampling cycle for the time that the control device is ON Start End when sampling time is specified Specify the sampling start end times Data is sampled and saved from the set start time up to the set end time Sampling of trend data is stopped when the end time is exceeded Example If the set start time is 13 hr 00 min and the set end time is 15 hr 00 min the sampling period is from 13 hr 00 min 00 sec up to 15 hr 00 min 59 sec Handling Precautions If the set start time is later than the set end time sampling starts one minute after the set start time and ends one second before the set end time For example if the set start time is 17 hr 00 min and the set end time is 10 hr 00 min the sampling period is from 17 hr 01 min 00 sec up to 9 hr 59 min 59 sec If you set the start time later than the set end time set the start time one minute earlier than the desired start time 4 68 4 3 Selection Monitor device This item is for entering the device whose data is to be sampled Basic Trend Event View Control Name This item is for entering the name of the data Alarm device
139. Current value CF card space Scroll keys 4 6 Recorder Displays the remaining free space in the CF card in the form of a bar graph and a value If the remaining free space in the CF card has come down below 8 Mbytes Paper Out alarm LED goes on This is not displayed when ring write has been set These keys scroll the trend display Scrolling can be performed on a half screen or one screen basis or to the ends CICI Scroll the trend display up to the first screen or down to the last one Scroll the trend display one screen at a time 4 Scroll the trend display half a screen at a time Scale switch for switching upper lower limits Touching the SCALE switch causes the change of the upper lower limit values on Y axis to enable disable Upper lower limit values The display upper and lower limit values of the Y axis are displayed Touching the SCALE switch causes the switches to appear at the upper lower limit value display area Touching the switches at upper lower limit value display areas calls up the numeric keypad panel enabling to change the upper lower limit values e Marker ON OFF switch You can turn the marker ON or OFF If no marker is used this switch is not displayed Range change switch The display of the trend can be changed in the vertical direction Reduce up to 4x Enlarge up to 4x x1 Original size 1x CF write enable disable
140. Display all Displays the alarm name messages and the number of times that alarms have occurred Design This sheet is for setting the graphic to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic Set the display text color of the string to be displayed on the smart object 3 180 3 11 Alarm Monitor Example 1 EST240Z ALARM 001 ALARM 002 ALARM 003 ALARM 004 ALARM 005 AIAIA ZAA e ALARM Displays the alarm No ALARM Displays the name of the alarm currently registered to the history information NUMBER Displays the number of times that alarms have occurred A Each touch of these switches scrolls the alarm No display by one alarm at a time Al Each touch of these switches scrolls the alarm No display by 5 alarms at a time Each touch of these switches scrolls alarm No display 100 alarms 3 181 3 11 Alarm Monitor B Example 2 EST555Z Message display Error in carrier system 1 Error in carrier system No 2 Assembly part supply halt Assembly part B supply halt Failure in part inspection Failure in part B inspection Automatic solder furnace temperature is too high Automatic solder furnace temperature is too low Alarm Message 64 charcters Max ATALA 3 182 ALARM ID Displays the alarm No MESSAGE Displays the message currently registered to the history information CNT Display
141. EST backlight ON from the PLC This smart object lights the backlight when the control device is activated State Control x Cont Basic Type Backlight control Type This item is for selecting the type of external control smart object Buzzer control Buzzer OFF Notify batt alarm Write data at startup Control dev Control device This item is for entering the bit device for lighting the backlight Configuration Basic p Control device The EST backlight is forcibly lit when the control device is activated The EST turns the control device OFF when the backlight is lit EST EST P M000 ON Lit Out by auto backlight OFF 000 OFF 3 197 3 13 State Control B Example Selection setting item Basic Control device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Control device M000 B Smart Object Parameters B Supplementary Explanation This smart object can forcibly light the backlight even when the backlight has been turned OFF with the auto backlight OFF function The auto backlight OFF function is set at Setting Information Basic Settings in AP Editor For details see the Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Application Preparation Manual No CP SP 1088E Time monitoring of the auto backlight OFF function is continued even if the backlight is turned ON by this smart objec
142. Enter the call coordinates of the background panel No to be started up SW comm Selecwhenusingswichcommunalons Interlock 7 Selectwhenusinginterlocked operation Design Type Selctthegraphewpetomgeneralser io Color Setectthe display color ofthe graphs Fowsze Vaignmen Select vertical alignment from topicentev botiom Halignment_ horizontal alignment Display Enterthedisplaycolor color display text color CO Switch communications Switch communications function Select the switch communications function intenook action according to ON OFF state ofbtdevice Range Interlock action according to bit device range Supplementary Explanation When selection of the background panel is executed all active panels are restarted For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions When an unregistered panel No is entered the panel is not opened even if the switch is touched When an opened pop up panel is active other panels cannot be started by this smart object This smart object does not function even if pasted to a background panel When User is selected at Graphic type and registered graphics are
143. Enter the call up coordinates of data modify panel Initialize Initialize the maximum and the minimum values Maximum Enter the maximum value of the address range to monitor Minimum Enter the minimum value of the address range to monitor The maximum and minimum values of each device address of devices selected with the CPU king 4 93 4 5 PLC monitor B Smart Object Parameters Selection setting Basic CPU kind Select CPU kind Monitor method Select from monitor write monitor Smart object size dot Select the smart object size EST communications channel Enter EST communications channel 1to4 Node Enter station address of computer link module 0 to 127 Interlock device Select at interlock use At write monitor selection Graphic Select display graphic Select graphic color Device modify panel Enter call up coordinates of device modify panel Data modify panel Enter call up coordinates of data modify panel Hexadecimal HEX Data modify panel Enter call up coordinates of data modify panel Decimal BIN Maximum Minimum Input Relay upper Enter address range upper limit value of Input Relay 0 to FFFF values limit value Input Relay lower Enter address range lower limit value of Input Relay 0 to FFFF limit value Output Relay upper Enter address range upper limit value of Output Relay Y 0to FFF limit value Output Relay lower Enter address range lower limit value of Output Relay Y
144. Gmnt Basic Graphic Text Range Lamp ON Lamp ON range This item is used for selecting the ON display range for the lamp lis ps mmm Emm gt Foren mum ace Data format This item is for selecting the data Data fmt Unsigned binary v format of the value currently stored to the lamp device Upper val 999 P Lower val b 4 Upper lower value This item is for entering the upper lower limit values of the range selected at Lamp ON range OK Cancel Help Lamp ON range Select the data range of the lamp device for executing lamp ON display Lamp ON state display range 1 Upper limit value gt Lamp device ON range IEEE 2 Lone Lower limit value m 2 Lamp device gt Upper limit value or E Lamp device lt Lower limit value 0 2 3 4 LL 3 Lamp device gt Upper limit value 4 Lamp device lt Lower limit value Range Set the display range upper lower limit values of the ON state as the data range of the lamp device Lamp device D100 lamp ON range Upper limit value Lamp device Lower limit value Upper limit value 1000 Lower limit value 500 Data of D100 0 to 499 500 to 1000 1001 onwards o s Es ZEN LT SM OFF state ON state OFF state display display display 3 89 3 5 Lamps B Smart Object Parameters mec Ear
145. Link Basic Graphic Panel Min Max i CPU kind kind Select the CPU kind to monitor MELSEC A C Link C MELSEC FX CPU C MELSEC A CPU MELSEC Q C Link Data kind Select the data kind of a device to display GPU kind General pes s ae Monitor method LiB peris Select the monitor method Monitor method Smart object size dot C Monitor only With modify This item is for selecting the Smart r Smart object size dot object size 320 160 C 640 x 440 EST comm CH Enter the EST communications EST comm GH fi channel Node Node fi Enter the station address of computer Interlock device link module SE Interlock device Select this in the case of interlock CPU kind function use Selects the CPU kind to monitor from the pull menu If the corresponding kind is not found in the menu just select the General Monitor method Monitor This monitors the device values and the data can not be modified Modify The device values can be monitored and modified Smart object size dot Selects only at the EST555Z application preparation Selects the 320 x 160 pixels automatically on the EST240Z Interlock device The Interlock device can be selected when the terms are added at the time of data write If the Modify has not been selected with Monitor method the Interlock device can not be selected Inputs the bi
146. M015 M014 M013 M012 M011 M010 Lim dmg d Writes 006 ON Writes M002 OFF when the switch is when the switch is touched touched 016 M01 B Smart Object parameters Parameter type Selection setting item Remarks Basic Switch device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Lamp device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Hide device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device SWeomm Selestwhenusing switch communications interlock Select when using interlocked operation Type SSCS SS OFF aape SeediegraphcdspayedaOFF Color when OFF Select the display color ofthe OFF Graphe OOO O O Oii ON Graphic Selectthe display graphic when the lampis ON Color when ON Selectthe display color of the graphic when the lampisON Switch communications Switch communications funcion Select he switch communications noron interock T Imterook action according to ON OFF state Raes Interlock action according to pit device range B Supplementary explanation Select the OFF graphic for the graphic selection The ON graphic is paired with the OFF graphic and is automatically selected Each of the bits of switch and lamp devices is assigned in order to switches from rig
147. MC10B Enter the communications channel on EST Enter the device address of the CMC10B Enter the device address of the SDC20 21 Select he graphic ype Select he demey coore gae PV color SsecrthenumeredspycdoroftegY SP coor Select he numeric display color of the SP J PMV color Select the numeric valu display olor of WW Nam torte name Text color Enter the name text color Numeric Select when using a numeric keypad panel with decimal point input keypad Enter the call coordinates of the numeric keypad panel 4 5 4 1 PID controller B Supplementary Explanation 4 6 Changes to the SP value are executed on the current SP value of the SDC20 21 The current SP value refers to the SP value of the currently selected SP set For example when the SP value is changed while SP1 is selected SP1 will be rewritten The settable range of the SP value is the lower SP limit to the upper SP limit in the setup on the SDC20 21 For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions Set the communications channel to which the IMEC is to be connected to Yamatake CPL general host link The panel may not function properly when the following items on the SDC20 21 are changed while a panel to which this smart o
148. N for the time that this switch is held down Alternate Each press of this switch switches the ON OFF state of the PLC switch device Bit set Pressing this switch sets the PLC switch device Bit reset Pressing this switch resets the PLC switch device Graphic Set the switch graphic to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic When a lamp device is used the graphic setting becomes OFF Graphic and ON Graphic Text Set the string to be displayed on the smart object and the display text color When a lamp device is used the string setting becomes OFF String and ON String 3 1 3 1 Switches Switch Communications Set the operation of switch communications functions Interlock Set the entry enabled conditions for the switch B Example Momentary switch Switch device M000 lamp device 001 PLC ladder EST display Switch input Writes 000 ON Reads M001 ON B Smart Object Parameters Parameter type Selection setting item Basic Tye Select switch action from momentary alternate bit set bit reet Switch device Enter the communications channel the station address and the bit device Lamp device Enter the communications channel the station address and the bit device Hide device Enter the communications channel the station address When lamp devices the bit device are used SWcomm Select when using swich communications interlock
149. No currently displayed on the recipe smart object is written by operating the write switch assigned to the recipe smart object Note however that in the case of manual writing writing of recipe data currently set to groups 2 to 4 is not possible Set the group to group 1 Group Group 1 Recipe Recipe data 1 Group 1 Recipe data 2 Group 2 Recipe data 3 Group 1 Recipe data 4 Group 3 Recipe data 5 Recipe data 6 Group 4 J hg Device 1 Device 2 Writing of recipe data currently set to group 1 is executed by operating the write switch for the recipe smart object Recipe data is written by controlling devices on the PLC Write execution devices for recipe data can be set individually to each group Auto write can be used when the write timing of the data is to be changed within the same recipe Group Group 1 Recipe Recipe data 1 Group 1 Recipe data 2 Group 2 Recipe data 3 Group 2 Recipe data 4 Group 3 Recipe data 5 Group 2 Recipe data 6 Device 1 Device 2 Group 2 write Group 1 write device ON device ON Group 3 Recipe data 7 Group 3 Recipe data 8 Group 3 write device ON Group 4 Recipe data 9 Group 4 Recipe data 10 Device 5 Group 4 write Device 6 Writing of recipe data is executed by the state
150. OFF Select to cause blinking when the ON Graphic SelecithedisplygraphicwhenthealamisON J Color when ON SelecihegraphicdiplycoorwhenthesamisON O Blink when ON Select to cause blinking when the aam ison JO Vaignmen Selectvertcalaigmmentftomtopenerbotom Halignmen Selecihorzonalaigmmentomificenenig OFF color Selectthe display text color when the Blink when Select to cause blinking when the ON color Enterthe display text color when the alamis Blink when ON Select to cause blinking when the Panel ype Select the panel ype to be called up systemmuser Panel Enter the panel No to be called up System 1240 to 1249 User 1 to 899 Enter he call coordinates of he pane i 3 161 3 11 Alarm Monitor B Supplementary Explanation Select OFF graphic for the graphic selection OFF graphic is paired with ON graphic and is automatically selected For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 The alarm monitor contacts the alarm names and the messages are registered at Set Alarms in AP Editor For details see th amp mart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Application Preparation Manual No CP SP 1088E Handling Precautions Do not use this smart object for panels that ar
151. ONIOFF state ofbi devieg Range Mnierockection accordingiobitdevicerange 3 9 3 2 Function Switches B Supplementary Explanation Multiple switches cannot be touched simultaneously Lamp display functions are not available For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions Enter the bit device on the PLC for the Switch device Do not enter word devices such as registers User cannot be selected at Type To perform inching operation that requires one shout output create a program for executing the desired processing on the PLC The response speed varies depending on the number and types of smart objects used 3 10 B Function Smart object name Function switches 3 2 Function Switches Clock Adjustment Scaling Paste Scaling factor Lo O Ay Fixed This smart object calls up clock adjustment panels and closes the startup source panel and closes other active panels On the clock correction panel the date year month day and time hours minutes seconds of the EST s internal clock can be adjusted When clock adjustments have been completed the clock adjustment panel closes and the state before the clock adjustment panel was called is returned to The date time data set by clock adjustment can be written to the PLC using the PLC write function
152. PU Word device 320 x 216 640 x 440 MELSEC A CPU Bit device 320 x 216 640 x 440 MELSEC FX CPU Word device 320 x 216 640 x 440 MELSEC FX CPU Bit device 320 x 216 640 x 440 MELSEC Q C Link Word device 320 x 216 640 x 440 MELSEC Q C Link Bit device 320 x 216 640 x 440 840455 00000000000000000 00 o000x Chapter 2 SMART OBJECT SPECIFICATIONS 2 1 Conventions Used in Smart Object Specifications B Basic Layout of Specification Descriptions The conventions shown below are used in descriptions of specifications of each smart object The following pages describe each of the items in these specification descriptions Chapter 3 BASIC SMART OBJECTS 3 1 Switches Smart object name Switch Type Switches Name and attributes Scaling Paste Enlarge Reduce Reshape factor Text size coordinates of the smart object O Any Fixed Any E m W Function This smart object manipulates switch devices in the PLC via the touch switches Functions Configuration Basic prm Type 4 This item is for selecting switch operation Basie je Text SW comm tese SW comm i Select this item when using switch ons mum communications functions co Interlock Select this item when using the interlock e function SV comm Interloork Switch device Co
153. Preparation Manual No CP SP 1088E 0 Handling Precautions If the ON time of the alarm contacts is shorter than one alarm monitoring communications cycle alarm monitoring may not function correctly 3 167 3 11 Alarm Monitor Smart object name Monitor start stop Alarm monitor Scaling Paste Scaling factor Lo Oo Ay Fixed Ay B Function This smart object manipulates start stop of alarm monitoring registered to the alarm monitoring information of the application data B Configuration Basic Basic Graphic Text Interlock Type S Alam lamp C Display alarm info Type Cher alam info This item is for selecting the type of alarm monitor smart objects Alarm monitor This item is for selecting the operation when the switch is manipulated Hide device This item is for entering the bit device for clearing the graphic or text display V Hide dev Interlock use Select this item when using the V Interlock interlock function Alarm monitor Select operation of the smart object when the switch is manipulated from Start Stop Start Alarm monitoring registered to the alarm monitoring information of the application data is started when a switch is touched Stop Alarm monitoring registered to the alarm monitoring information of the application data is stopped when a switch is touched Graphic Set the OFF ON Graphic to be display
154. ST display D100 Y axis maximum D101 value D102 D103 Update device D104 000 ON 0105 0106 0107 0108 Y axis minimum D109 value X axis minimum value X axis maximum value When X axis data fixed is selected Numeric device D100 update device M000 number of data items D099 X axis data 10 PLC device EST display Y axis maximum value When the update device 000 tums ON the data for the number of data items D099 5 is read from the numeric device D100 to update the display Y axis minimum value X axis minimum value X axis maximum value X axis data 10 B Smart Object Parameters Selectoniseting tem Basic Data format Select the numeric data format from unsigned binary signed binary BCD Enter the communications channel the device address and the word device Update device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Hide device device Hide device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Broken line Data number Enter the constant or the communications channel the device address and to 128 the word device Enter the minimum value of X axis TEEN I I Minimum of Y axis Enter the minimum value of Y axis T_T Maximum of Y axis Enter the PX data ined Set the display interval ofthe X axis toa fred value X data Enter the display interval of the X axis When X axis data fixed is select
155. SY OFF string OFF color Enterthe display text Bink when OFF ON sting Enterthe display string when the numeric Keypad is caledu ON color Select he display text color when the numeric keypad is caledup Blink when ON Selectio cause binking when the numeric Keypad scaled up Calculation Calculation mode Select the calculation mode for the write data from Calculation device Enter the constant or the communications channel the device address and the word device Enter the call coordinates of the numeric keypad panel Use decimal point Select the numeric keypad panel with decimal point entry dl Entered upper limit Enter the upper limit value of the input data on the numeric keypad value Entered lower limit Enter the lower limit value of the input data on the numeric keypad 32768 to 432767 value Switch Enter the switch code communications Switch communications Select the switch communications function function Interlock Bitstate state Interlock action according to ON OFF state of bit device Interlock action according to bit device range B Supplementary Explanation When 2 word data is to be displayed the relationship between PLC devices and display is as follows Example dd device D100 data format Hex 2 words number of digits D100 4321h D101 8765h ur For details on sm
156. Select the display text color when the lamp is ON 7 Blink when Select to cause blinking when the lamp is Keyboard Notify device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Coordinates Enter the call coordinates of the keyboard panel Select the display setting when the keyboard panel is called up Select when switch communications is used Switch communications switch code Entertheswicncos Select the switch communications function communications WEE Bit state Interlock action according to ON OFF state of bit device gt gt Interlock action according to bit device range Po 3 136 3 8 Text Display B Supplementary Explanation Set the data of the string device in signed binary data format The lamp device setting is not available when Keyboard use is selected However the Hide device can be set For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 For details the keyboard panel see 5 3 Keyboard page 5 8 Handling Precautions Enter the word device on the PLC as the String device Do not enter bit devices such as relays Enter the word device on the PLC as the lamp Hide device Do not enter bit devices such as relays When registered graphic is used for the switch graphic the OFF graphic and ON graphic to be displayed must be created at the same size When
157. Set the entry enabled conditions for the switch B Example Write device D000 write data 0 number of words 5 PLC device Switch input i i The constant 0 is written D000 to 5 wprds 0000 D001 Clear gt 0002 AS NN 0003 0004 0005 0006 Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic pues device Enter the communications channel the device address and pues word device Format Select the write data format from unsigned binary signed binary Hex BCD Write data Enter the constant of 1 word Unsigned binary 0 to 65535 Signed binary 32768 to 32767 Hex 0000 to FFFF BCD 0000 to 9999 Number of words Enter the number of write words 1 to 64 jeu the bit device Hide device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device SWcomm when using switch communications Interlock Select when using interlocked operation CT Grapho Type Seleet the graphic type from generaus OFF Graphic SelectihegrphicdisplyedatorF O Color when OFF Select he display color of the OFF Graphig Fontsize Selectihetontsize fomBand tedos Vaigmmen Select vertical alignment from fopicenteribotiom Halignment horizontal alignment from leflcenteriight OFF string OFF color EertedspayteicdorwhanOFF Switch communications Switch communicatio
158. Source and Dest keys The confirmation message is displayed Determine the duplicate by either the OK or Cancel key Delete This item deletes the data of the recipe No at the cursor display field The confirmation message is displayed Determine the delete by either the OK or Cancel key Close This item cancels the selection and returns to the call panel Recipe name field This item displays the name of the currently set recipe using up to 36 1 byte characters 5 24 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS Scroll keys These keys scroll the data to be displayed X Display the start final data T Scroll display data five items at a time Holding down these switches scrolls the display data at high speed Scroll display data one item at time Holding down these switches scrolls the display data at high speed Panel Shapes Recipe edit panel Panel No 1355 Label B Remarks 320 x 240 5 25 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS 5 9 PLC Monitor Menus Panel classification Word device modify panel 1400 to 1402 B Function This panel pops up and is displayed by touching the device display section of the PLC monitor smart objects The display head device address to display can be modified with the PLC monitor smart objects When the ENT key is touched the entered device address is changed to the display head device address of the PLC monitor smart objects At this
159. Switch communications Switch communications function Select he switch communications funcion __ nierockactonaccordingto ONOFF state of bit devos Range Interlock action according to bt device rane 3 37 3 4 Panel Change Switches B Supplementary Explanation 3 38 Panels other than the newly started up panel stay displayed however their operations are suspended To start up two panels specify 0 as the panel No of No 3 Panels are started up in order from the No 1 specified panel Accordingly the last started up panel is displayed on top when the panel display areas are overlapping There is no change to operation of the background panel For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions When an opened pop up panel is active other panels cannot be started by this smart object If the panels specified by panel No 1 2 and 3 do not exist all panel operations other than the background panel are suspended When User is selected at Graphic type and registered graphics are used for the switch graphic the smart object size becomes the size of the graphic and the smart object cannot be scaled If the overlapping panels are the same as those specified with panel numbers 1 2 and 3 all the panel operations are suspended except the background panel Smart object name Panel change switches
160. TS 4 1 PID controller Ir rr ep M Sse 4 1 2 A RICE TANE ea 4 1 SDC20 21 oe er oss RR CENE RE eden ae rd 4 4 SDC30 34 aaa 4 7 SDC40A standard remote SP type 4 10 DMC10 2 channel 4 13 DMC10 4 channel model 4 17 CB508 4 21 4 2 Recipe cora 4 25 Recipe 4 25 B Recipe Write 1 4 26 Recipe 05 4 27 Area Required for Recipe 4 27 B Recipe 4 28 B Recipe Smart 4 28 B Recipe Selection 4 31 B Recipe Edit 4 32 Operation of Manual Write Smart Objects 4 33 Operation of Auto Write Smart 4 34 Manual write RE e ed ee REESE UNE 4 35 Auto write Ecl E EE i 4 41 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 Chapter 5 5
161. This item is for entering the device 29 address of the DMC10 Smart object size dot Selects only at the EST555Z application preparation Selects the 320 x 200size automatically on the EST240Z via CMC10B Select this item when the DMC10 is to be connected to the EST via the CMC10B EST Design This sheet is for setting the graphic to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic Set the display text color and name of the PV SP and MV values to be displayed on the smart object 4 1 PID controller Numeric keypad Example Use decimal point Select this item when a numeric P ab keypad panel with decimal point entry TE is to be used Use decimal point Call the numeric keypad panel having a decimal point entry function The numeric keypad panel at the smart object settings for a smart object size 320 x 200 is displayed at the right of the screen for channels 1 and 2 and at the left of the screen for channels 3 and 4 For details on the numeric keypad panel see 5 2 Numeric Keypad page 5 4 Name Up to 16 1 byte characters can be entered CHI CH2 0H3 CH4 5j PERPE Wi 1 FI Y nmm MAN AT ri Channel individual monitors Common monitors Channel individual monitors PV This displays the PV process variable value SP This displays the SP set point value MV This dis
162. This item is for selecting the display color of the switch graphic 3 8 3 2 Function Switches Switch Communications Set the operation of switch communications functions Interlock Set the entry enabled conditions for the switch B Example Inching switch Switch device M000 2 H 2 V Switch 1 left M000 m 1 top 000 Switch 2 right M001 Switch 2 bottom M001 4 ways 8 ways Switch 1 top M000 Switch 1 top 000 a Switch 2 bottom M001 Switch 2 bottom 001 Switch 3 M002 Switch 3 left M002 4 gt Switch 4 right M003 4 gt Switch 4 right M003 Switch 5 top right M004 ivi gt Switch 6 bottom right M005 Switch 7 top let 006 Switch 8 bottom let M007 B Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic Switch device Enter the communications channel device address andbitdevice SW comm Select when switch communications is used Po Select when using interlocked operation Po Graphic Select general Select the inching switch shape color Sun communications Gwe3 When inching mode 8 4 Enter the switch code of switch 4 ways mode is selected 32768 to 32767 When inching mode 6 ways mode is selected 32768 to 32767 Switch communications function Select the switch communications function eo Bitstate Interlock action according to
163. This lights when EV2 is ON EV3 This lights when EV3 is ON AT This blinks during auto tuning RDY This lights when the SDC10 is in the Ready mode REM This lights when the SDC30 81 is in the Remote SP mode MAN This lights when the SDC30 31 is in the Manual mode SP SET This button causes a numeric keypad to pop up so that the SP value can be changed B Configuration Basic PID controller This is for selecting the IMEC Basic Design Numeric keypad type pope Smart object size dot This item is for selecting the Smart 50020 21 C DMC10 object size SD030 81 68508 DI via CMC10B Select this item when connecting the Smart object size dot SDC40A the CMC10B 210120 e 320 200 EST comm CH 10 This item is for entering the ESTcommcH p communications channel the EST GHOI0E dey ade CMC10B device address This item is for entering the device Controller dev adrs ir ce address of the CMC10B Decimal pomt zi Controller device address This item is for entering the device address of the SDC40A OK CMC10B Select this item when the SDCAOA is to be connected to the EST via the CMC10B EST CMC10B RS 485 3 lead RS 485 5 lead SDC40A SDC40A SDC40A 4 1 PID controller
164. Total A This item is for entering the number of channels to be sampled by the recorder Up to 16 channels can be sampled by one smart object Only up to 8 channels of them can be displayed Note however that the number of channels that can be displayed when 2 axis display format is selected is 1 to 8 Only up to 4 channels of them can be displayed 2 axes This item is for displaying sampled data in the 2 axis display format CH Total B Set this item when 2 axes has been selected Enter the number of channels displayed on the second axis i e B axis The number of channels displayed on the second axis B axis is 1 to 8 ntervals This item is for entering the data sampling cycle 4 130 4 6 Change intervals at EST Specify this item when you want to change the sampling cycle from the EST main unit If specified you can change the sampling cycle from the main unit o Handling Precautions Note that when the sampling cycle is changed from the EST main unit all the sampled data is cleared Data fmt The data display format for the sampled recorder data is fixed to signed binary Clear dev This item is for entering the PLC bit device to clear the sampled data forcibly The sampled data is cleared at the start up of the clear device Save to CF card Select this item if you want to save the sampled data in the CF card If this item has been checked the dedicated storage ar
165. When pop up return is selected all the panels including panel overlay indication in operation before pop up are restarted with the status of panels reopened 3 63 3 4 Panel Change Switches Smart object name External special package selector Panel change switches Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates cd di des di ee ae B Function This smart object forcibly switches the panel to the special package from the PLC It also starts up the special package and closes the startup source panel and other active panels B Configuration Basic Panel Change Switches Omnt Basic Method Method This item is for selecting the startup C SW start ais ene method of panel selection external start Type C Selector 5 C Overlay C Others This item is for selecting the type of Pop up panel change switch operation special package Mode ig Startup device Startup dev This item is for entering the PLC device for starting up the panel po pP Fo selector Fos OK Startup device M000 Panel 5 in operation status DMC10 Package Software Menu screen 000 ON Special package selector M000 000 OFF Panel 5 close 3 64 3 4 Panel Change Switches B Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Startup device Enter the commu
166. a entry upper lower limit values on the numeric keypad panel OK Cancel Help Use decimal point Call the numeric keypad panel having a decimal point entry function For details on the numeric keypad panel see 5 2 Numeric Keypad page 5 4 Upper Lower Enter the valid range of the data when the data is set on the numeric keypad panel When the data entered on the numeric keypad panel exceeds the valid range when the ENT key is touched an error occurs a short high pitched alarm buzzers and the set data 1 cleared to 0 Data entry range Upper limit value Setting data Lower limit value Switch Communications Interlock This sheet is for setting the operation of switch communications functions This sheet is for setting the entry enabled conditions for the switch 3 143 3 9 Keyboard Call B Example Write device D100 number of digits 4 decimal point position 1 notify device M000 numeric keypad entry upper limit value 1500 numeric keypad entry upper limit value 100 17 Switch gt Numeric keypad panel call no E state display 100 0 Data other than 100 to 1500 OFF state display results in a setting error and PLC device D100 1000 data is not written M000 ON Pop up display The numeric keypad panel does not close Press the ENT key to write input data 1000 to write device 0100 and set notify device M000 to ON 3 144
167. ackground change menu others External panel selector background close others External panel close others Bit type 2 state lamp Bit type 3 state lamp Bit type multi value state lamp Word type 2 state lamp Word type 3 state lamp Word type multi value state lamp OOOODOOCOOOOOO 1 7 Chapter 1 SMART OBJECT LIBRARY CONFIGURATION Smart object type Smart object name Basic size Scaling 240Z 555Z dots O O Numeric indicators Basic 1 digit 20 x 20 Basic 2 digit 28 x 20 Basic 3 digit 36 x 20 Basic 4 digit 44 x 20 Basic 5 digit 52 x 20 Basic 6 digit 60 x 20 Basic 7 digit 68 x 20 Basic 8 digit 76 x 20 Basic 9 digit 84 x 20 Basic 10 digit 92 x 20 Basic 11 digit 100 x 20 With calculation 1 digit 20 x 20 With calculation 2 digit 28 x 20 With calculation 3 digit 36 x 20 With calculation 4 digit 44 x 20 With calculation 5 digit 52 x 20 With calculation 6 digit 60 x 20 With calculation 7 digit 68 x 20 With calculation 8 digit 76 x 20 With calculation 9 digit 84 x 20 With calculation 10 digit 92 x 20 With calculation 11 digit 100 x 20 Graphs meters Bar graph Vertical 20 x 40 Bar graph Horizontal 40 x 20 Bar graph Tank type 30 x 30 Meter Upwards 180 x 100 Meter Downwards 180 x 100 Meter Rightwards 100 x 180 Me
168. adrs The device is displayed data A device kind to display is selected Ten key The data to be written in the device under display is entered ENT The data write can be entered to the device under display in the adrs display section ESC The data entered with the ten key become invalid This key makes the panel close and return to the status before menu panel call up Scroll key The data entered with the ten key become invalid AVI The device is scrolled by one word Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS B Panel Shapes HEX Word data modify panel MELSEC PLC Panel No 1406 Remarks 240x240 BIN Word data modify panel MELSEC PLC Panel No 1407 7 8 Lo Le en 4 5 5 Les Lo ESC Remarks 220 x 240 5 33 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS HEX Word data modify panel MELSEC PLC2 word device Panel No 1408 Remarks 240x240 BIN Word data modify panel MELSEC PLC2 word device Panel No 1409 7 8 Lo en 4 5 5 ss o ESC Remarks 220 x 240 5 34 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS Panel classification Bit data modify panel 1410 to 1411 B Function B Example This panel pops up and is displayed by touching the data display section of the PLC monitor smart objects The data to write to the designated device address is displayed with multiple points red color reverse at ON by 16 bits When the data key is touched the selected data is written in the device ad
169. age panel is called is returned to The coordinates of the message panel to be called up can be specified B Configuration Basic ua E Type Omnt This item is for selecting the type of Basic Graphic Text string display smart object Type String device This item is for entering the word Var string data device of the PLC to which the Read conds registered string No data is currently 2 C c stored 7 Keybo Panel This item is for entering the message String dev panel No and the call coordinates of the panel Panel i210 Al E Lamp device This item is for entering the bit device to be monitored for switching graphic or text color display 6 Hide device This item is for entering the bit device OK for clearing the graphic or text display Graphic Set the switch graphic to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic When a lamp device is used the graphic setting becomes OFF Graphic and ON Graphic Text Set the string to be displayed on the smart object and the display text color When a lamp device is used the string setting becomes String when OFF and String when ON 3 138 3 8 Text Display B Example String device D100 ABCD Message panel D Registered string PLC data D100 100 B Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic Enter the communicat
170. al panel selector background change menu others cd cd o qp me Paste Text size coordinates This smart object forcibly selects the panel from the PLC It also starts up the specified panel and closes the startup source panel and other active panels It also starts up the specified background panel and closes currently active background panels Each of the call coordinates of the panels to be started up can be specified B Configuration Basic Basic Method C SW start Extemal start Type C Selector C Dedicated package C Overlay Others Pop up Mode Panelselector BG change v Startup dev 1 m BG panel 2 al p Example Method This item is for selecting the startup method of panel selection external start Type This item is for selecting the type of panel change switch operation others Mode This item is for selecting the operation mode of the smart object panel selector BG change Startup device This item is for entering the PLC device for starting up the panel Call panel This item is for entering the startup panel No and the panel call coordinates Background panel This item is for entering the background panel No to be started up and the call coordinates of the panel Startup device 000 call panel 10 background panel 110 Panel 5 in operation sta
171. al A This item is for entering the number of channels to be sampled and displayed by the recorder 2 axes This item is for displaying sampled data in the 2 axis display format Enter the number of channels to be displayed on the two axes Intervals This item is for entering the data sampling cycle Change intervals at EST This item is for specifying whether the sampling cycle can be changed from the EST main unit or not Clear dev This item is for entering the PLC bit device to clear the sampled data forcibly Data fmt This item is for select the data display format for the sampled recorder data Write method This item is for selecting the data writing method to the CF card Details This item displays the usage status of the dedicated storage area Points This item is for setting the size of the data stored by a channel Save to CF Select this item if you want to save the sampled data in the CF card If this item has been checked the dedicated storage area is used with the area size fixed to 2048 words per channel Dedicated storage area This item displays the number of areas in the dedicated storage area used by the smart object This item is for specifying whether the alarm data is sampled or not Use marker Specifiable only when Alarm monitoring has been selected This item is for specifying whether a marker is displayed on the line of the graph or not when an alarm has been issued CH
172. al EST Z Series User s Manual Application Preparation Manual No CP SP 1088E 5 12 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS B Panel Shapes Message 16 x 5 Panel No 1215 Close Remarks Registered string data 16 single byte characters x 5 lines 220 x 120 Message 32 x 5 Panel No 1216 Remarks Registered string data 32 single byte characters x 5 lines 300 x 140 Message 36 x 11 Panel No 1217 Remarks Registered string data 36 single byte characters x 11 lines 320 x 240 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS 5 6 Alarm Messages Panel classification 124010 1249 B Function This panel is activated to pop up by touching aggregate lamp smart objects on alarm monitors The corresponding alarm names and alarm messages will be displayed Touching the Close key closes the panel and returns to the state before the alarm message panel was opened B Example Touch indicator um Error 1 Error 3 Alarm monitor Aggregation lamp smart object Alarm message Touch Return Alarm message panel B Supplementary Explanation Alarm monitor contacts alarm names and alarm messages are registered during alarm monitor information editing on AP Editor For details see the Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Application Preparation Manual No CP SP 1088E 5 14 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS B Panel Shapes Alarm message 16 x 4 Panel No 1245 Close Remarks Alarm name 16 characters x 1 line
173. al alignment fom topioenterbotom Haignment Seledorzonalalgnmentomlef ceneng Display sting Emerhedspaycdo LTexeoor 1 Swich communications Swich communications function Select the switch communications trion lt Bist interlock action according to ONOFF state of bit devise Range Interock action according to bit device range ll Supplementary Explanation e When selection of the background panel is executed all active panels are restarted For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions When an unregistered panel No is entered the panel is not opened even if the switch is touched When an opened pop up panel is active other panels cannot be started by this smart object This smart object does not function even if pasted to a background panel When User is selected at Graphic type and registered graphics are used for the switch graphic the smart object size becomes the size of the graphic and the smart object cannot be scaled 3 47 3 4 Panel Change Switches Smart object name Panel change switch panel selector background close others Panel change switches Scaling Paste Scaling factor coordinales O Ay Fixed B Function This smart object starts up the specified panel and closes the
174. aling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates p oc qu i Poe da pd B Function This smart object enables panels to be forcibly overlaid from the PLC e It also starts up the specified panel The startup source panel and other active panels stay active The call coordinates of the panel to be started up can be specified B Configuration Basic Panel Change Switches Gmt OOS Method Bm This item is for selecting the startup method of asic panel selection external Method C SW start External start Type This item is for selecting the type of panel Type change switch operation cascade Selector C Special package Overlay C Others Mode Pop up This item is for selecting the operation mode of the smart object Mode Bit zi Startup device This item is for entering the PLC device for starting up the panel selector when Bit has been selected at Mode Call panel H alc Fou ddp ubl Mode Select the operation mode of the panel selector from Bit type and Word type Bit The specified panel is started up when the bit device on the PLC is activated Call panel This item is for entering the startup panel No and call coordinates of the panel when Bit has been selected at Mode The startup source panel and other active panels stay active When a panel is selected the EST turns the bits of the startup device to OFF Word By enter
175. and registered graphics are used for the switch graphic the smart object size becomes the size of the graphic and the smart object cannot be scaled 3 35 3 4 Panel Change Switches Smart object name Panel change switches B Function Panel change switch multi panel selector others Scaling Paste Scaling factor 9 O Ay Ay This smart object starts up a maximum of three panels simultaneously It also closes the startup source panel and other active panels Each of the call coordinates of the panels to be started up can be specified B Configuration Basic Panel Change Switches x Basic Desien Panel SW comm Interlock Method SW start External start Type Selector Special package C Overlay Pop up Mode Multi panel selector v SW comm Interlock Fou psp 8 pe sp or sm sp OK Cancel Panel Panel Change Switches x Omnt Basic Design Panel sw comm Interlock not f al 4 P p 3 6 p nos ft 0 OK 3 36 Method This item is for selecting the startup method of panel selection panel change switch Type This item is for selecting the type of panel change switch operation others Mode This item is for selecting the operation mode of the smart object multi panel selector SW comm Select this it
176. anel Enter call up coordinates of data modify panel Hexadecimal HEX Data modify panel Enter call up coordinates of data modify panel Decimal Maximum Minimum Data Register upper Enter address range upper limit value of data register Da 0 to 999 values limit value Data Register lower Enter address range lower limit value of data register Da 0 to 999 limit value Data Register upper Enter address range upper limit value of data register Db 1000 to 2999 limit value Data Register lower Enter address range lower limit value of data register Db 1000 to 2999 limit value Spec Register Enter address range upper limit value of spec register SD 1000 to 8255 upper limit value i SD N N Ca gt Spec Register Enter address range lower limit value of spec register 1000 to 8255 lower limit value Timer Value upper Enter address range upper limit value of timer value 0 to 255 limit value T Timer Value lower Enter address range lower limit value of timer value 0 to 255 limit value Counter Value Enter address range upper limit value of counter value Ca upper limit value Counter Value a Enter address range lower limit value of counter value Ca 0 to 199 lower limit value Counter Value b Enter address range upper limit value of counter value Cb 200 to 255 upper limit value Counter Value b Enter address range lower limit value of counter value Cb 200 to 255 lower limit value
177. ange Upper value Setting data 2 Lower value 4 1 PID controller B Smart Object Parameters Basic Select when a SDC is connected via the CMC10B Enter the communications channel on the EST Enter the device address of the CMC10B Enter the device address of the SDC10 Enter the decimal point display position of PV and SP me D seems sn Select he color of he grapa J PVcoor Select the numeric display color of the PV SP color Select he numeri metwemm Text color CT Enterthenametextcolo Use decimal port Select when using a numeric Keypad panel wif decimal pommeau Coordinates Enter the cal coordinates of the numeric keypad pane input upper value Enter the input data upper irit value on the keypad pane input ower value Enter the data lower mit value on the numeric keypad pane Supplementary Explanation Changes to the SP value are executed on the current SP value of the SDC10 The current SP value refers to the SP value of the currently selected SP set For example when the SP value is changed while SP1 is selected SP1 will be rewritten For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions Set the communications channel to which the IMEC is to be connec
178. anged are displayed in the cursor field Select the trend device using the scroll key and apply the selection by the OK switch When No 000 is selected the trend of that channel is not sampled Handling Precautions When the trend sampling device or sampling cycle has been changed all currently sampled trend data is cleared and sampling of trend data is started at the newly selected settings 4 52 4 3 Smart object name Trend Trend Scaling Paste Scaling factor coordinales p cq dei d aa B Function This smart object samples the data of the word address specified by the sampling address at the sampling cycle and displays the sampled data as a trend Trends for up to eight channels can be displayed The ON OFF states of bit devices can be displayed as events The bit data specified by the sampling address in the event settings is sampled at the sampling cycle and displayed as events The events of up to three channels can be displayed The sampled time is displayed on the X axis of the trend display in the format month day hour minute 2 axis display can be set by adding the Y axis to the trend display In this display format up to four channels can be displayed on a single axis of the trend display Sampling start end by PLC device or sampling start end by time can be set for sampling of trend data The trend menu panel can be called up to clear the display of each c
179. annel EST communications channel Specify which channel from channels 0 to 4 to use for executing communications The communications settings in the basic settings in the setup information must be set in AP Editor When only one target communications channel is set the channel can be omitted and the device set as follows 1 M100 PLC communications PLC device address address For details on the EST communications channel refer to the Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Communications Connection Manual No CP SP 1090E 2 3 Chapter 2 SMART OBJECT SPECIFICATIONS PLC communications address Set the communications address of the destination PLC in decimal Setting ranges and other information differ according to the PLC Be sure to set the same communications address as that of the PLC PLC device Specify the word device or bit device of the PLC Conventions used differ according to PLC type and device For details refer to the Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Communications Connection Manual No CP SP 1090E If the PLC type is not set in the communications settings an input error will occur and the PLC device cannot be entered B Supplementary Explanation 2 4 This item provides supplementary explanations regarding functions and smart object parameters o Handling Precautions Handling Precautions indicate items that the user should pay attention to when handling the Smart Terminal Chapte
180. aphic Set the switch graphic to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic When a lamp device is used the graphic setting becomes OFF Graphic and ON Graphic Text Set the string to be displayed on the smart object and the display text color When a lamp device is used the string setting becomes OFF string and ON string 3 23 3 3 Word Type Switches Switch Communications Set the operation of switch communications functions Interlock Set the entry enabled conditions for the switch B Example Numeric device D010 calculation data 5 data format unsigned binary addition PLC device Switch input SY 0010 100 The value 105 obtained by adding data 510 0010 100 is written 0010 105 Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic oe device Enter the communications channel the device address and fee ae word device Select the write data format from unsigned binary signed az binary Hex BCD Select the calculation type from addition subtraction Calculation data Enter the calculation data Unsigned binary 0 to 65535 Signed binary 32768 to 32767 Hex 0000 to FFFF BCD 0000 to 9999 Upper value Enter the upper limit value of the addition When addition is selected Lower value Enter the lower limit value of the subtraction When subtraction is selected Lamp device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device e d
181. aphic and blinking of the state 2 3 graphic Blinking of strings is performed alternately between blinking of the state 1 string and blinking of the state 2 3 string The string currently set to state 2 3 is displayed as the text to be displayed For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions Enter the bit device on the PLC for the State 1 2 3 device Do not enter word devices such as registers When a registered graphic is used for the lamp graphic all state 1 2 3 graphics must be created at the same size When a registered graphic is used for the lamp graphic the smart object size becomes the size of the graphic and the smart object cannot be scaled 3 85 3 5 Lamps Smart object name Bit type multi value state lamp Lamps Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates rc e doe gom B Function This smart object selects display of up to 15 graphics according to the ON OFF state of the lamp device on the PLC B Configuration Basic Lamps x Basic Bit Word This item is used for selecting the lamp type State Po Pe State Hi This item is used for selecting the operation function of the lamp smart Lamp dev 4 object Lamp device States This item is for entering the start bit device to be monitored for switchi
182. ar switch 3 11 Alarm Monitor Smart object name History display alarm information display Alarm monitor Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates foci Gp B Function This smart object displays the number of times that alarms registered to the alarm monitoring information of the application data have occurred Displays the messages of an alarm by cursor are displayed Up to 400 history records are stored When an alarm occurs alarm name or messages date of occurrence Month Date and time of occurrence Hour Minute are displayed at the alarm occurrence display color When an alarm is recovered the date of recovery Month Date Second and time of recovery Hour Minute are displayed at the alarm recovery display color The cursor or history display can be scrolled B Configuration Basic Alarm Monitor Basic Design Type C Alarm lamp Display alarm info Type acia This item is for selecting the type of C Monitor alarm monitor smart object Details Summary 1 Count Details This item is for selecting the display object size do C 00x 160 OCET content of the alarm information display Items Name display Smart object size dot This item is for selecting Items This item is for selecting the display item OK e Smart object size dot Select
183. art address becomes the lower value device address when the monitor start address is changed by the device modify panel under the monitor range of one screen with less than 48 words The device display of PLCs and monitor smart objects may be partially different from those of the manufacturer The following shows the cross reference of each device MELSEC Mitsubishi Corp Monitor smart object Data Register Link Register The detail of smart object settings is given in 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 4 98 4 5 PLC monitor o Handling Precautions Set the driver for monitor smart objects to be used for each channel with Setup information Basic setting gt Communications setting of the AP Editor For detail on the settings refer to Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Application Preparation Manual No CP SP 1088E When the panel pasted with PLC monitor smart objects is started up by panel overlay the operation is as described below Do not execute the panel overlay startup for the panels pasted with PLC monitor smart objects When the pop up panels displayed by PLC monitor device change or the pop up panels of other smart objects are returned to the panels pasted with PLC monitor smart objects the PLC monitor device and address of PLC monitor smart objects might be changed to the initial status or the device might not be displayed This happens when the panels pasted with PLC monito
184. art object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 3 145 3 9 Keyboard Call 3 146 1 Handling Precautions Be sure to enter a multiple of 16 when entering the bit device to the numeric write device When displaying 2 word data do not enter the final address of the PLC as the numeric write device Enter the bit device on the PLC for Clear Notify devices Do not enter word devices such as registers When a calculation error underflow overflow occurs in write calculation the data set on the numeric keypad is not written The notify device also is not set to ON Note however that the numeric keypad panel closes Numeric keypad panels cannot be started up when a started up pop up panel is currently active B Function Smart object name 3 9 Keyboard Call Keyboard Keyboard call Scaling Paste Scaling factor This smart object calls up the keyboard panel as pop up panel and stops the startup source panel and other active panels when a switch is touched On the keyboard panel the data can be written to the write device on the PLC The data write timing can be notified to the PLC When entry of data on the keyboard panel ends the keyboard panel closes and the state before the keyboard panel was called is returned to The coordinates of the keyboard panel to be called up can be specified B Config
185. ary v 1 word z Write dev NROOOOO il 7 Notify dev SW comm Interlock Write device This item is for entering the word device when data entered on the numeric keypad is written Notify device This item is for entering the bit device to be set turned ON at completion of writing of the data entered on the numeric Number of digits keypad Decimal point p i Hide device This item is for entering the bit device for clearing the switch graphic or text display OK n Number of digits This item is for entering the number of numeric display digits on the numeric keypad panel Decimal point This item is for entering the decimal point position on the numeric keypad panel Notify device The bit of the notify device is set to ON when the data entered on the numeric keypad panel is written The EST does not reset the notify device to OFF Set the device on the PLC after confirming the ON state of the bit 3 141 3 9 Keyboard Call 3 142 Graphic Text Calculation Set the switch graphic to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic The graphic setting becomes OFF Graphic and ON Graphic ON Graphic is the display graphic in a numeric keypad called up state Set the string to be displayed on the smart object and the display text color The string setting becomes OFF string and ON string ON string is the display text in a numer
186. ates of bit devices can be displayed as events The bit data specified by the sampling address in the event settings is sampled at the sampling cycle and displayed as events The events of up to three channels can be displayed The sampled time is displayed on the X axis of the trend display in the format month day hour minute 2 axis display can be set by adding the Y axis to the trend display In this display format up to four channels can be displayed on a single axis of the trend display Sampling start end by PLC device or sampling start end by time can be set for sampling of trend data The variable trend menu panel can be called to change the device on which the trend is to be sampled and the sampling cycle Trend displays can also be cleared for each channel Display is cleared by each channel The maximum value minimum value of display can be changed Sampled data can be cleared by setting the Hide device to ON The alarm is displayed by sampling the bit data specified by the alarm device of alarm setting at the sampling cycle and by blinking the PV process variable of each channel Configuration Basic A erid Smart object size dot 640 x 255 Alarm monitoring CH Total A Intervals Data fmt Trend mem Total time 5h20m00s Points words p 3 p Unsigned binary Clear dev configuration 2 Trend buffers E e De
187. ation according to bit device ONOFF Range iterockoperatonaccorigtofhedetadevcerange B Supplementary Explanation Numeric data when 4 digit BCD is selected as the data format is displayed without zeros suppressed Numeric data when 5 digit binary is selected as the data format is displayed with zeros suppressed Data is displayed at signed binary Of the numeric value exceeds the upper and lower limit values with each press of the A and Y keys the numeric value blinks at the alarm text color and a short high pitched alarm buzzers For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 1 Handling Precautions Be sure to enter a multiple of 16 when entering the bit device of the PLC to the numeric device Do not change the data of the numeric device on other smart objects or internally on the PLC Doing so might prevent correct operation When 4 digit BCD is selected as the data format operation may not be correct if data other than BCD is entered to the numeric device 3 155 3 10 Data Setter Smart object name Bit pattern setter Scaling Paste Scaling factor eoordinaies O Ay Fixed B Function The setter can set the ON OFF states of eight continuous switch devices Each press of the switch changes the ON OFF states of the switch devices The switch graphic changes according to the ON OFF state of the eight
188. ation address and the word device Enter the communications channel the station address and the bit device display Select when the alarm display function is used Bar graph Enter the minimum value of the display data Enter the maximum value of the display data Select the display color of the bar graph Select user Select from the registered graphics Enter the constant or the communications channel the station address and the word device Enter the constant or the communications channel the station address and the bit device Select the display graphic when an alarm occurs from the registered graphics Handling Precautions The smart object frame displays the range in which the center of the graphic user registered graphic moves When another display smart object overlaps the area of the registered graphic to the top bottom left or right of this center of movement the smart object under the slide meter is no longer displayed Enter the bit device on the PLC for the Hide device Do not enter word devices such as registers Be sure to enter a multiple of 16 when entering the bit device to the numeric device Create registered graphics at a size of 64 x 64 dots or smaller registered graphics may not be displayed properly if they are created at a larger size 3 122 3 7 Graphs Meters Smart object name Pie chart Graphs meters Scaling
189. ation device 100 alarm upper limit value 1000 alarm lower limit value 200 PLC data Up to 199 200 to 1000 EST display ON display OFF display ON display alarm display normal display alarm display Read calculation 20 100 120 150 100 350 950 100 1050 Ecc Numeric keypad use numeric device 2100 number of digits 4 decimal point position 1 read calculation mode add read calculation device 100 write calculation mode subtract write calculation device 100 notification device M000 numeric keypad entry upper limit value 1500 numeric keypad entry lower limit value 100 PLC device Display when numeric device D100 Display data 200 100 300 30 0 0100 200 M000 Touch the numeric indicator Pop up display 30 0 100 0 eie ki E E x 6 Display when numeric device D100 Le ls Display data 900 100 1000 100 0 OFF state display Data other than 100 to 1500 results in a setting error and PLC device data is not written The numeric keypad panel D100 1000 does not close Press the ENT key to write input data 1000 the resultant data obtained by performing write calculation on input data 1000 Writ data 1000 100 900 Set notify device M000 to ON M000 3 109 3 6 Numeric Indicators B Smart Object Parameters
190. ation device for the read calculation data The data to be displayed on the smart object is the data after calculation processing Write calculation data This setting is enabled when the numeric keypad is used Calculates the data entered on the numeric keypad panel and the setting values of the calculation device for the write calculation data The data after calculation processing is written to the PLC 3 107 3 6 Numeric Indicators Alarm This sheet is for setting the upper lower limit values of the data when the alarm display is used The numeric data to be verified by alarm display processing is the calculation result data obtained by performing calculation processing of the read calculation data on the numeric device Numeric Indicators Omnt Basic Graphic Alarm Upper val 9999 Lower val 01 OK Numeric keypad Upper value This item is for entering the upper limit value of the numeric data An alarm state occurs when the numeric data exceeds the upper limit value Alarm state numeric data gt upper limit value Lower value This item is for entering the lower limit value of the numeric data An alarm state occurs when the numeric data falls below the lower limit value Alarm state lower limit value numeric data This sheet is for setting the numeric keypad panel when the numeric keypad is used Numeric Indicators Omnt Va
191. ation is as described below Do not execute the panel overlay startup for the panels pasted with PLC monitor smart objects When the pop up panels displayed by PLC monitor device change or the pop up panels of other smart objects are returned to the panels pasted with PLC monitor smart objects the PLC monitor device and address of PLC monitor smart objects might be changed to the initial status or the device might not be displayed This happens when the panels pasted with PLC monitor smart objects are restarted at panel movement Do not use this smart object for panels that are to be started up as pop up panels When the pop up panel is active a device modify panel and data modify panel cannot be called 4 107 4 5 PLC monitor B Function B Configuration Basic 4 108 MELSEC FX CPU Bit device PLC monitor Scaling L di LI i Ay Paste Text size coordinates This is used in the case of Mitsubishi AFX series CPU module to be connected Can monitor the CPU bit device zone Can modify the PLC device data PLO monitor Basic Graphic Panel Min Max PLC kind C MELSEC AG Link MELSEC FX CPU MELSEG CPU MELSEG Q C Link GPU kind General Data kind Bits Words Monitor method C Monitor only With modify Smart object size dot 320 x 160 C 640 x 440 EST comm 2 A Node fo Interlock devie Can
192. ays the SP set point value MV This displays the MV manipulated variable value ALM PV This blinks when the PV or RTD wiring resistance is overrange ALM SP This blinks when the SP value is out of range AT This blinks while auto tuning is being executed RDY This lights when the CB508 is in the Ready mode SP SET Entry to an SP display field for each channel causes a numeric keypad to pop up so that the SP value can be changed Common monitors PV This blinks when one of ALM PV on each channel is ON or when C J is overrange SP This blinks when one of ALM SP on each channel is ON DATA This blinks when an internal data error occurs CT This blinks when CT is overrange EV1 to EV8 This blinks when EV1 to EV8 is ON 4 21 4 1 PID controller B Configuration Basic Design 4 22 PID controller Basic Desien Numeric keypad Type 0610 C 50020 21 SDC30 31 50040 STD RSP Smart object size dot 29077160 via 0 ESTcommcH dev ads Controller dev adrs fo Decimal paint p OK Cancel Help via CMC10B Select this item when the CB508 is to be connected to the EST via the CMC10B EST CMC10B A RS 485 5 lead RS 485 3 lead Type This item is for selecting the IMEC type Smart object size dot
193. be operated when the interlock device is ON Notify dev use This item notifies the external PLC of the operating state when writing recipe data The following three data items are notified Recipe No word device Notifies the recipe No using binary data Norm dev bit device Turns the bit ON at normal end of writing Abnorm dev bit device Turns the bit ON at abnormal end of writing Recipe No X Recipe No Recipe write processing EST is reset at confirmation of the nomal abnomal end message Normal end abunormal end Write executing 4 36 4 2 Recipe Design Data title This item is for entering the display title of the data Name title This item is for the display title of the data name Edit function This item is for selecting whether or not to provide the Edit switch Data comment Select this item to attach a display function for the recipe data comment Comment title This item is for entering the display of data comment No This item is for selecting the display pon 44 ME graphic of the recipe Fill color This item is for selecting the display color of the graphic Cursor This item is for selecting the display color of cursor display Comment This item is for selecting the display text color of the recipe data comment Edit function This item is for selecting whether or not to provide a recipe edit panel call func
194. bject is pasted is activated The panel will function properly by restarting the panel after the change has been made C02 C04 C05 Cog C10 Temperature unit Input range Decimal point position Lower SP limit Upper SP limit When the SP lamp is operating the SP value in the lamp cannot be displayed The SP value is displayed when the final SP value is reached Do not use this smart object for panels that are to be started up as pop up panels When the pop up panel is active a numeric keypad panel cannot be called 4 1 PID controller Smart object name SDC30 31 PID controller Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates dd Wei o po so B Function This smart object enables monitoring of the run state of the SDC30 31 The SP value can also be changed PV This displays the PV process variable value SP This displays the SP set point value MV This displays the MV manipulated variable value ALM This blinks when an alarm occurs EV1 This lights when EV1 is ON EV2 This lights when EV2 is ON AT This blinks during auto tuning RDY This lights when the SDC10 is in the Ready mode REM This lights when the SDC30 81 is in the Remote SP mode MAN This lights when the SDC30 31 is in the Manual mode SPSET This button causes a numeric keypad to pop up so that the SP value can be changed B Configuration Basic PID controller Cnt er TL T
195. bject is pasted is activated The panel will function properly by restarting the panel after the change has been made Input type Decimal point position PV range lower limit PV range upper limit Lower SP limit Upper SP limit Do not use this smart object for panels that are to be started up as pop up panels When the pop up panel is active a numeric keypad panel cannot be called 4 1 PID controller Smart object name DMC10 4 channel model PID controller Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates Pd ee ae B Function This smart object enables monitoring of the run state of the DMC10 4 channel model The SP value can also be changed B Configuration Basic Type This is for selecting the IMEC Cmnt type Basic Desien Numeric keypad E Smart object size C 50010 C This item is for selection the Smart C SDC20 21 j object size SDC30 31 68508 via CMC1 OB 506404 STD RSP Select this item when connecting the DMC10 via the CMC10B Smart object size dot 6 280 X 150 EST comm CH This item is for entering the asc eei communications channel on the EST EST comm CH E CMC10B device address dev This item is for entering the device Controller dev 4 address of the CMC10B 77 2 Controller device address
196. c device on the PLC when a switch is touched When the calculation result exceeds the upper limit value lower limit value settings the setting values of the upper limit value lower limit value are written to the numeric device Combinations of data add switches and data subtract switches can be used as a data UP DOWN setter The display of the graphic and text can be cleared by setting the Hide device to ON B Configuration Basic HOP um qu This item is for selecting the type of function switch smart object Basic Graphic Text SW comm Interloc SW comm dare Select this item when using switch communications Word write C Const write functions SW comm Interlock Interlock Select this item when using the interlock function Fi it Unsigned bi m ym SEED Format Numeric dev This item is for selecting the calculation data format and calculation type Calculation data 1 Numeric device This item is for entering the word device to be targeted for calculation Upper value 9999 Lamp dev Calculation data This item is for entering calculation data constants Upper lower value This item is for entering the upper limit value lower limit value of the data Lamp device This item is for entering the bit device to be monitored for switching graphic or text display Hide device This item is for entering the bit device for clearing the graphic or text display Gr
197. call Blink at OFF This item is for setting blinking at a normal display state Blink at ON This item is for setting blinking at an OK Help alarm state or a numeric keypad call OFF numeric oo Color at ON Blink at OFF Blink at ON View mode Select the display mode of the numeric data Zero suppress Displays numeric data with zeros suppressed sign Displays plus data prefixed with when signed binary data is to be displayed Lower case Displays A to in the lower case as a to f when displaying hexadecimal data This sheet is for setting the calculation method of the numeric data Numeric Indicators Omnt Basic Graphic Calc Num keypad Read cale data a Cale mode 9 Read calculation data Calculation processing preset at Read calculation data is performed on the numeric device and the result of that calculation is displayed on the smart object C Sub C Mul Devide Callc dev b 1 Write calc data Calc mode Add C Sub C Mul Devide Write calculation data Calculation processing preset at Write calculation data is performed on the data entered on the numeric keypad panel and the result of that calculation is written to the write device Read calculation data Calculates data read from the numeric device and the setting values of the calcul
198. cations channel Node Enter the station address of computer link module r Smart object size dot 320 x 160 640 x 440 EST comm Interlock device Select this in the case of interlock function use CPU kind Select the CPU kind to monitor from the pull menu When the corresponding device is not found in the menu select the General Monitor method Monitor Monitor the value of a device The data can not be modified Modify The device value can be monitored and changed Smart object size dot Selects only at the EST555Z application preparation Selects the 320 x 160 pixels automatically on the EST240Z Interlock device The Interlock device can be selected when the terms are added at the time of data write If the Modify has not been selected with Monitor method the Interlock device can not be selected Enter a PLC bit device to control the interlock operation The data modify panel can be called up when the bit device is ON 4 5 PLC monitor Graphic Panel Set the graphic to display with smart objects and set the display color Designate the call up coordinates of the device modify and the data modify panels PLC monitor Maximum Minimum values Enter the device range to monitor PLC monitor Initialize Device modify panel Enter the call up coordinates of data modify panel Data modify panel
199. cations Connection Manual No CP SP 1090E E Handling Precautions Send at ON OFF and Buffer at ON OFF settings are not available for panel change smart objects Chapter 2 SMART OBJECT SPECIFICATIONS Completion notification Switch code Switch functions This item executes switch notification operation at completion of a data setting operation Word Type Switches Gmnt Basic Graphic Text i Interlock Switch code D e Switch code This item is for setting data within the SW functions range 32768 to 32767 Switch functions This item is for setting the operation functions in switch communications Use SW notify C Use SW buffer OK Cancel Set the switch code to be notified Set the data within the range 32768 to 32767 Set the function of switch communications from the following options Use SW notify The switch code is issued by the serial command Switch Notify response only sw at completion of data setting The issued command is sent from the EST communications port currently set to Serial slave station communications The event to be notified becomes N Use switch buffer The switch code is written to the switch communications buffer at completion of data setting When the switch code is written to the switch communications buffer the switch output on the EST turns ON For this reason use the Switch Communications Buffer Read SW co
200. ce Control device M000 Smart Object Parameters Supplementary Explanation When this smart object is pasted to the panel used as background panel the buzzer can be controlled on the PLC at all times e This is a transparent smart object and may be pasted anywhere o Handling Precautions Ensure ON OFF times on the control device of at least twice the maximum EST scan time Enter the bit device on the PLC as the Control device Do not enter word 3 200 3 13 State Control Smart object name External buzzer OFF State contro Scaling Paste Scalingfactor Textsize coordinates poc quo cd do eos node devices such as registers B Function This smart object forcibly turns the EST buzzer OFF from the PLC This smart object turns the buzzer OFF when the control device is activated State Control Cont Basic Type C Backlight control C Backlight ON Type This item is for selecting the type of external control smart object C Buzzer control C Notify batt alam Write data at startup Control device This item is for entering the bit device for turning the buzzer OFF Configuration Basic e Control device The EST buzzer is forcibly turned OFF when the control device is activated The EST turns the control device OFF when the buzzer is turned OFF EST EST _ Alarm tone MET M000 OFF buzzer ON buzzer OFF 3 201 3 13 State Con
201. ce address and word device 00002 Enter the value to be added to the data of the string device Enter the communications channel the device address and thebitdevice Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Graphic Select the graphic type from general user Select the graphic displayed at OFF Select the display color of the OFF graphic Select to cause blinking when OFF Fonsze SeecheionszeWomBandiBdos Valgnmeni Select erica algnment rom AS LHalgnment Selectmorzontalalgnmentiomiefcenteright AS color Enierthe display tox color 3 130 3 8 Text Display B Supplementary Explanation Set the data of the string device in signed binary data format The string is not displayed when the string of the registered graphic No to be displayed is not set The Hide device can be set when a lamp device is used For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions Be sure to enter a multiple of 16 when entering the bit device to the character string data device Enter the word device on the PLC as the lamp Hide device Do not enter bit devices such as relays When a registered graphic is used for the switch graphic the OFF graphic and ON graphic to be displayed must be created at the same size When a registered graphic
202. cel Help CPU kind PLC kind Select the PLC kind of PLC monitor MELSEC FX CPU CPU kind Select the CPU kind to monitor Data kind Select the data kind of a device to display Monitor method Select the monitor method Smart object size dot This item is for selecting the smart object size EST comm CH Enter the EST communications channel Node Enter the station address of the CPU module 0 fixed Interlock device Select this in the case of interlock function use Select the CPU kind to monitor from the pull menu When the corresponding device is not found in the menu select the General Monitor method Monitor Monitor the device value The data can not be modified Modify The device values can be monitored and modified Smart object size dot Selects only at the EST555Z application preparation Selects the 320 x 160 pixels automatically on the EST240Z Interlock device The Interlock device can be selected when the terms are added at the time of data write If the Modify has not been selected with Monitor method the Interlock device can not be selected Enter a PLC bit device to control the interlock operation The data modify panel can be called up when the bit device is ON 4 5 PLC monitor E Graphic Set the graphic
203. color of event data View 130075 1713 Control Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Enter the sampling start time of the trend data Enter the sampling end time of the trend data B Supplementary Explanation When sampling of trend data exceeds the data size of the trend buffer data is deleted from the oldest data onwards and the latest data is stored When sampling of trend data has been stopped and sampling resumed 0 is set to the sampling data of the time during which sampling stopped and sampling of data is continued from the elapsed time 0 is set for times when sampling was not performed N Stop Start The detail of smart object settings is given in 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 4 61 4 3 1 Handling Precautions Be sure to enter a multiple of 16 when entering the bit device to the trend sampling address Enter the bit device on the PLC as the sampling address for the event Do not enter word devices such as registers Enter 1 byte strings to the trend name at the EST240Z application preparation Clear device Enter the bit device on the PLC at Hide device Control device Do not enter word devices such as registers The Hide device is reset to OFF on the EST after the ON state of the bit is confirmed Execute Hide device by one shot instructions One shot instructions may not function
204. corder If 2 axis display has been set for the recorder 1 to 8 channels are displayed on the A axis while 9 to 16 channels are displayed on the B axis Name Enter the data names of each channel in up to 12 single byte characters Units Enter the character string for unit displayed beside the current values of each channel in up to 3 single byte characters Line Color This item is for selecting the color of the line displayed on the recorder graph 4 6 __a ui i yArereo c o o _e X X dl Alarm configuration Alarm device This item is for entering the bit device of alarm sampling Basic Channel Alarm View Marker Control ooo NR00000 0 s 14500000 p m 4500000 0 N TMBnnnnn Alarm device Enter the bit device of alarm sampling The alarm is displayed by sampling the bit data of alarm setting at the sampling cycle and by lighting up the LED beside the current value of each channel If a marker has been set the marker is displayed on the line of the graph Handling Precautions The channel to which Alarm 1 device or Alarm 2 device is set uses one dedicated storage area for sampling alarm information f you do not use an alarm leave the corresponding cell blank 4 133 4 6 4 134 View configuration Upper val Lower val This item is for entering the uppe
205. d Error end message 4 39 4 2 Recipe B Supplementary Explanation The name set at Configuration Information Recipe Data in AP Editor is displayed at the recipe name data name and data comment The recipe name written by the smart object is reflected in internal registers SR95100 to 95125 on the EST The currently executing recipe name can be displayed by using a variable string smart object to specify that storage register SR95100 To use a recipe smart object the recipe must be set at Configuration Information Recipe Data in AP Editor For details see the Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Application Preparation Manual No CP SP 1088E Handling Precautions The dedicated storage area is the memory area backed up by battery on the EST unit The EST240Z has 5 units of the size 20480 word areas The EST555Z has 64 units of the variable length size areas Total area size is 208000 words The dedicated storage area is used for recipe smart object trend smart object dedicated package If all of the dedicated storage areas have been used for the functions other than recipe function the recipe function cannot be used One of the special storage areas is used as the recipe buffer for recipe functions Enter the bit device on the PLC at Settings interlock Write interlock Do not enter word devices such as registers Be sure to enter a multiple of 16 when entering the bit device to the reci
206. d Close This button cancels the selection and returns to the call panel Recipe name field This item displays the name of the currently set recipe using up to 36 1 byte characters Scroll keys These keys scroll the data to be displayed db Display the start final data 2 3 Scroll display data five items at a time Holding down these switches scrolls the display data at high speed A vl Scroll display data one item at a time Holding down these switches scrolls the display data at high speed 5 22 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS B Panel Shapes Recipe read panel 280 x 200 Panel No 1345 5 23 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS Panel classification Recipe edit panel 1350 to 1359 B Function This panel pops up and is displayed by touching the Edit switch on a recipe smart object This panel is for selecting the recipe to be set on a recipe setting smart object Recipes can be duplicated by touching the Copy key Recipes can be deleted by touching the Delete key Touching the Close key closes the panel and returns to the state before the menu panel was called B Example Recipe name field Cursor display field Scroll keys source vest Delete Copy Close Copy This item duplicates the selected recipe data to the specified recipe Select the recipe to be duplicated using the cursor and enter the duplicate source and destination by the
207. d With auto write smart objects writing of recipe data is controlled on the PLC For this reason that smart object itself becomes a smart object for displaying and editing recipe data The name set at Configuration Information Recipe Data in AP Editor is displayed at the recipe name data name and data comment The name written by the smart object is reflected in internal registers on the EST The currently executing recipe name can be displayed by using a variable string smart object to specify the start device of that storage register Group 1 SR95100 to 95125 Group 2 SR95126 to 95151 Group 3 SR95152 to 95177 Group 4 SR95178 to 95203 To use a recipe smart object the recipe must be set at Configuration Information Recipe Data in AP Editor For details see the Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Application Preparation Manual No CP SP 1088E Handling Precautions Dedicated storage area Device setting One of the dedicated storage areas is used as the recipe buffer for recipe functions The dedicated storage area is the memory area backed up by battery on the EST unit The EST240Z has 5 units of the size 20480 word areas The EST555Z has 64 units of the variable length size areas Total area size is 208000 words The dedicated storage area is used for recipe smart object trend smart object dedicated package If all of the dedicated storage areas have been used for the functions other than recipe func
208. d displayed on a single smart object is 1 to 8 Note however that the number of channels that can be displayed when 2 axis display format is selected is 1 to 4 CH Total B when 2 axis display is selected Sampled data is displayed in the form of a 2 axis trend graph Enter the number of channels to be displayed on the 2nd axis B axis The number of channels that are displayed on the 2nd B axis is 1 to 4 Intervals Enter the data sampling cycle within the range 1 second to 60 minutes 59 seconds With events when with event is selected Enter the number of channels by which event data is to be sampled and displayed The range of event channels that can be sampled and displayed on a single smart object is 1 to 3 4 65 4 3 Trend 4 66 CHI CH2 CH3 CH4 CH6 CH8 Clear device Enter the bit device on the PLC for forcibly clearing the sampled data Data format Select the display format of the sampled trend data from Unsigned binary Signed binary BCD Trend buffers The number of trend buffers to be used on the smart object is displayed Points words Set the size of the data to be saved for a single channel The setting range for data size is as follows EST Z Data setting range EST240Z 320 to 101400 EST555Z 640 to 207800 If the number of storage is changed the trend buffer is automatically secured in the dedicated s
209. d if an unregistered panel No is entered The EST however turns the startup device OFF When Word is selected at Mode the panel is not selected if a panel No not registered to the panel device is entered The EST however resets the panel device to 0 Note however that when panel No 0 or 900 or above has been specified the data of the panel device is not set to 0 When an opened pop up panel is active other panels cannot be started by this smart object To execute panel selection by this smart object execute setting of the data to the startup device or panel device by one shot instructions One shot instructions may not function properly on circuits that are executed at all times Bit type SET 000 Start device Word type ov K10 D100 Panel device 3 61 3 4 Panel Change Switches Smart object name External open pop up Panel change switches Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates cd di es ee B Function Startup This smart object forcibly causes the specified panel to pop up and start from the PLC t also causes the specified panel to pop up when the startup device is activated and closes the startup source panel and closes other active panels Note however that when this smart object is started up from a background panel the background panel does not close The call coordinates of the panel to be started up
210. d in the CF card Data M 2 na 1 File File 1 is overwritten Linear write Data is stored as far as there is some space in the CF card When there is no space in the CF card the sampled data is not stored in the CF card Dedicated storage area CF card Available area Data i cessano Us File 2 File i n File Stored in the CF card Data gt n 4 Fi e The overflow file is not stored in the CF card 4 140 4 6 1 Handling Precautions Be sure to enter a multiple of 16 when entering the bit device to the trend sampling address Enter the bit device on the PLC as the sampling address for the event Do not enter word devices such as registers Clear device Enter the bit device on the PLC at Hide device Control device Do not enter word devices such as registers The Hide device is reset to OFF on the EST after the ON state of the bit is confirmed Execute Hide device by one shot instructions One shot instructions may not function properly on circuits that are executed at all times Ladder circuit example Rise condition SET M000 1 Clear device Dedicated storage area The dedicated storage area is the memory area backed up by battery on the EST unit The EST555Z has 64 units of the var
211. d is automatically selected Note however that Graphic at OFF Graphic at ON can be freely selected from registered graphics when User has been selected at Graphic type PLC devices can also be set in addition to the constant settings to the upper limit value lower limit value For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configurarion Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 1 Handling Precautions Be sure to enter a multiple of 16 when entering the bit device to lamp devices Enter the bit device on the PLC for the Hide device Do not enter word devices such as registers When a registered graphic is used for the lamp graphic the OFF graphic and ON graphic to be displayed must be created at the same size When a registered graphic is used for the lamp graphic the smart object size becomes the size of the graphic and the smart object cannot be scaled 3 90 3 5 Lamps Smart object name Word type 3 state lamp Lamps Scaling Paste Scaling factor es Ay Fixed Ay _ B Function This smart object selects and displays the three states of lamp graphics according to the data range of the lamp device on the PLC The following table shows the range settings as the display selection conditions of the three states Range setting State 1 Lower limit value Lamp device data State 2 Upper limit value Lamp device data Lower limit value State 3 La
212. d on a single rail Registered graphics 64 x 64 dots defined by the user are displayed as graphics Graphic Display Basic Graphic Type Rail movement C Free movement E Rail OO d V Hide dev Cancel Help Rail Select the display format for the rail Vertical Horizontal e Number Type This item is for selecting the smart object type for graphic display Rail This item is for selecting the display format of the rail Number This item is for entering the number of graphics to be displayed Graphic position This item is for entering the word device on the PLC to which the display position of the graphic is currently stored Hide device This item is for entering the bit device whose graphic display is to be cleared The rail is displayed in the vertical direction The rail is displayed in the horizontal direction Enter the number of graphics to be displayed simultaneously on the rail Set the graphic to be displayed on the smart object 4 75 4 4 Graphic Movement B Example Rail direction vertical number of graphics 2 graphic 1 position 2010 graphic 2 position D011 graphic 1 5 graphic 2 6 EST display Position Position Position Position Position Position Position Position Position Position Position Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 0 Perec ada PLC device Registered graphic 0010 0051
213. d on the EST buffer area recipe buffer for storing the recipe data is secured as the dedicated storage area on the EST When the recipe function is used one of the dedicated storage areas is used as a recipe buffer Dedicated storage area Recipe buffer 1 One of the dedicated Dedicated storage area storage areas is assigned Dedicated storage area as the recipe buffer Dedicated storage area Dedicated storage area Handling Precautions The dedicated storage area is the memory area backed up by battery on the EST unit The EST240Z has 5 units of the size 20480 word areas The EST555Z has 64 units of the variable length size areas Total area size is 208000 words The dedicated storage area is used for recipe smart object trend smart object dedicated package If all of the dedicated storage areas have been used for the functions other than recipe function the recipe function cannot be used 4 27 4 2 Recipe B Recipe Data The recipe buffer has a data storage area of 5000 words The number of recipes that can be set on the EST is 25 to 200 The size of recipes that can be managed is calculated as follows 5000 2 number of recipes x number of words used per recipe B Recipe Smart Objects These smart objects display the recipe data currently stored on the EST The data currently set to the specified recipe No can be displayed and the data modified and written EST240Z Recipe No
214. d up can be specified B Configuration Basic Panel Change Switches Basic Design SW comm Interlock Method SW start External start Type C Selector Special package C Others Pop up SW comm Interlock Call panel 2 ale dp 2 peor pe OK Cancel Help Design Set the switch graphic and the display string Switch Communications Method This item is for selecting the startup method of panel selection panel change switch Type This item is for selecting the type of panel change switch operation cascade SW comm Select this item when using switch communications functions Interlock Select this item when using the interlock function Call panel This item is for entering the startup panel No and the call coordinates of the panel Set the operation of switch communications functions Interlock Set the entry enabled conditions for the switch 3 29 3 4 Panel Change Switches B Example Call panel 10 call coordinates 20 10 Panel5 Call coordinates 20 10 in operating status Panel 10 activated Panel 5 in operation status Panel Cascade ON B Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic Enter the panel No to be started up Enter the call coordinates of the panel to be started up Select when using switch communications Select when using interlocked opera
215. der circuit example Rise condition SET M000 Clear device Dedicated storage area The dedicated storage area is the memory area backed up by battery on the EST unit The EST240Z has 5 units of the size 20480 word areas The EST555Z has 64 units of the variable length size areas Total area size is 208000 words More than one dedicated storage area for one smart object are used as a trend buffer on the smart object The dedicated storage area is used for recipe smart object trend smart object dedicated package If all of the dedicated storage areas have been used the recipe smart object cannot be used e If a short sampling cycle is set data sometimes cannot be sampled at the set sampling cycle in some applications If data was not sampled at the set sampling cycle the EST sets following value to the sampling data EST model 976552 9999h Data format At this time internal special contact SM9068 0 is set to ON During debugging of applications determine the sampling cycle by monitoring SM9068 0 on a switch or lamp smart object Special contact SM9068 0 is a latch operated contact and can be reset by switch smart objects 4 72 4 3 If you conduct the following operation the message Division by 0 may appear opening on the AP Editor Ver 2 2 02 or earlier an application using variable trend smart objects with the AP Editor Ver 3 0 00 or later editing the variable trend s
216. der smart object wait until BUSY changes to START and then turn OFF the power or remove the CF card Also take the following handling precautions Do not bend it drop or cause a strong shock Do not spray water or expose it to direct sunlight Do not disassemble it or insert metallic objects such as a clip Wrong handling of the CF card may corrupt its data In such a case Yamatake will not assume any responsibility Before switching the screen of the EST to the system screen or downloading or uploading be sure to press the STOP button of the recorder smart object and make sure BUSY changes to START Wrong handling of the CF card may corrupt its data In such a case Yamatake will not assume any responsibility ili The Role of This Manual Outline of EST Z Series Manuals The below 9 manuals are provided to cover a range of EST Z Series related topics Use the manual that best fits your application In the event such a manual is not available contact us or your local EST Z Series dealer Smart Terminal EST240Z User s Manual Manual No CP UM 5145E This manual is packaged with the EST240Z body This manual should be read by those who produce units that use the Smart Terminal This manual contains safety precautions when using the Smart Terminal installation methods and descriptions for wiring the power supply and signal lines Smart Terminal EST555Z User s Manual Manual No CP UM 522
217. device This item is for entering the device for ep E Fara gg starting up the panel selector OK Cancel Panel Panel Change Switches Omnt Basic Panel Startup panels No 1 2 3 This item is for selecting up to three panels to be started up wif a 3 p 2 H p 3 P 2 H4 P p OK 3 68 Example Panel 5 in operation status 3 4 Panel Change Switches Startup device M000 call panel No 1 10 No 2 20 No 3 30 Panel 5 in operation status Panel 10 in operation Panel 20 status in operation status Panel 30 in operation status M000 ON Multi panel selector M000 M000 OFF B Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic Startup device Panel No 1 call panel Select multi panel overlay 221 Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Enter the panel No to be started up Enter the call coordinates of the panel to be started up IEEE Enter the panel No to be started up Enter the call coordinates of the panel to be started up Enter the panel No to be started up Enter the call coordinates of the panel to be started up Do B Supplementary Explanation The EST turns the startup device OFF at panel selection To start up two panels specify 0 as the panel No of No 3 Panels are started up in order from the No 1 spec
218. device OFF at panel selection This smart object is used to close multiple panels opened by overlay for example There is no change to operation of the background panel This is a transparent smart object and may be pasted anywhere 1 Handling Precautions Panels cannot be closed by this smart object when there is only one active panel When an unregistered panel No is entered the panel clear is ignored The EST however turns the startup device OFF Panels cannot be closed by this smart object when there is only one active panel This smart object does not function when an open pop up panel is active Execute setting of the startup device bits by one shot instructions One shot instructions may not function properly on circuits that set bits to ON at all times Ladder circuit example Rise condition SET M000 start device 3 79 3 4 Panel Change Switches 3 80 3 5 Lamps 3 5 Lamps Smart object name Bit type 2 state lamp Lamps Scaling Paste Scaling factor coordinates ay B Function Lamp graphics are switched according to the ON OFF state of the lamp device on the PLC B Configuration Basic Lamps x Cont Basic Graphic Text Type Type This item is used for selecting the Bit C Word lamp type State AEE This item is used for selecting the 2state 3 state operation function of the lamp smart object Lamp device Thi
219. device from 4 digit BCD 5 digit binary 4 digit BCD Set BCD data within the range 0 to 9999 5 digit binary Set signed binary data within the range 32768 to 32767 Graphic This sheet is for setting the graphic to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic 3 153 3 10 Data Setter Setter Omnt Basic Graphic Setter sw comm Interlock Decimal point 0 Text color Normal Alarm EU Decimal point This item is for entering the decimal point position Text color This item is for selecting the display text color of normal data and the display text color when an alarm Input limits occurs Lower val 4 Upper val p999 Input limits This item is for entering the upper and lower limit values of the data to be entered on the setter OK Text color Select the display text color of the numeric data Display color Select the display text color of normal data Alarm display color Select the display text color when the set data exceeds the upper and lower limit values of the entry restrictions Input limits Enter the range of the data to be input on the setter The upper and lower limit values are written to the numeric device when the set data exceeds the upper and lower limit values Switch Communications This sheet is for setting the operation of switch communications functions Interlock
220. display state Trend display settings are cleared when a panel is switched 1 Handling Precautions When the trend sampling device or sampling cycle has been changed all currently sampled trend data is cleared and sampling of trend data is started at the newly selected settings Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS B Panel Shapes Variable trend menu Panel No 1321 Remarks 320x240 Device selectionmenu 1331 EN EN ENS EM m c 5 20 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS Device selectionmenu 7 PanelNo 1326 1336 4 Remarks 280 x 200 5 21 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS 5 8 Recipe Menus Panel classification Recipe read panel 1340 to 1349 B Function This panel pops up and is displayed by touching the Select switch on a recipe smart object This panel is for selecting the recipe to be displayed on recipe smart objects Touching the Load key calls the data of the selected recipe No to the smart object At this time the panel closes and returns to the state before the menu panel was called Touching the Close key closes the panel and returns to the state before the menu panel was called B Example Cursor display field Recipe name field Scroll keys Load This buttons reads the data of the recipe No in the cursor display fiel
221. dix LIST OF SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS This appendix lists the graphics that are included in the smart object library Each smart object graphic has a unique number Refer to that number when pasting the smart object Transparent graphics are indicated as follows App 1 Appendix LIST OF SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS Switch and Lamp Graphics With smart objects for which the ON graphic is automatically selected when the OFF graphic is selected the graphic No of ON graphics is the No obtained by adding 500 to the OFF graphic No Note however that when the graphic No of an OFF graphic exceeds 500 the graphic No of ON graphics is the No obtained by subtracting 500 from the OFF graphic No 00005 00007 c p Do 08012 E L DE ro e 1 Ww Doc 7 b Gak mari bati 00017 L e em en ee mo ce c iy mo T T CH cm pcd m ee 00182 88185 00113 80114 4 D b ma rar k P DI 4 P m 1 m n Dum J uj x n2 E n2 A ro a Ce no c
222. dress under display At this time the panel does not close and the data write operation can be done continuously When the ESC key is touched the panel is closed The mode returns to the status before the menu panel call up 00000 adrs 199007 manane ronas mooet2 adrs The device is displayed data The data by 16 bits are displayed from the device under display in the adrs section The ON OFF data are written by touching the data section When the data part is reversed in red it shows the data as ON 1 ESC This key makes the panel close and the mode becomes the status before menu panel call up Scroll key The device address is scrolled The range of scrolling is within the upper and lower limit values of the device range AVI The device is scrolled by one word 5 35 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS B Panel Shapes Bit data modify panel MELSEC PLC Panel No 1410 Remarks 300 200 Bit data modify panel MELSEC PLC2 word device Panel No 1411 Remarks 300 x 200 5 36 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS 5 10 Recorder Menus Panel classification Trend digital panel 1375 B Function This panel is called up by touching the DISP switch trend digital panel call switch on the recorder smart object display Displays t
223. ds when a numeric value field is touched These smart objects display the PLC data as graphs or meters Graphs meters include bar graphs trend graphs broken line graphs and meters These smart objects display names of nameplates and messages These switch smart objects call up numeric keypads or keyboards These smart objects change the PLC data Data setters include smart objects for setting numeric values by the UPIDOWN keys bit setters and numeric keypads for entering passwords These smart objects display the state of the alarm contacts defined in the alarm monitor information Alarm monitors include aggregate displays and history displays These smart objects display the date time of the EST s internal clock These smart objects include smart objects for controlling the EST backlight and buzzer notifying the battery alarm and writing constants to the PLC when the panel is opened 1 3 Chapter 1 SMART OBJECT LIBRARY CONFIGURATION B instrumentation Smart Objects 1 4 PID controller Recipe Trend Graphic movement PLC monitor Recorder The instrumentation smart object library contains the following smart objects These smart objects enable monitoring of the SP and PV etc of the Yamatake temperature controllers These smart objects are for batch management and changing data to be set to the PLC or Yamatake temperature controllers These smart objects are for sampling and saving the
224. e 200 0 DMCIO CH3 SP Value C o cure azmat ome amp o omes amp ones anb oo nme repo cms x o ce cum curet o cures 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 NE NE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 azmat ome Edit amp Recipe selection panel Select the recipe to be displayed at the smart object and read that data to the smart object Control Program No 001 Control Program No 002 Control Program No 003 Control Program No 004 Control Program No 005 Control Program No 004 Smart objects that Control Program No 005 do not have editing functions also can be called according to the 4 34 smart object s setting Recipe data setting Call the numeric keypad panel and change the value of the recipe data currently displayed at the cursor Writing of recipe data Writing of recipe data when auto write smart objects are used is controlled on a PLC or other external device The following device controls are available on the external device Recipe No designated device Device that sets the write recipe No to external devices Write execution device Bit device that executes writing of recipe data Normal end notification Bit device that notifies that writing of recipe data ended normally Error end notificati
225. e data of the last device address of a PLC is modified make sure to have the lower limit value of the monitor range set as a multiple of 16 When the panel pasted with PLC monitor smart objects is started up by panel overlay the operation is as described below Do not execute the panel overlay startup for the panels pasted with PLC monitor smart objects When the pop up panels displayed by PLC monitor device change or the pop up panels of other smart objects are returned to the panels pasted with PLC monitor smart objects the PLC monitor device and address of PLC monitor smart objects might be changed to the initial status or the device might not be displayed This happens when the panels pasted with PLC monitor smart objects are restarted at panel movement Do not use this smart object for panels that are to be started up as pop up panels When the pop up panel is active a device modify panel and data modify panel cannot be called 4 103 4 5 PLC monitor MELSEC FX CPU Word device PLC monitor Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates di cd des di eq n B Function This is used in the case of Mitsubishi FX series CPU module to be connected Can monitor the CPU word device zone Can modify the PLC device data B Configuration Basic PLC kind monitor Select the PLC kind of PLC monitor Cmnt MELSEC FX CPU Basic Graphic Panel Min Max CPU k
226. e how to use the package how to install the software and how to operate the software Organization of This User s Manual This manual is organized as follows Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Appendix SMART OBJECT LIBRARY CONFIGURATION This chapter describes what a smart object is the configuration of the smart object library categories and lists of smart objects a list of panels already provided in the system and their functions Before using smart objects understand the concept of smart objects SMART OBJECT SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes the conventions used in the smart object specifications in chapters 3 4 and 5 and the main setting items of smart objects BASIC SMART OBJECTS This chapter describes the functions parameters and cautions when using each of the smart objects Use this chapter to reference the specifications of relevant smart objects when using smart objects INSTRUMENTATION SMART OBJECTS This chapter describes the functions parameters and cautions when using each of the instrumentation smart objects Use this chapter to reference the specifications of relevant smart objects when using instrumentation smart objects SYSTEM PANELS General purpose frequently used screens such as numeric keypads and keyboards are already provided in the system as system panels This chapter describes the functions of each system panel examples of how system panels are
227. e controlled on an external PLC by setting Interlock Recipe selection switch Recipe edit switch Write switch Touching this switch calls up the recipe selection panel On the recipe selection panel select the recipe No to be displayed on the smart object This switch is displayed when Edit Function has been selected in the recipe smart object settings Touching this switch calls up the recipe edit panel On the recipe edit panel recipes can be duplicated and deleted The editing enabled disabled state of the Edit switch can be controlled on an external PLC by setting Interlock This switch is displayed when Manual Write has been selected in the recipe smart object settings Touching this switch writes the data of the currently displayed recipe No to the currently specified external device The write enabled disabled state of the Write switch can be controlled on an external PLC by setting Write Interlock 4 2 Recipe B Recipe Selection Panel This panel is called by touching the Selection switch of a recipe smart object The data of the recipe No selected in the menu panel is displayed by smart object Cursor display field Recipe name field 2 Scroll keys Recipe name This item displays the name of the currently set recipe using up to 28 1 byte characters Scroll keys These keys scroll the data to be displayed Display the start final data La
228. e cursor and enter the duplicate source and destination by the Source and Dest keys At this time the confirmation message is displayed Determine the duplicate by either the OK or Cancel key The name of the duplicate source recipe is prefixed by 42 as the name of the duplicated recipe data Close This item returns to the call panel 4 32 4 2 Recipe Operation of Manual Write Smart Objects The following shows the operation of smart objects when Manual Write has been selected for recipe smart objects Data Name DMC10 1 CH1 DMC10 1 CH2 DMC10 2 CH1 00 DMC10 2 CH2 200 0 DMC10 2 CH3 SP Value SP Value Write Edit Recipe data write step 2 The data of the recipe No currently displayed by the smart object is written to the set device Confirmation of write Control Program 001 Data Name Execute data write Recipe data setting The recipe data to be displayed at the smart object is set at Set Recipe Data in AP Editor D Drci s 1082 AF dr Clear Data Control Program No 001 Recipe selection panel step 1 Select the recipe to be displayed at the smart object and read that data to the smart object Control Program No 002 Control Program No 003 Control Program No 004 Control Program No 005 Transmitting
229. e decimal point Select the numeric keypad panel with decimal point erry upper value Enter the upper imit value of the input data on the numeric Keypad lower value Enter the lower limit value of the input data on the numeric Keypad Swich communications Switch communications Select the switch communications function Interlock Bit state judgment Interlock action according to ON OFF state of bit device Range judgment Interlock action according to bit device range 3 102 3 6 Numeric Indicators B Supplementary Explanation When 2 word data is to be displayed the relationship between PLC devices and display is as follows Example Numeric device D100 data format Hex 2 words number of digits 8 D100 87654321 Doc Em EST display 87654321 The alarm display and numeric keypad call functions cannot be used simultaneously For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 For details on the numeric keypad panel see 5 2 Numeric Keypad page 5 4 o Handling Precautions Be sure to enter a multiple of 16 when entering the bit device to the numeric write device When displaying 2 word data do not enter the final address of the PLC as the numeric write device Enter the bit device on the PLC for Clear Notify devices Do not enter word devices such as registers Numeric keypad panel
230. e of Counter Value CN 0 to 9999 limit value 0 to 9999 N Counter Value lower Enter device range lower limit value of Counter Value CN limit value B Supplementary Explanation Under the monitor range of one screen of less than 48 words the monitor start address becomes the device address of the lower value when the monitor start address is modified with the device modify panel The device display of PLCs and monitor smart objects may be partially different from those of the manufacturer The following shows the cross reference of each device MELSEC Mitsubishi Corp Monitor smart object Data Register Link Register Spec Specific Register The detail of smart object settings is given in 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 4 90 4 5 PLC monitor o Handling Precautions Set the driver for monitor smart objects to be used for each channel with Setup information Basic setting gt Communications setting of the AP Editor For detail on the settings refer to Smart Terminal EST Z Series Application Preparation Manual No CP SP 1088E When the panel pasted with PLC monitor smart objects is started up by panel overlay the operation is as described below Do not execute the panel overlay startup for the panels pasted with PLC monitor smart objects When the pop up panels displayed by PLC monitor device change or the pop up panels of other smart objects are returned to the pane
231. e to be started up as pop up panels when panel call is selected The panel cannot be started up by touching the alarm name field The panel is not started up if the pop up panel is not registered when calling of the user panel is selected If the ON time of the alarm contacts is shorter than one alarm monitoring communications cycle alarm monitoring may not function correctly The display size of this smart object for each alarm is 40 x 40 dots For this reason the alarm name will be displayed using eight 1 byte characters unless the smart object is enlarged To display all 16 characters enlarge the characters by a scaling factor of two or more in the vertical or horizontal direction 3 162 B Function B Configuration Basic Smart object name Representative lamp alarm lamp Alarm monitor 3 11 Alarm Monitor Scaling Paste Scaling factor LO Ay This smart object switches the graphic display to ON graphic when one of the alarm monitor contacts registered to the alarm monitoring information of the application data turns ON The specified panel can be started up by touching a switch At this time the coordinates of the panel to be started up can be specified Alarm Monitor ix Basic Graphic Text Panel Type Alarm lamp Display alama info Type C Char clam info This item is for selecting the type of
232. ea is used with the area size fixed to 2048 words per channel Write method 69 This method is called ring fill If this is selected the data is overwritten from the oldest item when the size of the sampled data has exceeded the number of storage points This method is called linear fill If this is selected the data writing operation to the CF card is stopped when the size of the sampled data has exceeded the free space in the CF card Dedicated storage area This item displays the number of areas in the dedicated storage area used by the smart object Points This item is for setting the size of the data stored by a channel The setting range of the data size is 469 to 207800 when no CF card is used or 2358 to 19264074 when the data is saved in a CF card The setting cannot exceed the free space of the dedicated storage area Make sure to check the remaining free space with Details before making the setting If you want to save data in a CF card the setting cannot exceed the free space of the CF card Make sure to check the remaining free space with Details before making the setting Details This button calls up the shared memory usage status window Total time This item displays the retention period calculated based on the settings for Intervals Save to CF card and Points However if Save to CF card has been selected the displayed value is not correct 4 131 4 6 4 1
233. ear Notify devices Do not enter word devices such as registers Numeric keypad panels cannot be started up when a started up pop up panel is currently active When User has been selected at Graphic type numeric values cannot be displayed correctly if the graphic size is smaller than the display data size vertical 16 dots horizontal 8 dots x number of digits When a calculation error underflow overflow occurs in read calculation 0 is displayed as the numeric data of the smart object When a calculation error underflow overflow occurs in write calculation the data set on the numeric keypad is not written The notification device also is not set to ON Note however that the numeric keypad panel closes When zero suppress is selected the zero suppress display is not active if the upper digit of the number of display digits is not 0 Example Numeric device 0100 data format Hex 2 words number of digits 4 zero suppress display D100 0321h 0101 8760h 050 87600321 EST display om 3 111 3 6 Numeric Indicators 3 112 3 7 B Function B Configuration Basic Smart object name 3 7 Graphs Meters Graphs Meters Bar graph Graphs meters Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates LO J o O These smart objects display the data of the numeric device on the PLC in the form of a bar graph The display color of the bar ca
234. ecipe name display field calls up the keyboard panel Change the recipe name to the data entered on the keyboard panel Recipe edit Touching the Edit key calls up the recipe edit panel Recipes can be duplicated and deleted on this panel Design m Data title This item is for entering the display title of the data Name title This item is for entering the display title of the data name comment title This item is for entering the display of data comment Edit function O 2 This item is for selecting whether not to provide the Edit switch Data Name LER PER Data comment Select this item to attach a display function for the recipe data comment No This item is for selecting the display graphic of the recipe Fill color This item is for selecting the display color of the graphic Cursor This item is for selecting the display color of cursor display Comment This item is for selecting the display text color of the recipe data comment Edit function This item is for selecting whether or not to provide a recipe edit panel call function The Edit switch is not displayed for the smart object when the edit function is not used Data comment This item displays a comment for the recipe data currently indicated by the cursor using up to 36 1 byte characters 4 42 Number keys 4 2 Recipe This sheet is for specifying the call coordinates of numeric k
235. eck panel 1385 B Function This panel is called up by touching the CHECK switch CF card check panel call switch on the recorder smart object display Compares the contents of the inserted CF card with the contents of the application in the main unit and displays the result Touching the EXIT key will close the panel and the display will return to the state before the CF card check panel is called up B Example gt Equipment For details see CF Card Check Panel 4 124 5 41 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS B Panel Shapes CF card check panel Panel No 1385 Remarks 400 x 245 5 42 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS Panel classification Interval change panel 1390 B Function This panel is called up by touching the sampling cycle display area on the recorder smart object display for 5 seconds Youcan change the sampling cycle on this panel Touching the OK or CANCEL key will close the panel and the recorder smart object display will reappear B Example For details see Interval Change Panel page 4 123 Handling Precautions When the sampling cycle is changed all the sampled data in the recorder buffer is cleared and sampling of recorder data is started anew with the newly selected settings The recorder data in the CF card is not cleared B Panel Shapes nterval change panel Panel No 1390 Remarks 345 x 130 5 43 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS 5 44 Appen
236. ed Select the display color of the broken line Po 3 127 3 7 Graphs Meters Supplementary Explanation This smart object is transparent and has no graphic Frames are also not displayed for the pie chart Draw frames if necessary When X axis data is not to be fixed set the display coordinates as the X axis data When X axis data has been selected to Fixed the X axis data 15 displayed at the data interval set at X axis data Handling Precautions Enter the word device on the PLC as the numeric device Do not enter bit devices such as relays Enter the bit device on the PLC as the Update Hide device Do not enter the word devices such as registers When the PLC device has been set to the number of data items set data of the same format as the data format as the data to be set When the data format is Unsigned binary Signed binary set binary data within the range 1 to 128 When the data format is BCD set BCD data within the range 1 to 128 3 128 3 8 B Function B Configuration Basic Graphic Text Smart object name Registered string data Text display 3 8 Text Display Text Display Scaling Paste Scaling factor Lo Oo This smart device displays the string of the same registered string No as the value obtained by adding the offset value to the data of the string device on the PLC gt NM h Basic Graph
237. ed on the smart object and the graphic display color When Start is selected for alarm monitor the OFF Graphic setting is displayed while alarm monitoring is stopped and the ON Graphic setting is displayed while alarms are being monitored When Stop is selected for alarm monitor the ON Graphic setting is displayed while alarm monitoring is stopped and the OFF Graphic setting is displayed while alarms are being monitored 3 168 3 11 Alarm Monitor Text Set the display string at OFF ON to be displayed on the smart object and the display text color When Start is selected for alarm monitor the OFF text setting is displayed while alarm monitoring is stopped and the ON text setting is displayed while alarms are being monitored When Stop is selected for alarm monitor the ON text setting is displayed while alarm monitoring is stopped and the OFF text setting is displayed while alarms are being monitored Interlock Set the entry enabled conditions for the switch B Example During alarm monitoring Start Stop lw Monitoring in SSS Setting at ON is Setting at OFF is displayed displayed While alarm monitoring is stopped Start Stop SE e mm eee r Setting at OFF is Setting at ON is displayed displayed 3 169 3 11 Alarm Monitor B Smart Object Parameters Parameter type Selection setting item Basic Select smart object operation at switch input from start stop Po Hide device Enter the c
238. ed with the ten key become invalid This key makes the panel close and returns the mode to the status before menu panel call up 5 29 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS B Panel Shapes Bit device modify panel MELSEC A series Panel No 1403 Is EEE m POR m e lt gt Remarks 240 240 Bit Device modify panel MELSEC FX series Panel No 1404 3 n POE E Ee B JAE DEE GIVE m lt gt lt gt Remarks 240 x 240 5 30 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS Panel No 1405 Bit device modify panel MELSEC Q series e 12 AE a JA 12101 T e 8111 Eds Remarks Panel size 240 x 240 5 31 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS Panel classification Word data modify panel 1406 to 1409 B Function B Example 5 32 This panel pops up and is displayed by touching the data display section of the PLC monitor smart objects The data write is entered to the designated device address with the ten key When the ENT key is touched the selected data is written in the device address under display At this time the panel does not close and the data write operation can be done continuously When the ESC key is touched the data entered with the ten key become invalid and the panel closes The mode returns to the status before the menu panel call up
239. edevice the name of the sample device Alarm device Enter the communication channel the device address and the bit device the alarm information is selected B Supplementary Explanation When sampling of trend data exceeds the data size of the trend buffer data is deleted from the oldest data onwards and the latest data is stored When sampling of trend data has been stopped and sampling resumed 0 is set to the sampling data of the time during which sampling stopped and sampling of data is continued from the elapsed time 0 is set for times when sampling was not performed Stop Start The detail of smart object settings is given in 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 4 71 4 3 1 Handling Precautions Be sure to enter a multiple of 16 when entering the bit device to the trend sampling address Enter the bit device on the PLC as the sampling address for the event Do not enter word devices such as registers Enter 1 byte strings to the trend name at the EST240Z application preparation Clear device Enter the bit device on the PLC at Hide device Control device Do not enter word devices such as registers The Hide device is reset to OFF on the EST after the ON state of the bit is confirmed Execute Hide device by one shot instructions One shot instructions may not function properly on circuits that are executed at all times Lad
240. ee space in the CF card is less than the number of storage points in the CF card secured with ring write an error message appears on the screen of the EST main unit data sampling of recorder smart objects and trend smart objects is stopped and sampling of some data fails To recover from this error insert a new CF card or reformat the card If an application is downloaded including changes and specified panels recorder smart objects and trend smart objects start sampling anew When sampling is being conducted with a CF card store the data in the CF card before downloading if necessary When an application whose first 8 characters 8 single byte characters are the same as those of an existing application is downloaded when using the recorder the sampled data in the CF card is overwritten and the data so far can no longer be read This is because the first 8 characters of an application name are used to identify the data in the CF card When a CF card is used by a recorder a lot of access may be made to the CF card while operating the START and STOP buttons or during sampling control bit operation resulting in a delayed update of the display as if it freezes for a while Do not use this smart object for panels that are to be started up as pop up panels When the pop up panel is active a device modify panel trend digital panel trend display selection panel interval change panel and CF card check panel cannot be called Chapte
241. el 5 in operating status Panel 10 7 in operation status Panel dose Panel close switch ON SS SS OSS Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic Selec panel dues 77 Select when using switch communications Select when using interlocked operation 02 4 Design Select the graphic type from general rocker slide user IN the display graphic cli lt Font se Selec te ont size rom 8 and 16 dots FV alignment Sect veria alignment rom pene Sc Haignment alignment rom O Display sing Emerfedep yedo O Text color display text color mE communications Switch communications function Select the switch communications function S O eo Fiere action according lo ONIOFF stato of doves Range Interlockactionaccordingtobitdevicerange B Supplementary Explanation This smart object is used to close multiple panels opened by overlay for example There is no change to operation of the background panel For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions Active pop up panels cannot be closed by this smart object This smart object does not function when a started up pop up panel is currently active Panels cannot be closed by this smart object when there is only one active panel Wh
242. elect the CPU kind to monitor kind C MELSEO AG Link C MELSEC FX CPU Data kind MELSEC Q C Link Select the data kind of a device to display GPU kind General Monitor method Data kind C Bits Words Select the monitor method Tm Smart object size dot Monitor only With modify This item is for selecting the Smart object size Smart object size dot 320 x 160 640 x 440 EST comm CH Enter the EST communications EST comm gt channe Node Node 3 Interlock device Enter the station address of CPU module 0 fixed Interlock device Select this in the case of interlock function use CPU kind Select the CPU kind to monitor from the pull menu When the corresponding device is not found in the menu select the General Monitor method Monitor Monitor the device value The data can not be modified Modify The device values can be monitored and modified Smart object size dot Selects only at the EST555Z application preparation Selects the 320 x 160 pixels automatically on the EST240Z Interlock device The Interlock device can be selected when the terms are added at the time of data write If the Modify has not been selected with Monitor method the Interlock device can not be selected Enter a PLC bit device to control the interlock operation The data modify panel can be called up when the bit device is ON 4 96
243. em when using switch communications functions Interlock Select this item when using the interlock function Startup panels No 1 2 3 This item is for selecting up to three panels to be started up 3 4 Panel Change Switches Design Set the switch graphic and the display string Switch Communications Set the operation of switch communications functions Interlock Set the entry enabled conditions for the switch B Example Call panel No 1 10 No 2 20 No 3 30 Panel 5 in operation status Panel 5 closed Panel 10 in operation status Panel 20 in operation status Multi panel selector Panel 30 switch ON in operation status B Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic Select multi panel selector Select when using switch communications Select when using interlocked operation Design Select the graphic type from general user Select the display graphic Select the display color of the graphic Sete Vaigemen Select vericalalonmentitomiopienrbotom Select horizontal aignment rom Emerhedspaycoor _ Text color ss Enterthedispaytextcol No 1 coordinates Enterihecalcoodatesoffhepansiobesmredus No 2 coordinates Enter the call coordinates of the panel to be started up Eo No 3 coordinates Enterthe call coordinates ofthe panalo be stared up
244. en User is selected at Graphic type and registered graphics are used for the switch graphic the smart object size becomes the size of the graphic and the smart object cannot be scaled 3 45 3 4 Panel Change Switches Smart object name Panel change switch panel selector background change menu others Panel change switches Scaling Paste Scaling factor Goofdinales O Ay Fixed B Function This smart object starts up the specified panel and closes the startup source panel and other active panels t also starts up the specified background panel and closes the currently active background panel Each of the call coordinates of the panels to be started up can be specified B Configuration Basic Method Cat This item is for selecting the startup method of Basic SW comm Interlock panel selection panel change switch Method Type SW start C External start This item is for selecting the type of panel change switch operation others Type C Selector C Dedicated package Mode C Overlay Others This item is for selecting the operation mode of Pop up the smart object panel selector BG change Mode Panelselector BG change SW comm AUS Select this item when using switch communications functions al b Interlock Select this item when using the interlock sopa al function DE Call panel
245. en User is selected at Graphic type and registered graphics are used for the switch graphic the smart object size becomes the size of the graphic and the smart object cannot be scaled 3 51 3 4 Panel Change Switches Smart object name Panel change switch panel replace others Panel change switches Scaling Paste Scaling factor Oo O Fed B Function This smart object closes the startup source panel and starts up the specified panel Other active panels remain active Each of the call coordinates of the panels to be started up can be specified B Configuration Basic Method Cmnt 5i K This item is for selecting the startup method of Basic emm SW comm Interlock panel selection panel change switch Method Type SW start C External start This item is for selecting the type of panel change switch operation others Type Selector Special package Mode C Overlay Others This item is for selecting the operation mode Pop up of the smart object panel replace 2o perm SW comm Mr Select this item when using switch I I7 Interloc communications functions Interlock Gall panel 4 Select this item when using the interlock function RI RB IB Call panel OK Cancel Help This item is for entering the startup panel No and the panel call coordinates Design Set the switch graphic and the display
246. ence display alarm information display Number of occurrence display alarm information display message display Number of occurrence display alarm information display all display Alarm information clear Digital clock Analog clock Digital calendar External clock adjustment State control External backlight control External backlight ON External buzzer control External buzzer OFF Battery alarm notification Data write when opening the panel B List of Instrumentation Smart Objects Smart object type PID controller SDC10 SDC20 21 SDC30 31 0 40 standard remote SP type DMC10 2 channel model DMC10 4 channel model CB508 Recipe Manual write Manual write with message Manual write comment display Manual write all display Auto write Auto write with message Auto write comment display Auto write all display Trend 4 53 Graphic movement Rail movement PLC monitor MELSEC A C Link Word device MELSEC A C Link Bit device A CPU Word device MELSEC A CPU Bit device MELSEC FX CPU Word device MELSEC FX CPU Bit device MELSEC C Link Word device MELSEC C Link Bit device 2129 1 6 1 4 Chapter 1 SMART OBJECT LIBRARY CONFIGURATION List of Smart Object Sizes Applicable Models The basic size of smart objects and the smart objects usable in the EST Z Series are shown When smart object is pasted on a panel the smart object is pasted at its basic size
247. eric device Example Numeric keypad entry data 100 write calculation mode Add calculation device 110 100 10 is written to the numeric device Note however that when the write device has been set the data entered on the numeric keypad will be written not to the numeric device but to the word device on the PLC entered to the write device Write device Enter the word device when data entered on the numeric keypad panel is to be written to a PLC device other than a numeric device Notify device Set the bit device to ON at completion of writing of the data entered on the numeric keypad The EST does not turn the notification device OFF Turn the notification device OFF on the PLC after confirmation of the ON state of the bit Graphic This sheet is for selecting the border graphic for numeric displays When Alarm display has been selected sets the display graphic of the alarm state by graphic at ON When Numeric keypad has been selected sets the display graphic at numeric keypad call by graphic at ON 3 106 Value Calculation 3 6 Numeric Indicators View mode Omnt This item is for selecting the display Basic Graphic Value Num keypad mode of the numeric data View mode OFF numeric color This item is for selecting the display text color of the numeric data Color at ON This item is for selecting the display text color of an alarm state or a numeric keypad
248. eric keypad panel OK Cancel Help Use decimal point Call the numeric keypad panel having a decimal point entry function For details on the numeric keypad panel see 5 2 Numeric Keypad page 5 4 B Smart Object Parameters Basic Select when a SDC is connected via the CMC10B EE Enter the communications channel on the EST Enter the device address of the CMC10B Enter the device address of the SDC30 31 Design Graphic ype the graphics Filcolor Select the display color ofthe graphic PPV color Stet te numeri display olor tini SP color the numeri display color ofthe SP FM color Select te numeric value display color of MV J Nm Sename i Enierthe name Numeric Select when using a numeric keypad panel with decimal pointinput keypad Enter the call coordinates of the numeric keypad panel 4 8 4 1 PID controller Supplementary Explanation Changes to the SP value are executed on the current SP value of the SDC30 31 The current SP value refers to the SP value of the currently selected SP set For example when the SP value is changed while SP3 is selected SP3 will be rewritten The settable range of the SP value is the lower SP limit to the upper SP limit in the setup on the SDC30 31 When the SP lamp is operating the SP value in the lamp is displayed For details on smart object se
249. erned one is displayed as a dark blue bar If the ratio after set up exceeded 100 the bar is displayed in red Chapter 2 SMART OBJECT SPECIFICATIONS 1 Handling Precautions The tab page of CF card info is not displayed on the application programs for EST240Z 2 19 Chapter 3 3 1 Switches Smart object name Switch Switches B Function Scaling Scaling factor Lo O Ay BASIC SMART OBJECTS Paste This smart object manipulates switch devices in the PLC via the touch switches Switch graphics are changed according to the ON OFF state of the lamp device in the PLC Configuration Basic Switches Type ctf This item is for selecting switch operation Basic Graphic Text SW comm Interlock SW comm Typ Select this item when using switch PR communications functions C Alternate C Bit reset Interlock Select this item when using the interlock function SW comm Interloock Switch device Swtich dev This item is for entering the bit device that is to be manipulated when a switch is touched A Lamp device M This item is for entering the bit device to be monitored for switching graphic or text display Hide device This item is for entering the bit device used to hide the graphic or text display Type Select the operation of the switch when it is touched Momentary PLC switch device turns O
250. es Doing so may prevent correct display The graphic type selection is specified only for User The graphic type selection is not available for General Create all graphics at the same size The smart object size becomes the size of the graphic and the smart object cannot be scaled 3 87 3 5 Lamps Smart object name Word type 2 state lamp Lamps Scaling Paste Scaling factor Oo Ay Fixed Ay B Function Lamp graphics are switched according to the data range of the lamp device on the PLC B Configuration Basic Lamps x Crant Basic Graphic Text Range Type C Bit Word i This item is used for selecting the co lamp type 2 state 3 state C Multi State This item is used for selecting the operation function of the lamp smart Lamp dev object i Lamp device Z This item is for entering the word device to be monitored for switching graphic or text display Hide device This item is for entering the bit device for clearing the graphic or text display OK Cancel Help Graphic Set the graphic at OFF graphic at ON to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic Text Set the string at OFF ON to be displayed on the smart object and the display text color of the string 3 88 3 5 Lamps Range Example Set the data range of ON OFF display for the lamp device Lamps x
251. es of the Y axis are displayed Touching the upper lower limit value changeover switch SCALE switch causes the switches to display at the upper lower limit value display area Touching the switches at upper lower limit value display area causes the numeric keypad panel enabling to change the upper lower limit values The trend name PV and trend event are displayed on screen by touching the Help switch The Help switch is an alternate switch Touching the Help switch again clears the display This function is only for the time of the EST240Z application preparation This is the name of the trend data per channel set on the smart object The trend name is displayed by touching the Help switch at the time of the EST240Z application preparation The trend name is displayed in the same text color as the trend graph This item controls the trend display on each channel Display contents are process variable and trend name This is displayed only at the time of the EST555Z application preparation The PV process variable for each channel is displayed as numeric value data The PV is displayed by touching the Help switch at the time of the EST240Z application preparation The PV is displayed at the same text color as the trend graph 4 49 4 3 Trend Trend Menu Panel 4 50 Event name Scroll keys Range display Upper lower limit Trend display This is the name of the event data per channel set on the smart
252. essages page 5 14 User Select this item when the alarm details are to be created freely The user panel is called up as a pop up panel For the user panels to be called up continuous panel Nos are set as the call panels for each alarm display starting from the panel No set by panel entry Be sure to paste a Pop up return smart object on user panels that are called up 3 11 Alarm Monitor B Example Number of displays 4 start alarm No 100 panel call selected panel type user panel No 300 EST display Alarm monitor information Alam No Alam Bit AL100 010 OFF AL100 AL101 AL102 AL103 AL101 011 When the When the When the When the switch is switch is switch is Switch is touched touched touched touched Panel No 300 Panel No 301 Panel No 302 Panel No 303 pop up pop up pop up pop up B Smart Object Parameters Parameter type Selection setting item Basic Displays Selectthe number of display points for the lamp omea Start alarm No Enter the start alarm No to be displayed as an alarm Number of display points 8 1 to 505 Number of display points 5 1 to 508 Number of display points 4 1 to 509 Number of display points 1 1 to 512 Call pani Seetwhentepanelcalundonusd OoOO o o Graphic OFF Graphic SelecithedisplaygraphicwhenheslmisOFF Color when OFF Select the display color of he graphic when the alarmis OFF Bimkwhen
253. est alarm The initial display shows the latest record To create an alarm history Record History must be selected at Set Alarms in AP Editor If the number of records in the alarm history exceeds 400 when Ring is set as the history recording method in the alarm history settings the records are overwritten in order from the oldest record onwards When Fixed is set as the history recording method sampling of the alarm history is stopped when the number of records in the alarm history reaches 400 To resume sampling in this case Clear alarm information must be executed For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 The alarm monitor contacts the alarm names and the messages are registered at in AP Editor For details see the Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Application Preparation Manual No CP SP 1088E Handling Precautions e f the ON time of the alarm contacts is shorter than one alarm monitoring communications cycle alarm monitoring may not function correctly When the number of occurred alarms exceeds 65535 counting beyond 65535 is not performed User cannot be selected as the graphic type selection Past history data still remained while the EST power is OFF or after the application data is downloaded To clear the history data touch the alarm information clear switch 3 179 3 11 Alarm Monitor Smart object name N
254. et end time Sampling of recorder data is stopped when the end time is exceeded Example When the set start time is 13 hr 00 min and the set end time is 15 hr 00 min the sampling period is from 13 hr 00 min 00 sec up to 15 hr 00 min 59 sec 4 135 4 6 Handling Precautions f the set start time is later than the set end time sampling starts one minute after the set start time and ends one second before the set end time For example if the set start time is 17 hr 00 min and the set end time is 10 hr 00 min the sampling period is from 17 hr 01 min 00 sec up to 9 hr 59 min 59 sec f you set the start time later than the set end time set the start time one minute earlier than the desired start time 4 136 4 6 Example Sampling data Number of channels 16 Channel Alarm 1 Alarm 2 D000 000 100 number of stores 800 000 0001 1 M161 number of recorder buffers 24 D002 M002 M102 D003 M003 M103 0004 004 e Interval 5s Dans 5 Recorder configuration 0006 06 save to CF card Ring 0007 M007 D008 D009 D010 D011 D012 D013 D014 D015 1 0000 Numeric data No 2 gt 000 100 ON OFF data No 3 D001 Numer
255. executed on the value entered on the numeric keypad panel and the result of that calculation is written to the write device Completion of data writing can be notified to the PLC When entry of data on the numeric keypad ends the numeric keypad closes and the state before the numeric keypad was called is returned to The coordinates of the numeric keypad to call can be specified 3 104 B Configuration Basic Numeric Indicators x Crant Basic Graphic Value Cale pfa keypad 4 Type Basic 4 cale Num keypad SW comm Interlock Format Unsigedbinary v 7 Numeric dev 2 White dev Notify dev 7 Hide dev Digits n Decimal point 0 3 6 Numeric Indicators Type This item is for selecting the type of smart object for numeric display Alarm display This item enables display of numeric data alarms SW comm This item can be set when numeric keypad use has been selected Select this item to use the switch communications functions Numeric keypad This item calls the numeric keypad panel so that data can be set Interlock This item can be set when numeric keypad use has been selected Select this item to use the switch interlock functions Format This item is for selecting the data format of the numeric device Numeric device This item is for entering the word device on the PLC to be displayed Write device This item can be set when numeric
256. eypads and keyboards Crant Numeric keypad Basic Design Num keypad Control This item is for entering the call coordinates of the numeric keypad Numerical keypad setup pan el Coors jio fo Miren Use decimal point Select this item when a numeric keypad panel with decimal point key is Keyboard setup used zb e Keyboard setup Control T This item is for entering the call coordinates of the keyboard panel OK Cancel Help his sheet is for entering the PLC device that is to execute writing of recipe data Recipe No device This item is for entering the recipe No Basic Desien Num keypad Control to write Write execution device Recipe No dev NR00000 This item is for entering the PLC device from which wiring of recipe Write execute dev lotify Success otify Error data is to start Gri 4 0000 2 wood 4 0002 zl Notify Success This item is for turning ON the entered 4 E device when writing of recipe data has ended normally Notify Error a 4 This item is for turning ON the entered device when an error occurs in writing of recipe data OK Recipe No device Enter the PLC device to which the recipe No is to be written is stored Write execution device Writing of the recipe data of the recipe No current set to the recipe No
257. f recorder data is resumed after it was stopped the operation starts after making the data continuous by filling 0 to the sampling data of the time during which the operation was kept stopped 0 is set for times when sampling was not performed For details of smart object configuration refer to 2 2 Main Configuration Stop Start Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Using a CF card If you want to keep data longer instead of storing data in the dedicated storage area you can use a CF card The guideline of the period for one CF card of 64 Mbytes to keep data is about 417 days with 16 channels and a cycle of 30 seconds Recorder smart object 9000 Data Dedicated storage area CF card Data i e Stored File 4 139 4 6 Ring write Data of the number of storage points specified in the recorder smart object dialog box is saved in a CF card When sampled data exceeds the specified number of storage points the oldest data item 1s overwritten with the latest one Dedicated storage area CF card Available area Data Got ee CET a MEE File File Lo Store
258. f the CF card in words Type A recorder is provided which uses a CF card Write Displays the data writing method to the CF cards containing in all the recorder smart objects set in the application If ring write has been set 9 15 displayed If linear write has been set gt is displayed If both ring write and linear write have been set gt lt 15 displayed 1 Handling Precautions When writing data to a CF card it is not allowed to use both ring write and linear write in the same application program Used size Words Displays the size of the CF card used in the recorder in words Note When linear write has been set this item displays the guideline for the storage period When both ring write and linear write have been set error contents will be displayed Free Displays the size of the unused areas in the CF card in words Usage rate Displays the proportion of the areas being used in the CF card a percentage basis Usage after modification to Recorder config Reference 2 18 Displays the usage status of the dedicated storage area after the configuration of the concerned smart object takes effect Free Displays the size words of the unused areas in the CF card after the configuration of the concerned smart object takes effect Usage rate Displays the percentage of the areas being used in the CF card in the form of a green bar The area used by the smart objects other than the conc
259. from the pull menu When the corresponding device is not found in the menu select the General Monitor method Monitor Monitor the device value The data can not be modified Modify The device values can be monitored and modified Smart object size dot Selects only at the EST555Z application preparation Selects the 320 x 160 pixels automatically on the EST240Z Interlock device The Interlock device can be selected when the terms are added at the time of data write If the Modify has not been selected with Monitor method the Interlock device can not be selected Enter a PLC bit device to control the interlock operation The data modify panel can be called up when the bit device is ON 4 100 4 5 PLC monitor E ri Graphic Set the graphic to display with smart objects and sets the display color Panel Designate the call up coordinates of the device modify and the data modify panels PLC monitor E op Device modify panel 1403 0 x al Enter the call up coordinates of data modify panel Data modif y panel um Al m Enter the call up coordinates of data modify panel Maximum Minimum values Enter the device range to monitor PLC monitor Initialize Initialize the maximum and the minimum values Maximum Enter the maximu
260. g device of the trend and sampling cycle can be changed on the EST Trends and events can be selected from up to 40 sampling devices for each trend smart object Trend Buffers Dedicated storage area Dedicated storage area Dedicated storage area Dedicated storage area Dedicated storage area Dedicated storage area Buffer area trend buffer for storing data sampled by the trend smart object is secured to dedicated storage area on the EST A trend smart object secures the trend buffer to be used by that object to dedicated storage area to sample and display data according to the number of channels to be sampled and the number of stores per channel Dedicated storage area Trend smart object1 2 channels number of stores 5000 Recipe buffer 1 Dedicated storage area 2 unused Trend smart object2 1 channel number of stores 1000 li Dedicated storage area 3 unused Dedicated storage area 4 unused 3 dedicated storage areas are used as the trend buffer Dedicated storage area 5 unused Handling Precautions The dedicated storage area is the memory area backed up by battery on the EST unit The EST240Z has 5 units of the size 20480 word areas The EST555Z has 64 units of the variable length size areas Total area size is 208000 words The dedicated storage area is used for recipe smart object trend smart object dedicated package If all of the dedicated storage area
261. g when the alarmis OFF J ON string Enterthe display string when the on O O o ON color Enter the display text color when the alamis BinkwhenON Select to cause blinking when the adamson JO O O Coordinates Enter the coordinates ofthe SCS Supplementary Explanation Select OFF graphic for the graphic selection OFF graphic is paired with ON graphic and is automatically selected For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 The alarm monitor contacts the alarm names and the messages are registered at Set Alarms in AP Editor For details see the Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Application Preparation Manual No CP SP 1088E Handling Precautions When an unregistered panel No is entered when panel call is selected the panel is not started up When an opened pop up panel is active when panel call is selected panels cannot be started by this smart object If the ON time of the alarm contacts is shorter than one alarm monitoring communications cycle alarm monitoring may not function correctly 3 165 3 11 Alarm Monitor Smart object name Alarm buzzer Alarm monitor Scaling Paste Scalingfactor Textsize coordinates B Function This smart object buzzers the alarm when one of the alarm monitor contacts registered to the alarm monitoring information of the applica
262. ge 64 characters Max ALARM Displays the No of the currently occurring alarm currently registered to the history information ALARM NAME Displays the name of the alarm currently registered to the history information of the currently occurring alarm using up to 16 1 byte characters MESSAGE Displays the alarm messages currently registered to the history information of the alarm No selected at the cursor display using up to 64 1 byte characters Scrolls the cursor display one cursor at a time Al Scrolls the display alarms 5 alarms at a time Example 2 EST555Z aibi display Error in carrier system No 1 Error in carrier system 2 Assembly part supply halt Assembly part B supply halt Failure in part A inspection Failure in part B inspection Automatic solder furnace temperature is too high Automatic solder furnace temperature is too low Alarm Message 64 charcters Max ALM ID Displays the No of the currently occurring alarm currently registered to the history information MESSAGE Displays the alarm message currently registered to the history information of the currently occurring alarm ID using up to 64 1 byte characters Scrolls the display alarm one cursor at a time Al Scrolls the display alarms 15 alarms at a time 3 172 3 11 Alarm Monitor Example 3 EST555Z Display all MESSAGE System Error 1 Error in carrier system
263. ge switch panel to front others External panel selector External panel overlay External open pop up External special package selector External multi panel selector others External multi panel overlay others External background panel selector others External background panel close others External panel selector background change menu others External panel selector background close others External panel close others Bit type 2 state lamp Bit type 3 state lamp Bit type multi value state lamp Word type 2 state lamp Word type 3 state lamp Word type multi value state lamp Numeric indicators Basic 3 97 00000000000 Graphs meters Bar graph Meter Slide meter Pie chart Line graph Text display Registered string data Variable string data Message call Keyboard call Numeric keypad Data setter Password numeric keypad UP DOWN setter Bit pattern setter 1 5 Chapter 1 SMART OBJECT LIBRARY CONFIGURATION Smart object type Smart object name Alarm monitor Aggregation display alarm lamp Representative lamp alarm lamp Alarm buzzer Monitor start stop Summary display alarm information display Summary display alarm information display message display Summary display alarm information display all display History display alarm information display History display alarm information display name display History display alarm information display message display Number of occurr
264. h communications functions Call panel 20713 4 Al dl Interlock Select this item when using the interlock function qm sp gl OK Call panel This item is for entering the startup panel No and the call coordinates of the panel Design Set the switch graphic and the display string Switch Communications Set the operation of switch communications functions Interlock Set the entry enabled conditions for the switch 3 31 3 4 Panel Change Switches B Example Call panel 10 Panel 1 in operation status Panel 1 closed Pop up startup Panel 10 Panel 5 in operation status switch ON Panel 5 open pop up dosed Pop up return switch ON Return _ _ _ Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic Select the pop up action from pop up return Enter the panel No to be started up Enter the call coordinates of the panel to be started up Select when using switch communications Select when using interlocked operation 00000 Dosen npe Seectihe graphie ype from generatus Goer the display color of he gie Sc Font sae Select he font size rom Sand 16 gots V a gmeni Secvemasignmenrtomipkenemomom Halgrment Select horizontal algnmentrom iefleenternght Text color
265. hannel and change the minimum and maximum values of the display Sampled data can be cleared by setting the Hide device to ON The alarm is displayed by sampling the bit data specified by the alarm device of alarm setting at the sampling cycle and by blinking the PV process variable of each channel 4 53 4 3 Trend B Configuration 4 54 Type Basic This item is for selecting the type of trend smart object Trend x Smart object size dot This item is for selecting the Smart ud object size Basic Trend View Control Alarm Alarm monitoring Type This item is for sampling the alarm Trend Variable trend information Smart object size dot CH Total 640 x 255 640 455 This item is for entering the number of Iv j CH Total A Intervals 30 Data fmt Unsigned binary sec With evel EVE channels to be displayed as a trend This item is for configuration trend display to the 2 axis format Enter the number of channels to be displayed on the two axes 2 axes p 2 Intervals This item is for entering the data Clear dev lt Trend memory configuration Total time 5h20m00s Points words sampling cycle With events This item is for setting sampling and display functions for the event data Enter the number of event channels to fi 6 i Trend buffers Details L 2 axes E
266. he alarm No display by 100 alarms B Smart Object Parameters Basic Smart object size dot Select the smart object size 0220001 Select the display item Design SMetgmea Select the rapi Select the graphic display color i ALM ID Select the display text color of the alarm No 0022 OE ALARM Select the display text color of the alarm name COUNT Select the display text color for the number of alarm occurrences 3 183 3 11 Alarm Monitor B Supplementary Explanation e To create an alarm history Record History must be selected at Set Alarms in AP Editor For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 The alarm monitor contacts the alarm names and the messages are registered at Set Alarms in AP Editor For details see th amp mart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Application Preparation Manual No CP SP 1088E Handling Precautions f the ON time of the alarm contacts is shorter than one alarm monitoring communications cycle alarm monitoring may not function correctly When the number of occurred alarms exceeds 65535 counting beyond 65535 is not performed User cannot be selected as the graphic type selection Past history data still remained while the EST power is OFF or after the application data is downloaded To clear the history data touch the alarm information clear switch 3 184
267. he bit device to be sampled and saved Enter the bit device whose events are to be sampled Name Enter the event data name for each channel using up to 16 1 byte alphanumerics The event name of the EST240Z is displayed by touching the Help switch for the trend smart object Color Select the display text color of the event name Line color Select the display color of each event data Trends Cmnt Basic Trend Event 1 ES B er val Upper val 99 sss 4 Lower val 0 5 0 Decimal point lke bm p aphic No 50026 Al Color Up Low ce No al f 2 Graphical No Decimal point OK This item is for selecting the display graphic of the trend Menu No This item is for entering the menu panel to call up and the call coordinates Upper lower value This item is for entering the upper lower limit values of the Y axis Decimal point This item is for entering the decimal point position of the upper lower limit values on the Y axis Color This item is for selecting the display color of the trend graphic Upper low color This item is for selecting the numeric display color of the upper lower limit values 4 67 4 3 Trend Control Omnt Basic Trend Event View Control Selection Sampling mode Control by device This item is for entering the start device for data sampling C
268. he names current values units and the alarm information of the preset channels Touching the EXIT key will close the panel and the display will return to the state before the trend digital panel is called up B Example 2 Cooling 1b IGN Cooling 2a 77 Cooling 2b m NT 212222222122522125221542122111 1241221522 111421111222221 212212 222431222 1 For details see Trend Digital Panel page 4 122 5 37 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS B Panel Shapes Trend digital panel Panel No 1375 Remarks 640 x 455 5 38 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS Panel classification Trend display selsction panel 1380 B Function This panel is called up by touching the SELECT switch trend display selection panel call switch on the recorder smart object display Select the channel to be displayed as a trend graph on the recorder smart object display Up to 8 channels can be selected Touching the OK or CANCEL key will close the panel and the display will return to the state before the trend display selection panel is called up B Example TERETI Merete AAA A A t RARA A MaA A AA DADA A a a aaa a oe m H mE 3 TL For details see Trend Display Selection Panel page 4 123 5 39 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS B Panel Shapes Trend display selsction panel Panel No 1380 Remarks 450 x 240 5 40 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS Panel classification CF card ch
269. hic to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic Text Set the string to be displayed on the smart object and the display text color Panel Set the clock adjustment panel to be used and its call coordinates Switch Communications Set the operation of switch communications functions B Example PLC write Write device D000 notify device M000 1999 09 20 11 22 16 Startup of clock adjustment device Clock adjustment panel pop up display Adjustment of date time 1999 10 18 10 35 10 startup of call source panel PLC data Writing of date time data M000 ON 3 12 3 2 Function Switches B Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic PLC write Select when writing the clock setting to the PLC Write device Enter the communications channel device address and bit function with device PLC write is selected Notify device Enter the communications channel device address and bit When function with device PLC write is selected FSWcomm Select whan using switch communications __ Graphic Cor SeecthefontszefomBandi8dos M Valgnmen Select vertical alignment rom topicenterfbotiom Halignment 3969 horizontal alignment lefvceneriom Sig Text er Setectthe display textealor
270. his smart object starts up a maximum of three panels simultaneously It also closes the startup source panel and other active panels Each of the call coordinates of the panels to be started up can be specified B Configuration Basic Panel Change Switches Method Omnt _ This item is for selecting the startup Basic Panel method of panel selection external Method Type C SW start 6 External start This item is for selecting the type of TE panel change switch operation Selector Special package others C Overlay c Mode Pop up This item is for selecting the operation mode of the smart object multi panel Mode Multi panel selector E selector Startup dev Startup device 2 This item is for entering the PLC m pz pz Bl device for starting up the panel y p rs selector OK Panel Panel Change Switches Omnt Basic Panel not fl p 3b 4 P Startup panels No 1 2 3 This item is for selecting up to three panels to be started up OK Cancel 3 66 Example 3 4 Panel Change Switches Startup device M000 call panel No 1 10 No 2 20 No 3 30 Panel 5 in operation status Panel 5 close Panel 20 in operation Panel 10 status in operation status Panel 30 in operation status 000 Multi panel selector M000
271. ht to left Switch devices may be the same as lamp devices For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions Enter the bit device on the PLC for the Switch device Lamp device and Hide device Do not enter word devices such as registers 3 157 3 10 Data Setter 3 158 3 11 B Function B Configuration Basic Graphic Text Smart object name Aggregation lamp alarm lamp Alarm monitor Alarm Monitor Scaling Scaling factor Lo ol Ay Ay 3 11 Alarm Monitor Paste This smart object displays the alarm name of the contact registered to the alarm monitoring information of the application data The display graphic is switched when an alarm occurs The number of displays can be selected from 8 5 4 1 so that continuous alarm names can be displayed Touching the alarm name displays the alarm message panel or the pop up panel created by the user and stops the startup source panel and other active panels The coordinates of the panel to be called up can be specified Alarm Monitor x Cmnt Basic Graphis Text Panel Type C Alarm lamp C Display alarm info Slarm buzzer Clear alarm info C Monitor Lamp type 6 Aggregation C Representative Displays 8 point Start alarm No 1 m Pop up wi zi OK Type This item is for selecting the t
272. iable length size areas Total area size is 208000 words More than one dedicated storage area for one smart object are used as a trend buffer on the smart object The dedicated storage area is used for recipe smart object trend smart object dedicated package If all of the dedicated storage areas have been used the recipe smart object cannot be used If a short sampling cycle is set data sometimes cannot be sampled at the set sampling cycle in some applications If data was not sampled at the set sampling cycle the EST sets following value to the sampling data EST model BCD 5 Data format At this time internal special contact SM9068 0 is set to ON During debugging of applications determine the sampling cycle by monitoring SM9068 0 on a switch or lamp smart object Special contact SM9068 0 is a latch operated contact and can be reset by switch smart objects 4 141 4 6 4 142 If the Paint element is used for the marker graphic of recorder and multiple markers overlap each other some part will be not painted When sampled data is stored in a CF card 2048 words per channel of the dedicated storage area are used to store the data temporarily Make sure to format CF cards on the system screen on the EST While reading data from writing data to a CF card never turn off the power nor take out the CF card Failure to observe this may result in damage to the CF card If the actual fr
273. ic Text Ree string data C Message call Type This item is for selecting the type of string display smart object C Var string data String device ben nod This item is for entering the word device for switching the string display Offset MO Onset M Srne dey 4 This item is for entering the offset Offset value to be added to the string device v Lamp dev IV Clear dev Clear device This item is for entering the bit device OK Cancel Help for clearing the graphic or text display Lamp device This item is for entering the bit device to be monitored for switching graphic or text color display Set the border graphic to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic When a lamp device is used the graphic setting becomes OFF Graphic and ON Graphic The string setting is not available as the registered string specified by the string device is displayed Set the text color to be displayed When a lamp device is used the string setting becomes String at OFF and String at ON 3 129 3 8 Text Display B Example String device D100 offset 10 Registered strin EST displa PLC device When D100 100 g ng isplay 100 10 offset 110 No 110 12345 When D100 200 No 210 ABCD 200 10 offset 210 B Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic Enter the communications channel devi
274. ic Set the graphic to display with smart objects and set the display color Panel Designate the call up coordinates of the device modify and the data modify panels PLC monitor Device modify panel Enter the call up coordinates of data modify panel Data modify panel Enter the call up coordinates of data modify panel Maximum Minimum values Enter the device range to monitor PLC monitor Initialize Initialize the maximum and the minimum values Maximum Enter the maximum value of the address range to monitor Minimum Enter the minimum value of the address range to monitor Initialize This sets the maximum and the minimum values of each device address of devices selected with the CPU kind 4 117 4 5 PLC monitor B Smart Object Parameters Basic E Node Graphic Color Panel D D BIN Maximum Minimum values limit value Input Relay lower limit value Output Relay upper limit value Output Relay lower limit value Inner Relay upper limit value Inner Relay lower limit value Latch Relay upper limit value L limit value Spec Relay upper limit value Spec Relay lower limit value Step Relay upper limit value Step Relay lower limit value Link Relay upper limit value Link Relay lower limit value Annunciator upper limit value Annunciator lower limit va
275. ic data No 4 001 101 ON OFF data No 5 D002 Numeric data No 6 002 102 ON OFF data No 7 D003 Numeric data No 8 003 103 ON OFF data Pag No 9 D004 Numeric data Data of up to 8 channels is selected No 10 a M004 ON OFF data and displayed as trend graphs No 11 D005 Numeric data No 12 005 ON OFF data 13 0006 Numeric data No 14 gt M006 ON OFF data Data is periodically saved No 15 D007 Numeric data in the CF card No 16 007 ON OFF data No 17 0008 Numeric data No 18 Mm 0009 Numeric data No 19 4 0010 Numeric data No 20 gt 0011 Numeric data No 21 4 D012 Numeric data No 22 Sa D013 Numeric data No 23 0014 Numeric data CF card 0015 64 N No 24 gt 015 Numeric data No 64 The recorder smart object uses 24 areas among the 64 dedicated storage areas The remaining areas can be used by other recorder recipe trend smart objects and dedicated packages Note If the recorder smart object uses the whole space of the CF card the sampling points for each data are about 800 000 and the sampling period is about 46 days 4 137 4 6 Smart Object Parameters When displaying by two axes enter the number of channels on the A axis axes Points words Enter the sample data size per channel 469 to 207800 2358 to 19264074 Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit dev
276. ic keypad called up state This sheet is for executing calculation processing on data entered on the numeric keypad panel Cont Basic Graphic Text Num keypad SW comm 141 Write calc data Calc mode Add i Write calculation data Calculation processing preset at Write calculation data is performed on the data entered on the numeric keypad panel and the result of that calculation is written to the write device Write calculation data This setting is enabled when With calculation has been selected The calculation processing set at Write calculation data is executed on the data entered on the numeric keypad panel The data after calculation processing is written to the write device Example Write device D100 numeric keypad entry data 100 calculation mode add calculation device 10 The data to be written to D100 becomes 100 10 110 Numeric keypad 3 9 Keyboard Call This sheet is for setting the numeric keypad panel when the numeric keypad is used Cont Basic Graphic Text Cale keypad sw comm 14 gt comse ib 2 Numeric keypad Setup Coordinates This item is for entering the call coordinates of the numeric keypad Use decimal point panel Limits Use decimal point Upper Po A Select this item when a numeric E keypad panel with decimal point entry Lower is to be used Upper lower This item is for entering the dat
277. ice CH Total B Enter the number of channels on the B axis When 2 axes is selected 1 to4 Channel View Select the channelto be displayed at start up 1 to 8 Number of channel which can be turned ON Enter the communications channel the device address and the word device characters characters Select the display color of the trend graph for each channel Po Alarm Enter the communications channels the device address and the bit device Enter the communications channels the device address and the bit device View Enter the display upper limit value of the trend data Enter the display lower limit value of the trend data Enter the display decimal point position of the trend data Select the display graphic Select the display color of the graphic Select the display text color of the upper lower limit values Marker Select the timing for displaying the marker Select the graphic type of the general user No Select the display graphic e the display color of the graphic Control Control by device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Enter the sampling start time of the trend data Enter the sampling end time of the trend data 4 138 Supplementary Explanation When sampled recorder data has exceeded the data size of the recorder buffer 4 6 Recorder data is deleted from the oldest data onwards to store the latest data When sampling o
278. ice Coordmaiss Enter tne coordinates of the numere Keypad panei Use decimal point Select the numeric Keypad panel with decimal point entry __ upper value Enter the upper imit value ofthe input data on the numeric Keypad ver vave ___ over iva of ie eta on the rumene Keyes Swich communications Switch communications Select the switch communications function CO Interlock Bitstate state Interlock action according to ON OFF state of bit device 00000 Interlock action according to bit device range 3 110 3 6 Numeric Indicators B Supplementary Explanation When 2 word data is to be displayed the relationship between PLC devices and display is as follows Example Numeric device D100 data format Hex 2 words number of digits D100 EST display 87654321 Alarm display and numeric keypad functions cannot be used simultaneously Set write calculation data only when numeric keypad use is selected For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 For details on the numeric keypad panel see 5 2 Numeric Keypad page 5 4 o Handling Precautions Be sure to enter a multiple of 16 when entering the bit device to the numeric write device When displaying 2 word data do not enter the final address of the PLC as the numeric write device Enter the bit device on the PLC for Cl
279. idis NN the bit device SW comm Select when using switch communications mx Interlock Select when using interlocked operation 00000 Grape Tye Select he graphic from generalluser OFF Graphic Selectthe graphic displayedat OFFO O O Color when OFF Select the display color of the OFF Graphic Font size Selectthe font size from 8 and 16 dots V alignment Select vertical alignment from top centerbottom 2 H alignment Select horizontal alignment from left center right OFF string EnterthediplaytextatOFF OFF color Enter the display text color when OFF o ON color Select the display text color when the lamp is ON When lamp devices are used Switch communications Switch communications function Select the switch communications function interlock Bitstate according to ON OFF state of bit device Range Interlock action according to bit device range 3 24 3 3 Word Type Switches B Supplementary Explanation Select OFF Graphic for the graphic selection when a lamp device is used OFF Graphic is paired with ON Graphic and is automatically selected Note however that OFF Graphic ON Graphic can be freely selected from registered graphics when User has been selected at Graphic type When Add has been set at Format the upper lower value setting becomes the upper value setting and the lower va
280. ified panel Accordingly the last started up panel is displayed on top when the panel display areas are overlapping This is a transparent smart object and may be pasted anywhere There is no change to operation of the background panel o Handling Precautions When an unregistered panel No is entered the panel is not started up The EST however turns the startup device OFF Panels cannot be started up when a started up pop up panel is currently active Execute setting of the startup device bits by one shot instructions One shot instructions may not function properly on circuits that set bits to ON at all times Ladder circuit example Rise condition SET M000 Start device 3 69 3 4 Panel Change Switches Smart object name External background panel selector others Panel change switches B Function Scaling cd dq qme Paste Text size coordinates This smart object forcibly selects the background panel from the PLC t also starts up the specified panel as the background panel and closes the currently active background panel Each of the call coordinates of the panels to be started up can be specified B Configuration Basic Panel Change Switches x Basic Method C SW start External start Type C Selector Dedicated package Overlay Others Pop up Mode BG Spe 4 Call panel al
281. imit value 1000 lower limit value 500 Data of D100 500 to 1000 1001 onwards State 1 display State 2 display State 3 display 3 92 3 5 Lamps B Smart Object Parameters Basic Lampdevice Enter the communications channel the device address and the word device Grapho Graphic ype Select tne graphic type according to generalipping OFF Graphic Select the display graphic when the ampis OFF Color when OFF Select the display color ofthe graphic when the lampi OFF JO Blink when OFF SelecitocauseblkngwhenthelampisOFF ON Graphic Select the display graphic when the ampisON Color when ON Selectie display color ofthe graphic whenhelampisON Blink when ON SeledttocausebikngwhenthelampisON Fontsze SelecitefonsvefomBandT6dos Vaignment Select vertical alignment rom top centerbotom Halgnmen Select horizontal alignment OFF string EnerhedepaytextwhenthelmpisOFE Color when OFF Enterthe display text color whenhelampis OFF Bink when OFF Select to cause blinking when the tamp is OFF ON string SeeciedspsytetwhentelampsON CoorwhenON Select the display text color when the amps ON Blink when ON Select to cause blinking whenthelampisON OOO O Range Data format Select the data format of
282. imit value of Counter coil CC ue 1104 0 to 127 At write monitor selection 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 010 FFFF 010 FFFF 0 to 8191 0 to 8191 0 to 8191 0 to 8191 0 to 2047 0 to 2047 0 to 8191 0 to 8191 0 to 1FFF 0 to 1FFF 0 to 2047 0 to 2047 0 to 2047 0 to 2047 0 to 2047 0 to 2047 0 to 2047 0 to 2047 Ot 0 2047 0 to 2047 0 to 1023 0 to 1023 0 to 1023 0 to 1023 4 5 PLC monitor Supplementary Explanation The monitor start address becomes the lower limit value address when monitor start address is changed by the device modify panel under the monitor range of one screen with less than 32 words The device displays between the PLC and monitor smart object are partially different from those of the manufacturer The following shows the cross reference of each device Spec Specific Relay Mxxxx Step Relay Sxxxx ink Relay Bxxxx Annunciator Fxxxx Timer Contact Txxxx Timer Coil Accum Timer Contact STxxxx Cronk Cro ink Relay Accum Timer Col STe Counter Contat Cow Q gt Q Q The detail of smart object settings is given in 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions e the driver for monitor smart objects to be used for each channel with Setup information Basic setting gt Communications setting of the AP Editor For detail on the
283. in applications where human safety may be put at risk Never use this product as a safety switch or as an emergency stop switch Special care should be taken to implement a fail safe and or redundant design which takes into account the possibility of operational delay unit damage and malfunction of this product REQUEST Ensure that this User s Manual is handed over to the user before the product is used Copying or duplicating this User s Manual in part or in whole is forbid den The information and specifications in this User s Manual are sub ject to change without notice Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this User s Manual is free from inaccuracies and omissions If you should find any inaccuracies or omissions please contact Yamatake Corporation In no event is Yamatake Corporation liable to anyone for any indirect special or consequential damages as a result of using this product 2001 Yamatake Corporation ALL RIGHTS RESERVED The smart terminal amp is a registered trademark of Yamatake Corporation Other company names and product names listed in this manual are registered trademarks or trademarks of respective companies N SAFETY PRECAUTIONS About Icons Safety precautions are for ensuring safe and correct use of this product and for preventing injury to the operator and other people or damage to property You must observe these safety precautions The safety precautions described in this
284. inary Hex BCD Enter the communications channel the device address and the word device Enter the minimum value of the display data imm Fiemme ah Needle Select the display colorofthe needle T_T Wem Select the neede wicth from 1 dov dotsiS dots Select the general graphic oo Color Select the display coloro the graphic B Supplementary Explanation When the display format is upwards rightwards the meter point moves in the clockwise direction When the display format is downwards leftwards the meter point moves in the counterclockwise direction Handling Precautions Be sure to enter a multiple of 16 when entering the bit device to the numeric device 3 119 3 7 Graphs Meters Smart object name Slide meter Graphs meters Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize Coordinates I a B Function This smart object displays the data of the numeric device on the PLC at the graphic display position The graphic to be displayed can be changed when the data of the numeric device exceeds the preset upper lower limit values The graphic display can be cleared by setting the Hide device to ON B Configuration Basic Type This item is for selecting the type of smart object for he graph meter Graphs Meters ix Basic Slide meter Alarm Ty
285. ind kind Select the CPU kind to monitor C MELSEG G Link MELSEG FX CPU Data kind C MELSEC A CPU MELSEC Q C Link Select the data kind of a device to display GPU kind General Data kind Monitor method C Bits Words Select the monitor method Monitor method Smart object size dot Monitor only With modify This item is for selecting the Smart j ize Smart object size dot 320 160 C 640 x 440 EST comm CH Enter the EST communications EST comm CH channel Node Enter the station address of the CPU module 0 fixed Interlock device Select this in the case of interlock function use CPU kind Select the CPU kind to monitor from the pull menu When the corresponding device is not found in the menu select the General Monitor method Monitor Monitor the device value The data can not be modified 1 Modify The device values can be monitored and modified Smart object size dot Selects only at the EST555Z application preparation Selects the 320 x 160 pixels automatically on the EST240Z Interlock device The Interlock device can be selected when the terms are added at the time of data write If the Modify has not been selected with Monitor method the Interlock device can not be selected Enter a PLC bit device to control the interlock operation The data modify panel can be called up when the bit device is ON 4 104 4 5 PLC monit
286. ines Rectangles Circles and ellipses Circle and ellipse arcs Strings Paint Background color Bitmaps JPEG image data Smart objects Screens panels can be designed by using smart objects in a similar manner to the way conventional switches and meters are installed and wired in an instrumentation panel Graphics and software including switch functions operations and communications functions are encapsulated in smart objects This greatly reduces the number of design man hours Application data Configuration information Panel data Configuration information Recipe settings Straight line rectangle cirde strings Gateway settings bitmaps JPEG smart objects etc Other configuration information etc Alarm setting Registered graphic Registered strings Alarm monitor information blocks 1 to 8 1 1 Chapter 1 SMART OBJECT LIBRARY CONFIGURATION B Smart Object Library The smart object library is like a catalog that shows the list of the smart objects When creating panel data create a still image first in the panel and then select the desired parts from the smart object library and paste them in the panel The smart object library is divided into a basic smart object library and an instrumentation smart object library according to your specific requirements Basic smart object library These smart objects are required for creating basic operation panels Select Sma
287. ing Seno display graphic ofsiate i SSS Stato Gol Seededspaygmshecdorosue i Siate No Selectne rancors __ State 2 Color Selectthedisplaygraphiccolorofstate2 o Blink in state 2 Select to cause blinking in state 2 Blinking with eee 1 Select the display graphic of state 3 State 3 Color Select the display graphic color of state 3 Blink in state 3 Select to cause blinking in state 3 Blinking NENNEN graphic 1 Fowsze Vaignment Selectvericalaigementiomopenerbotom Haigmen Select horizontal Siate i sting Enterthe display textoisaei_ o State 1 text color Seecthedepaytexicoorofs T___ State 2 sing Enter the display fextofstete State 2 text color Select the display tex Blink in state 2 Select to cause blinking in state 2 Blinking of text color State 3 string Enter the display text of state 3 Pe State 3 text color Select the display text color of state 3 Blink in state 3 Select to cause blinking in state 3 Blinking of text color 3 84 3 5 Lamps B Supplementary Explanation The order of priority of lamp devices is State 1 State 2 State 3 When a device bit having a higher priority is ON the bit state of lower priority bits is ignored Blinking of graphics is performed alternately between blinking of the state 1 gr
288. ing the backlight Control device EST backlight ON OFF is controlled by the ON OFF setting of the control device Control device Backlight state OFF 0 Light ON ON 1 Light OFF B Example Control device M000 EST EST 000 ON Lit 000 OFF 3 195 3 13 State Control B Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic Control device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device B Supplementary Explanation When this smart object is pasted to the panel used as background panel the backlight can be controlled on the PLC at all times The backlight lights goes out when the state of the control device changes At this time the auto backlight OFF function and the screen saver start up function set at Setting Information Basic Settings in AP Editor are ignored This is a transparent smart object and may be pasted anywhere Handling Precautions Ensure ON OFF times on the control device of at least twice the maximum EST scan time A backlight that has been turned OFF with this smart object is not turned ON by touching the screen 3 196 Smart object name 3 13 State Control External backlight ON State contro B Function Scaling Paste Scaling factor Ary Enter the bit device on the PLC as the Control device Do not enter word devices such as registers This smart object forcibly turns the
289. ing the panel No to panel device on the PLC that specified panel is started up The startup source panel and other active panels stay active When a panel is selected the EST resets the panel device to 0 Startup device Enter the bit device on the PLC that is to be used as the panel selector trigger when Bit has been selected at Mode 3 59 3 4 Panel Change Switches Panel This sheet is for setting the word device on the PLC to which panel data is stored and the call coordinates of the panel when Word is selected at Mode Panel Change Switches Basic Panel Panel device This is for entering the panel selector device when Word type is selected at Mode X axis p X axis This item is for entering the X coordinates of Y axis 0 the call panel Y axis This item is for entering the Y coordinates of the call panel OK Example Bittype Startup device 010 call panel 10 call coordinates 20 20 Panel 5 in operation status Panel 5 close Call coordinates 20 20 Panel 10 startup Panel overlay M010 010 OFF Word type Panel device D100 call coordinates 40 40 Panel 5 in operation status Panel 5 in operation status Call coordinates 40 40 Panel 10 startup Panel overlay 0100 10 D100 0 3 60 3 4 Panel Change Switches B Smart Object Parameters Selection
290. ions channel device address and word device Enter the message panel No to be called up 00221 Enter the coordinates of the message panel 21 Enter the communications channel the device address and the bitdevice Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Graphic Select the graphic type from general user Select the graphic displayed at OFF Select the display color of the OFF Graphic Fontso Selecringioni size rom Sand id TT alignment Select verical afgnmeni fom T_T H alignment Select horizontal alignment OFF string Enter the display textat OFF OFF color Enterthe display text color when OFF 3 139 3 8 Text Display B Supplementary Explanation For details on the message panel see 5 5 Messages page 5 12 Set a binary data value within the range 1 to 1999 to the string data For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions Be sure to enter a multiple of 16 when entering the bit device to the character string data device Enter the word device on the PLC as the lamp Hide device Do not enter word devices such as registers When an unregistered registered string No is set the string is not displayed on the message panel When an opened pop up panel is active message panels cannot be called up by this panel 3 140 3 9 Keyboard Call
291. is item is for entering the number of data words to be written Lamp device This item is for entering the bit device to be monitored for switching graphic and text display Hide device This item is for entering the bit device for clearing the graphic and text display Graphic Set the switch graphic to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic When a lamp device is used the graphic setting becomes OFF Graphic and ON Graphic Text Set the string to be displayed on the smart object and the display text color When a lamp device is used the string setting becomes OFF string and ON string Switch Communications Set the operation of switch communications functions Interlock Set the entry enabled conditions for the switch 3 17 3 3 Word Type Switches B Example Write source device D000 write destination device D100 number of words 3 PLC device Source device Switch input Data of 3 words from 0002 0000 is read and data of D003 the 3 words starting from Aaa D100 is written D100 Destination device D101 D102 D103 B Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Remarks Basic Source device Enter the communications channel the device address and the word device Destination device Enter the communications channel the device address and the word device Number of words Enter the number of write words 1 to 64 Lamp device Enter the commu
292. isplay color ofthe O Font see Select he fot siz rom Band eds AS CI I Taa redana A Sun communications Switch communications function Select the switch communications function eio Interlock action according to ONOFF Range Ci Interlock action according to bit device range Supplementary Explanation e Screens other than the newly started up panel stay displayed however their operations are suspended e There is no change to operation of the background panel e For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 1 Handling Precautions When an unregistered panel No is entered the panel is not opened even if the switch is touched When an opened pop up panel is active other panels cannot be started by this smart object When User is selected at Graphic type and registered graphics are used for the switch graphic the smart object size becomes the size of the graphic and the smart object cannot be scaled 3 28 Smart object name Panel change switch panel overlay Panel change switches Scaling B Function Scaling factor Lo O Ay 3 4 Panel Change Switches Paste e This smart object starts up the specified panel The startup source panel and other active panels remain active The call coordinates of the panel to be starte
293. ith panel numbers 1 2 and 3 all the panel operations are suspended except the background panel Panels cannot be started up when a started up pop up panel is currently active Execute setting of the startup device bits by one shot instructions One shot instructions may not function properly on circuits that set bits to ON at all times Ladder circuit example Rise condition SET M000 1 Start device 3 67 3 4 Panel Change Switches Smart object name External multi panel overlay others Panel change switches Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates A B Function This smart object forcibly selects panels from the PLC This smart object starts up a maximum of three panels simultaneously It also closes the startup source panel and other active panels Each of the call coordinates of the panels to be started up can be specified B Configuration Basic Panel Change Switches Method This item is for selecting the startup Basic Panel method of panel selection external Method start C SW start External start Type ype This item is for selecting the type of C Selector Special package panel change switch operation Overlay others C Pop up Mode Mode Multi panel overlay x This item is for selecting the operation mode of the smart object multi panel Startup dev overlay Po Po ge Startup
294. ition of the SP and PV values Select this item when the SDC10 is to be connected to the EST via the CMC10B EST CMC10B RS 485 5 lead 4 1 PID controller Design Numeric keypad This sheet is for setting the graphic to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic Set the display text color and name of the PV and SP values to be displayed on the smart object PID controller x Cont Basic Design Numeric keypad Use decimal point e cw p zb dl Use decimal point Select this item when a numeric keypad panel with decimal point entry is to be used Upperval 32767 Coordinates Lowerval 32768 This item is for entering the call coordinates of the numeric keypad panel Upper lower value This item is for entering the data entry upper lower limit values on the numeric keypad panel OK Cancel Help Use decimal point Call the numeric keypad panel having a decimal point entry function For details on the numeric keypad panel see 5 2 Numeric Keypad page 5 4 Upper lower value Enter the valid range of the data when the data is set on the numeric keypad panel When the data entered on the numeric keypad panel exceeds the valid range when the ENT key is touched an error occurs and the data is not written to SDC10 At this time a short high pitched alarm buzzers and the set data is cleared to 0 Data entry r
295. its 16 words This displays the PLC device address under a monitor display The device modify panel is called up when the address display section is touched The device modify panel changes the display head device address The data of the PLC device address under display is shown with a word unit This gives the multiple point display at the position from 0 to F When the multiple points are red the bits are ON and when the points are black the bits are OFF If the data display section is touched the data modify panel is called up to change the data The specified device data can be written in the data modify panel No data writing can be made unless the Modify of the PLC monitor smart object is specified Also the interlock setting will be possible at this time Device modify panel 4 84 This is the panel to change the display head device address of the PLC monitor smart object The change panel can be called up by touching the adrs display section of the PLC monitor smart object Device address Device kind 4 5 PLC monitor Device address This displays the entered device address Device type This selects the device category to monitor The device category to be displayed will be different depending on a PLC type selected with the CPU kind of the PLC monitor smart objects Ten keys and A to F Inputs the head address to be displayed with the monitor smart objects The input range of the address wil
296. its turning ON Handling Precautions Only General can be selected for the graphic type User cannot be selected 3 188 3 12 Clocks Smart object name Analog clock Clock Scaling Paste Scalingfactor Textsize coordinates O Jntegermulipe interlocked B Function This smart object displays the EST internal clock in analog format B Configuration Basic GE This item is for selecting the type of clock smart object Basic TRES Second hand C Digital clock C Digital calendar Select this item when the second a k hand is displayed on the time display Type This item is for selecting the graphic type to be displayed univ No 2 This item is for selecting the graphic to No 59001 al be displayed Color Color This item is for selecting the display Long Short Seconds color of the graphic Long Short Seconds cancel This item is for selecting the color of the hands B Example 10 hours 08 minutes 42 seconds B Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic Display method Select from 24hr display 12hr display Select general i N Select the LongShot Selectthe color of the ngishort hands Seconds Selectthe color ofthe secondhand Second hand Select when displaying the second hand nthe tme display 3 189
297. jects be scaled using any scaling factor There are two text size options Interlocked and Fixed Smart objects that do not have text or numeric values are indicated by Interlocked The size of text or numeric values is also scaled when the smart object 1 scaled Fixed The size of text or numeric values is fixed when the smart object is scaled Any Smart objects can be pasted to any position This item describes the functions of the smart object This item describes the setting unique to the smart object This item provides examples of how the smart object operates using certain settings as an example Chapter 2 SMART OBJECT SPECIFICATIONS B Smart Object Parameters Smart object parameters are setting items that are required for operating the smart object For example parameters include the device address of the PLC to which a switch is assigned and the text that is to be displayed on the switch Smart object parameters are set when pasting smart objects This section describes the contents of each smart object parameter and its setting ranges Basic Graphic SW comm Interlock Type Momentary C Bit set C Alternate Bit reset SW comm Interloock Swtich dev m Smart object parameters PLC device settings Setting of the PLC device EST PLC communications PLC device communications address address ch
298. jects page 2 5 1 Handling Precautions User cannot be selected at Graphic type 3 15 3 2 Function Switches 3 16 3 3 Word Type Switches 3 3 Word Type Switches Smart object name Word data write Word type switches Scaling Paste Scaling factor Lo ol O Ay Fixed B Function This smart object writes up to 64 words of data to the write destination device starting from the device specified as the write source device by touching a switch These smart objects can also be used between devices having different EST connection channels and communications address for example when IMEC data is written to the PLC or PLC data is written to the IMEC Switch graphics are changed according to the ON OFF state of the lamp device on the PLC The display of the graphic and text can be cleared by setting the Hide device to ON B Configuration Basic This item is for selecting the type of function switch smart object Basic Graphic Text SW comm Interlock SW comm S Select this item when using switch communications Word write C Const write functions SW comm Interlock Interlock Select this item when using the interlock function Source device This item is for entering the write source device Destination device This item is for entering the write destination device of the write data Number of words Th
299. keypad use has been selected This item is for entering the word device when data entered on the numeric keypad is written to a device different from the numeric device Notify device This item can be set when numeric keypad use has been selected This item is for entering the bit device to be set turned ON at completion of writing of the data entered on the numeric keypad Hide device This item is for entering the bit device for clearing the graphic or text display Digits This item is for entering the number of display digits Decimal point This item is for entering the decimal point position Alarm display When this checkbox is marked the numeric display smart object has an alarm display function Numeric keypad When this checkbox is marked the numeric display smart object has a numeric keypad call function When numeric keypad use is selected the SW comm interlock use write device and notification device settings can be used 3 105 3 6 Numeric Indicators Numeric device Enter the word device of the PLC on which data to be displayed is currently stored When numeric keypad use has been selected the data entered on the numeric keypad is written to the word device of the PLC entered to the numeric device Calculation processing preset at Write calculation data on the Calculation tab is executed on the value entered on the numeric keypad panel and the result of that calculation is written to the num
300. l be the range as set with the Min Max values of the PLC monitor objects ENT key The PLC monitor smart objects display the inputted device address as the display head device address ESC key Cancels the change and makes the mode return return to the call up panel 4 85 4 5 PLC monitor Data modify panel At the word device monitor 4 86 This is the panel to change the word data of PLC devices There are two panels of a hexadecimal input and a coded binary input in the data modify panel at the word device monitor The input format of data modify panel to be called up will be changed by the selection mode HEX BIN of the data display format of PLC monitor smart objects The data modify hexadecimal panel for the word device monitor is hereunder described The section Chapter 5 SYSTE PANELS should be referred on the data modify for the word device monitor Device address Data Device address This displays the device address to change the data Scroll key Scrolls the device address The scrolling range will be the range as set by the Min Max values of PLC monitor smart objects A 9 Scrolls the address by word Data The data entered by the ten key are displayed by the hexadecimal numerals Ten key and A to F Inputs the setup data ENT key The device data under display on the device address are changed ESC key Makes the mode return to the call up panel 4 5 PLC monitor
301. l on the EST Smart object size dot 2 220 x 200 EST A der E CMC10B device address Pa This item is for entering the device SPREA address of the CMC10B Decimal port 4 Controller device address This is for entering the device cox peso address of the SDC20 21 via CMC10B Select this item when the SDC20 21 is to be connected to the EST via the CMC10B EST CMC10B RS 485 3 lead RS 485 5 lead DC20 21 SDC20 21 0 20 21 4 1 PID controller Design This sheet is for setting the graphic to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic Set the display text color and name of the PV SP and MV values to be displayed on the smart object Numeric keypad Crant Basic Design Numeric keypad Use decimal point Coords 0 0 57 d H Use decimal point Select this item when a numeric keypad panel with decimal point entry is to be used Coordinates This item is for entering the call coordinates of the numeric keypad panel OK Cancel Help Use decimal point Call the numeric keypad panel having a decimal point entry function For details on the numeric keypad panel see 5 2 Numeric Keypad page 5 4 B Smart Object Parameters Basic Select when a SDC is connected via the C
302. ldest latest history record 3 176 3 11 Alarm Monitor Example 2 EST555Z Name display No ALARM NAME 001 System Error 2 03 15 B Assembly Error 4 10 20 01 08 02 10 35 20 Assembly Error B 11 30 01 03 03 1200 40 InspectionError amp 1220 9 2 InspectionError B 18 10 Temperature Error 1400 Temperature Error 15 45 KAA ALARM NAME Displays the No of the alarm that occurred by the alarm name currently registered to the history information OCCURRED Displays the date time year month day hours minutes seconds that the alarm occurred RECOVERD Displays the date time year month day hours minutes seconds that the alarm was recovered MESSAGE Displays the alarm messages registered to the history information of the alarm No selected by cursor display using up to 64 1 byte characters A Each touch of these switches scrolls the cursor display by one history at a time Al Each touch of these switches scrolls the history display by 15 histories at a time 7 The keys scroll the display to the oldest latest history record 3 177 3 11 Alarm Monitor B Example 3 EST555Z Message display No WESSAGE 8 8 RECOVERED Error in carrier system No 1 Error in carrier system No 2 Assembly part supply halt 20 40 09 02 10 35 29 Alarm recovery text Assembly part B supply halt 8 08 1240240 color
303. ling Precautions Enter the bit device on the PLC for the Switch Lamp Hide device Do not enter word devices such as registers however that OFF Graphic ON Graphic can be freely selected when User has Su pplementary 2 1 Chapter 2 SMART OBJECT SPECIFICATIONS Name and Properties of Smart Objects Smart object name Type Scaling Text size Paste coordinates B Function B Configuration B Examples 2 2 This shows the name of the smart object This shows the group to which the smart object belongs This shows whether or not smart objects can be scaled enlarged reduced and scaling limits when pasting the smart objects Enlarge When smart object can be enlarged this is indicated by O The indication is blank when the smart object cannot be enlarged Reduce When a smart object can be reduced this is indicated by Q The indication is blank when the smart object cannot be reduced Reshape When a smart object can be scaled in the horizontal and vertical directions independently this is indicated by This indication is blank when the smart object cannot be transformed Scaling factor The scaling factor indicates the limits to which a smart object can be scaled Smart objects that cannot be scaled are indicated by a Integer multiple Scaling of smart objects is limited to enlargement in integer multiples Smart ob
304. ls pasted with PLC monitor smart objects the PLC monitor device and address of PLC monitor smart objects might be changed to the initial status or the device might not be displayed This happens when the panels pasted with PLC monitor smart objects are restarted at panel movement Do not use this smart object for panels that are to be started up as pop up panels When the pop up panel is active a device modify panel and data modify panel cannot be called 4 91 4 5 PLC monitor B Function B Configuration Basic 4 92 Smart object name MELSEC A C Link Bit device PLC monitor Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates qc This is used in the case of Mitsubish series CPU being connected via the computer link module Can monitor the CPU bit device zone Can change the PLC device data PLC king Select the PLC kind of PLC monitor MELSEC A C Link PLG monitor Omnt Basic Graphic Panel Min Max CPU king r MELSEC A C Link Select the CPU kind to monitor C MELSEC ACPU MELSEC Q O Link Data king Select the data kind of a device to GPU kind General display ese rm Monitor method zh Select the monitor method posit Gites Smart object size dot C Monitor only This item is for selecting the Smart object size EST comm CH Enter the EST communi
305. lue Timer contact upper limit value Timer contact lower limit value Timer coil upper limit value Timer coil lower limit value Accum Timer contact imit value Timer contact upper gt 3 lower limit va Accum Time upper Accum Time lower limit val Counter contact imit value Counter contact upper lower limit Counter coil upper limit va Counter coil lower limit val 4 118 CPU kind Monitor method Smart object size dot ST communications channel nterlock device evice modify pane Data modify panel HEX ata modify panel Input Relay upper atch Relay lower r coil imit value r coil Select CPU kind Select from monitor write monitor Select the smart object size Enter EST communications channel Enter station address of computer link module Select at interlock use Select display graphic Select graphic color Enter call up coordinates of device modify panel Enter call up coordinates of data modify panel Hexadecimal i S i S i B i B Enter call up coordinates of data modify panel Decimal Enter address range lower limit value of Timer contact TS Y Y M L S S B B F F TS Enter address range upper limit va Enter address range lower limit value of Timer coil TC ue of Timer coil TC i CS S CC ue ue Enter address range lower l
306. lue Calc Num keypad sw comm Inte gt Coords p p i Num keypad Use decimal point amp Input limits Upper val 9999 Lower val 0 OK Help Use decimal point Coordinates This item is for entering the call coordinates of the numeric keypad panel Use decimal point Select this item when a numeric keypad panel with decimal point entry is to be used Upper lower value This item is for entering the data entry upper lower limit values on the numeric keypad panel Call the numeric keypad panel having a decimal point entry function For details on the numeric keypad panel see 5 2 Numeric Keypad page 5 4 Upper value Lower value Enter the valid range of the data when the data is set on the numeric keypad panel When the data entered on the numeric keypad panel exceeds the valid range when the ENT key is touched an error occurs a short high pitched alarm buzzers and the set data 1 cleared to 0 Data entry range Upper limit value 2 Setting data gt Lower limit value 3 108 3 6 Numeric Indicators Switch Communications This sheet is for setting the operation of switch communications functions Interlock This sheet is for setting the entry enabled conditions for the switch B Example Alarm display use numeric device D100 number of digits 4 decimal point position 1 calculation mode add calcul
307. lue setting is not available When Sub has been set the upper lower value setting becomes the lower value setting and the lower value setting is not available For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions Enter the bit device on the PLC for Lamp Hide device Do not enter word devices such as registers Be sure to enter a multiple of 16 when entering the bit device on the numeric devices When the data of the numeric device is not BCD data in calculations on BCD format data the upper lower limit setting values are written to the numeric device When registered graphic is used for the switch graphic the OFF graphic and ON graphic to be displayed must be created at the same size When registered graphic is used for the switch graphic the smart object size becomes the size of the graphic and the smart object cannot be scaled 3 25 3 3 Word Switches 3 26 3 4 Panel Change Switches 3 4 Panel Change Switches Smart object name Panel change switch panel selector Panel change switches Scaling Paste Scaling factor morales Lo ol O Ay Fixed Any B Function This smart object opens the specified panel and closes the startup source panel and closes other active panels when a switch is touched The call coordinates of the panel to be started up can be specified Configuration
308. m is for setting the PLC device that is to be targeted for operation of the smart object Setting of the PLC device EST PLC communications PLC device communications address address channel EST communications channel Specify which channel from channels 0 to 4 to use for executing communications The communications settings in the basic settings in the setup information must be set in AP Editor When only one target communications channel is set the channel can be omitted and the device set as follows 1 M100 PLC communications PLC device address address For details on the EST communications channel refer to the Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Communications Connection Manual No CP SP 1090E 2 6 Chapter 2 SMART OBJECT SPECIFICATIONS B Graphic This sheet is for selecting graphics to be displayed on the smart object Type This item is for selecting the type of graphic to be displayed on the smart object Common 4 This is for setting graphic at ON to the CINCH same graphic as graphic at OFF No 5 H a OFF Graphic Color This item is for setting the display graphic at the OFF state Blink when OFF The fill color of the graphic can also be set here ON Graphic ON Graphic This item is for setting the display graphic at the ON state Color The ON graphic setting is not available for l uso smart objects that do not have a graphic switching
309. m value of the address range to monitor Minimum Enter the minimum value of the address range to monitor Initialize This sets the maximum and the minimum values of each device address of devices selected with the CPU kind 4 101 4 5 PLC monitor B Smart Object Parameters Basic Select CPU kind Monitor method Select from monitor write monitor Smart object size dot Select the smart object size o 1 EST communications channel Enter EST communications channel Node Enter station address of computer link module Interlock device Select at interlock use Graphic Select display graphic Color Select graphic color Panel Device modify panel Enter call up coordinates of device modify panel Data modify panel Enter call up coordinates of data modify panel Hexadecimal Data modify panel Enter call up coordinates of data modify panel Decimal BIN Maximum Minimum Input Relay upper Enter address range upper limit value of Input Relay X 0 to 7FF values limit value Input Relay lower Enter address range lower limit value of Input Relay X 0 to 7FF limit value M X imi X Output Relay upper Enter address range upper limit value of Output Relay Y 0 to 7FF limit value Output Relay lower Enter address range lower limit value of Output Relay Y 0 to 7FF limit value Inner Relay upper Enter address range upper limit value of Inner Relay M
310. mart object for panels that are to be started up as pop up panels When the pop up panel is active a numeric keypad panel cannot be called 4 24 4 2 Recipe 4 2 Recipe A recipe is a collection of various setting data for an external device Up to 200 recipes can be set The maximum number of recipes changes according to the number of configured data items The specified data will be written to the external device when triggered by an external device or manual operation EST internal recipe buffer External device PLC temperature contoroller etc Recipe No 1 Recipe No 2 Recipe No n Writing of secified p EJ recipe B Recipe Operations There are two ways to write data of recipes manual write and auto write By manual write writing is started by manual operation on EST and by auto write writing is started by controlling the bits on the PLC With both methods writing is executed after the recipe to write is selected Recipe operation functions are set on recipe smart objects EST Scheduled number of production units Recipe buffer unit data etc Recipe 1 4 The data of the specified recipe No is written according to the setting of the recipe data settings 1 Recipe n is changed by the number of data items saved by a recipe 4 25 4 2 Recipe B Recipe Write Methods 4 26 e Manual write Auto write Group The data of the recipe
311. mart objects and then pressing the OK Switch If the message appeared change the number of storage points and set the displayed No of trend buffers to a value other than O If the actual free space in the CF card is less than the number of storage points in the CF card secured with ring write an error message appears on the screen of the EST main unit data sampling of recorder smart objects and trend smart objects is stopped and sampling of some data fails To recover from this error insert a new CF card or reformat the card If an application is downloaded including changes and specified panels recorder smart objects and trend smart objects start sampling anew When sampling is being conducted with a CF card store the data in the CF card before downloading if necessary Do not use this smart object for panels that are to be started up as pop up panels When the pop up panel is active a numeric keypad panel and trend menu panel cannot be called 4 73 4 3 4 74 4 4 B Function B Configuration Basic Graphic Smart object name Graphic Movement Rail movement Graphic Movement Scaling LO jc Ay 4 4 Graphic Movement Paste Text size coordinates This smart object displays graphics at positions to be displayed at graphic positions Rails have 12 point positions divided into 11 sections Up to four graphics can be displaye
312. ment smart objects is fixed to equal intervals and cannot be changed Create registered graphics at a size of 64 x 64 dots or smaller registered graphics may not be displayed properly if they are created at a larger size If graphic position data to be displayed on rail overlaps the position data having the larger graphic position No will be displayed on top Smart object name Free movement Graphic Movement B Function Scaling Scalingfactor Textsize coordinates Ay 4 4 Graphic Movement Paste This smart object displays specified graphics at the coordinates set by graphic positions X and Y on the PLC The display angle of the graphic can be changed by selecting Display angle setting The graphic to be displayed can be changed on the PLC Registered graphics defined by the user are displayed as graphics B Configuration Basic Graphic Display x Crant Basic Design Type C Rail movement Free movement Display angle Hide dev y OK Cancel Help Type This item is for selecting the smart object type for graphic display Display angle Select this item to set the graphic display angle Graphic position X This item is for selecting the word device on the PLC whose graphic display X coordinate is to be set Graphic position Y This item is for selecting the word device on the PL
313. meric keypad input lower limit value 100 Pop up display 100 0 Touch the numeric indicator 9 200 reca ON state display 2 5 or Display when numeric Le device 0100 100 0 Data other than 100 to 1500 results in a setting error and OFF state display data is not written The numeric keypad panel does not close PLC device D100 1000 Press the ENT key to write input data 1000 to write device D100 B Supplementary Explanation In the case of numeric keypads with a decimal point key data beyond the decimal point is discarded before operations when the ENT key is touched when an input is made that exceeds the decimal point position set on that smart object When 10 1234 is set by numeric keypad input when the decimal point position 2 the data from the third digit past the decimal point onwards is discarded and the entry operates as 10 12 5 4 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS B Panel Shapes Binary unsigned numeric keypad without decimal point key Remarks EST240Z 140x180 515557 200 X 250 Binary signed numeric keypad without decimal point key Remarks 5 2402 140 180 EST5552 200 X 250 BCD numeric keypad without decimal point key Remarks EST2402 140x180 EST5552 200 X250 5 5 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS Hexadecimal numeric keypad without decimal point key Remarks EST240Z 140x220 515557
314. mmand to read the currently stored switch code when switch output has turned ON on the external device The event to be notified is N For details on switch communications command refer to the Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Communications Connection Manual No CP SP 1090E 2 15 Chapter 2 SMART OBJECT SPECIFICATIONS Dedicated storage area information Dedicated storage area 2 16 The dedicated storage area is the memory area backed up by battery on the EST unit It is used for recipe smart object trend smart object recorder smart object dedicated package Usage of dedicated storage area is displayed Dedicated storage area information Dedicated storage area card info usage Max es Max word 208000 In use In use word Trend fis fi 01764 Recipe fi 122 Record Fi 69688 Current usage of area Dedicated package 80000 This item is for displaying the usage of 7 dedicated storage area currently set Total 5 Free r Usage after modification to Recorder config D pase Usage after pasting smart object This item is for displaying the usage of usageGword i 25 dedicated storage area after pasting Current usage of area smart objects or after changing configuration The status of dedicated st
315. mp device data gt Upper limit value B Configuration Basic Lamps Lx Basic Graphic Text Ranee Ies Type C Bit Word This item is used for selecting the lamp type State State 9 Mun This item is used for selecting the operation function of the lamp smart ee TT object Lamp device This item is for entering the word device to be monitored for switching graphic or text display OK Graphic Set the display graphics of state 1 2 3 to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphics Text Set the display strings of state 1 2 3 to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the strings 3 91 3 5 Lamps Range Set the data range of state 1 2 3 display for the lamp device x Omnt Basic Graphic Text Ranee m val Upper val Lamp ON range M This item displays the display selected Tal state of state 1 2 3 Statel State2 State3 Ra Data format This item is for selecting the data Data fmt Unsigned binary v format of the value currently stored to the lamp device Upper val 999 Lower val 4 Upper lower value This item is for entering the upper lower limit value of the lamp ON range OK Cancel Help Range Set the data type of the lamp device and the display selection range upper lower limit values of the state B Example Lamp device D100 upper l
316. mp device on the PLC and displays the graphic of the same registered graphic No This lamp display smart object is exclusively for registered graphics B Configuration Basic Basic Type This item is used for selecting the lamp type State This item is used for selecting the operation function of the lamp smart object Type C Bit Word State 2 state 3 state Lamp device Lamp dev This is for entering the word device to be monitored for switching mises graphic or text display Offset 0 Hide device This item is for entering the bit device for clearing the graphic or text display Offset This item is for entering the offset data to be added to the lamp device B Example Lamp device D100 offset 10 Registered graphics 3 EST display When 0100 100 PEG device 100 10 offset 100 When D100 100 100 10 offset 100 When D100 100 100 10 offset 100 3 94 3 5 Lamps B Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic Lamp device Lamp device Enter the communications channel the device address and the word device Hide device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Offset Enter the value to be added to the lamp device data 32768 to 32767 B Supplementary Explanation Set the data of the lamp device in signed binary data format e If the graphic No to be
317. n be changed when the data of the numeric device exceeds the upper lower limit values preset on the alarm The bar display can be cleared by setting the Hide device to ON Type This item is for selecting the type of smart object for he graph meter Graphs Meters x Basic Bar graph Alana Alarm display Type ges C Meter C Slide meter This item enables display of alarms on bar graphs Pie chart Line graph Display format Alam display This item is for selecting the display format of bar graphs Disp frat Vertical x Data format Data frat Signed binary E This item is for selecting the data of numeric devices Numeric device This item is for entering the word device on the PLC to be displayed as a bar graph Hide device This item is for entering the bit device for clearing the graph display Display format Select the display format of the bar graphs Vertical Displays bar graphs in the vertical direction Horizontal Displays bar graphs in the horizontal direction Tank type Displays bars as tank types in the vertical direction Data format Select the data of the numeric device from Signed binary Unsigned binary BCD Note however that when tank type has been selected as the display format the selection becomes Unsigned binary BCD 3 113 3 7 Graphs Meters Bar graph This sheet is for setting the bar graph display Graphs Meters Omnt Basic
318. n the graphic type has been selected to User Specify the blink operation Blink operation can be specified on smart objects that have a graphic switching function When blink is selected the ON and OFF graphics are alternately displayed The blink interval setting can be changed in the General Configuration Information using the AP Editor and with the System screen of the EST unit Text Display format String Blink Chapter 2 SMART OBJECT SPECIFICATIONS This sheet is for configuration strings that are to be displayed on smart objects Basic Graphic Text SW comm Interlock Font size l dots v Center 7 H scale p H align Center Y V scale po OFF string OFF color i ERE ON string Copy OFF ON color Blink when OFF Blink when ON Display format These items are for setting the size and display position of text String These items are for entering strings to be displayed on the smart object Blink Blinking can be specified at the ON OFF states on smart objects that have a string switching function when the ON OFF state changes Set the size and display position of the string to be displayed Font size Select from 8 dots 16 dots H V scale Select the display scale of the string from 1 to 8X V alignment Select the vertical display position of the string from Top Center Bottom alignment H alignment Select the horizontal display position of the string from
319. name comment and data acquisition period is compared with the application in the main unit and the result is displayed Application name Comment ie Sampling date Match mismatch Application name comment sampling date Displays the application name comment and sampling date dates and times of start and end If not matched nothing is displayed in the Appli Name field Match mismatch If matched Found will appear If not matched Different will appear 4 128 4 6 Smart object name Recorder Recorder Scaling Paste Scaling factor Goordinatbs p cq cL de B Function This smart object samples the data at the word address specified by the sampling address at the sampling cycle and displays the sampled data as a trend graph The sampling data is displayed as signed binary data e Up to 16 channels can be sampled However up to 8 channels of them can be displayed The bit data specified by the alarm device of alarm setting is sampled at the sampling cycle and the ON OFF status is displayed by the LED and the marker Two items of alarm information can be set for one channel The sampled time is displayed on the X axis of the recorder display in the format month day hour minute 2 axis display can be set by adding the Y axis to the recorder display In this display format up to eight channels can be displayed on a single axis of the recorder
320. nel started Keyboard panel call 12345678 Keyboard panel Input data is written to the string device area Notify device M000 ON D100 D101 D102 D103 D104 D105 3 135 3 8 Text Display B Smart Object Parameters always panel start external trigger Keyboard Select when the keyboard panel callfunctionisused String device Enter the communications channel the device address and the word P device Enter the number of display characters 1 to 64 Update device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit When read conditions device and external trigger are selected pow device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit poe ce Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Graphic Type Selectthe graphic ype generaluser TT OFF SelcthegraphcdispayedatOFF Color when OFF Select the display color ofthe OFF Graphic Blink when OFF Selecttocause blinking at OFF ON Graphic 0 Select the graphic display calor when ON a a OO Fontsize Select the font size from 8 and 16 dots Valignment Select vertical alignment from top center bottom Y H alignment Select horizontal alignment from leftcenter right 0 OFF color Enter the display textcolor when OFF o y Blink when OFF___ Select to cause blinking at OFF O ON color
321. nfiguration Stich E This item is for entering the bit device that is to be manipulated when a switch is touched Lamp device This item is for entering the bit device to be Er monitored for switching graphic or text display Hide device This item is for entering the bit device used to hide the graphic or text display W Example Momentary switch Switch device M000 lamp device M001 EST display Switch input PLC ladder OFF Writes 000 T Moot Example ON 4 Reads M001 ON E W Smart Object Parameters gt Parameter type Parameter name Selection setting item Remarks Basic Switch operation Select switch action from momentary alternate bit set bit reset Switch device Enter the communications channel the station address and H the bit device Smart object Lamp device Enter the communications channel the station address and the bit device parameters Hide device Enter the communications channel the station address and When lamp devices the bit device are used SW comm Select when using switch communications Interlock Select when using interlocked operation A 3 1 Supplementary Explanation Select OFF Graphic for the graphic selection when a lamp device is used OFF Graphic is paired with ON Graphic and is automatically selected Note been selected at Graphic type explanation C Hand
322. ng graphic or text display States This item is for entering the number of graphic states OK Cancel Help Lamp device Set the start lamp device bit Lamp devices are monitored from the bit device set at Lamp device for the number of display states entered at Number of states No The graphic No is the graphic specified to correspond with the start lamp device Create registered graphics in advance using a continuous graphic No for the number of states to be displayed 3 86 3 5 Lamps B Example Lamp device M000 number of states 3 graphic No 10 EST display Graphic No 10 Graphic No 11 Graphic No 12 N ZIO M000 OFF M000 ON 000 OFF M000 OFF M001 OFF M001 OFF M001 M001 OFF M002 OFF M002 OFF M002 OFF M002 ON Smart Object Parameters Basic Enter the start communications channel the device address and the bit device Enter the number of states to be displayed Graphic Type User Enter the start graphic No to be displayed Supplementary Explanation Lamp bits and display graphics are paired together For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configurarion Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions Enter the bit device on the PLC for the Lamp device Do not enter word devices such as registers Do not turn multiple bits ON simultaneously as the bit device for lamp devic
323. ng the Adjust key Days of a week are automatically displayed after being calculated them from Month Date Year Touching the Close key closes the panel and returns to the state before the clock correction panel was called Panel 10 in operating status 10 35 16 Function switch Clock correction E call smart object Panel 10 during stop Clock Correction Touch clock correction switch Panel 10 in operating status Clock correction panel pop up Clock correction Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS B Supplementary Explanation If the date is changed to a non existent date such as February 31 it cannot be written to the EST clock B Panel Shapes Clock correction Panel No 1205 E Remarks 320 x 240 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS 5 5 Messages Panel classification 1210101215 B Function This panel is activated to pop up by message call smart objects on string displays Messages display the registered strings of No set in the smart object parameters of message call smart objects Touching the Close key closes the panel and returns to the state before the message panel was called B Example HELP Touch HELP Message registered string String indicator Message call smart object Touch close Message panel Supplementary Explanation Registered strings are set during registered string editing on AP Editor For details see the Smart Termin
324. ngs file operations printing how to paste smart objects and other AP Editor operations Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Smart Object Library Manual No CP SP 1089E Graphic elements that have functions for displaying on the EST Z Series are called smart objects This manual describes the concept of smart objects and the functions of each smart object Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Communications Connection Manual No CP SP 1090E This manual should be read by those who combine the EST Z Series with PLCs made by other manufacturers and dedicated board computers to build systems This manual describes how to connect to PLCs address maps that correspond to PLCs how to paste smart objects drawing and other operations and settings required for making applications using PLCs Smart Terminal EST240Z User s Manual DMC10 Package Manual No CP SP 1091E This package is used when constructing systems by connecting the EST240Z to Yamatake s Distributed Multi channel Controller DMC10 This manual describes the specifications of the software package how to use the package how to install the software and how to operate the software Smart Terminal EST555Z User s Manual DMC10 Package Manual No CP SP 1124E This package is used when constructing systems by connecting the EST555Z to Yamatake s Distributed Multi channel Controller DMC10 This manual describes the specifications of the software packag
325. nications channel the device address and the bit device Hide device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device SWcomm Select when using swich communications interlock Select when using interlocked operation __ Graphic Type Sekectihegraphie omgeneraluser OFF Graphe Selestthegraphie displayed ato Color when OFF Selectthe display color ofthe OFF Graphic O Fontsize Selestihe font size Band todos Select vertical alignment from topicentertboton H alignment Selecthorizonial alignment from OFF sting Emermedispaytetato OFF color EmeriedispaytexcoorwhenOFF Switch communicatione Switch communications function Select the switch communications function lt Biste Interlock action according to ON OFF or bit device Rame Interlock action according to bit device range 3 18 3 3 Word Type Switches B Supplementary Explanation Select OFF Graphic for the graphic selection when a lamp device is used OFF Graphic is paired with ON Graphic and is automatically selected Note however that OFF Graphic ON Graphic can be freely selected from registered graphics when User has been selected at Graphic type The data area of the write destination functions properly even if its addresses are the same
326. nications channel the device address and the bit device Supplementary Explanation Special packages are library software packages such as the DMC10 package prepared by Yamatake They cannot be created nor modified For details on special packages refer to Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Application Preparation Manual No CP SP 1088E For details on DMC10 packages refer to Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual DMC10 Package Volum EST240Z CP SP 1091E EST555Z CP SP 1124E The EST turns the startup device OFF at panel selection This is a transparent smart object and may be pasted anywhere There is no change to operation of the background panel Handling Precautions When the special package is not being downloaded to the EST nothing happens The EST however turns the startup device OFF Panels cannot be started up when a started up pop up panel is currently active Execute setting of the startup device bits by one shot instructions One shot instructions may not function properly on circuits that set bits to ON at all times Ladder circuit example Rise condition SET 000 1 Start device 3 65 3 4 Panel Change Switches Smart object name External multi panel selector others Panel change switches Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates od di ee B Function This smart object forcibly selects panels from the PLC T
327. ns function Select the switch communications funcion __ Bistte interiock action according to ON OFF state orbit dee Range imerockacionaccodmgiobidevcerange 3 21 3 3 Word Type Switches B Supplementary Explanation Select OFF Graphic for the graphic selection when a lamp device is used OFF Graphic is paired with ON Graphic and is automatically selected Note however that OFF Graphic ON Graphic can be freely selected from registered graphics when User has been selected at Graphic type For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 o Handling Precautions Enter the bit device on the PLC for Lamp Hide device Do not enter word devices such as registers Enter the word device on the PLC as the write device Do not enter bit devices such as relays When a registered graphic is used for the switch graphic the OFF graphic and ON graphic to be displayed must be created at the same size When a registered graphic is used for the switch graphic the smart object size becomes the size of the graphic and the smart object cannot be scaled 3 22 3 3 Word Type Switches Smart object name Data calculation Word type switches Scaling Paste Scaling factor Lo O Ay B Function This smart object adds subtracts calculation data before writing to the numeri
328. nt Y SW comm FER Select this item when using Switch communications functions zi CI Interlock Select this item when using the interlock Id BE ja Si function Design Set the switch graphic and the display string Switch Communications Set the operation of switch communications functions Interlock Set the entry enabled conditions for the switch 3 54 3 4 Panel Change Switches B Example Panel 5 in operation status Panel7 in operation status Panel 5 in operating status Panel7 in operation status Panel 10 in operation status Panel 10 in operation status Panel front M B Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic panel to Tor p Select when using switch communications Select when using interlocked operation Po Design Select the graphic type from general user 555 Select ho display graphic i Select the display color of the graphic Po Font sae Selec te ont size rom sands Sl FV alignment Select veria alignment rom piceno Haignment horizontal alignment rom leicentriigi Fislay sting Enterthe splay oo O Text color display text color EE communications Switch communications function Select the switch communications function Gitsite PPP acion according ONOFF Range Interlockactionacco
329. ntering the bit device to be set turned ON at completion of writing of the string data entered on the keyboard Coordinates This item is for entering the call coordinates of the keyboard panel Keyboard setup This item is for selecting the data display method of the input data display field when the keyboard panel is called up The bit device is set to ON at completion of writing of string data entered on the keyboard panel The EST does not set notifications devices to OFF Set the notification device on the PLC after confirming the ON state of the bit Keyboard setup When the Display string device data at startup checkbox is marked the string data currently set to the string device is displayed at the input data display field when the keyboard panel is displayed Switch Communications Set the operation of switch communications functions Interlock Set the entry enabled conditions for the switch Example 3 8 Text Display String device D100 number of display characters 6 PLC device D100 D101 D102 D103 D104 D105 4443h 4A2Dh 4C4Bh 4E4Dh 504Fh EST display ABCD JKLMNOP Keyboard use string device D100 number of display characters 8 notify device M000 EST display ABCD JKLMNOP The string indicator is touched ABCD JKLMNOP ON state display ABCD JKLMNOP OFF state display PLC device D100 D101 D102 D103 D104 D105 Reading at pa
330. object The event name is displayed by touching the Help switch These keys scroll the trend display Hal gt Scroll the trend display to the start final screen 4 Scroll the trend display one screen at a time 4 Scroll the trend display half a screen at a time The trend menu panel is displayed by touching the icon display area at the top right of the trend smart object for three seconds This function is only at the time of the EST240Z application preparation SET Range Display scare Upper 1234 Ron Lower T 1234 Trend Display This item controls display of the upper lower limit values ON Displays the upper lower limit values OFF Clears display of the upper lower limit values This item changes the upper lower limit values Touching a switch area displays a numeric keypad on which you can change the value This item controls display of trends on each channel ON Displays the trend data OFF Clears display of the trend data N C Unused channel Trend display settings are the settings of a temporary display state Trend display settings are cleared when a panel is switched 4 3 Variable Trend Menu Panels The variable trend menu panel is displayed by touching the icon display area at the top right of the variable trend smart object for three seconds Device change switch Device change switch Selection No name display Trend display NN
331. odify panel and by touching the data section being displayed Also in case of specifying the Modify the setting of interlock device can be possible The enabled disabled of the data change can be controlled with an external PLC by setting the interlock device When the HEX is under reverse status the data modify panel of hexadecimal input can be called up by touching the data section under display When the BIN is in the revere status the data modify panel of coded binary can be called up by touching the data section under display PLC monitor smart objects Bit device The bit count of 512 bits 32 words can be monitored and displayed for the PLC data specified with the display head device address Also the specified device data can be changed by calling up the data modify panel Head device address Head device address Address range This displays the head address of a PLC device to be monitored The address range of the maximum and the minimum values capable of being displayed is shown 4 83 4 5 PLC monitor Scroll key adrs data This makes scrolling of 256 bits 16 words for the device address to be displayed The scrolling range will be the range as set with the Min Max values of the PLC monitor smart objects There will be no scrolling when the difference of the upper and the lower values becomes less than 512 bits 32 words WIA Scrolls the display address to 256 b
332. odule 0 to 127 Select at interlock use At write monitor selection Graphic Select display graphic Select graphic color Panel Device modify panel Enter call up coordinates of device modify panel Data modify panel Enter call up coordinates of data modify panel Hexadecimal HEX Data modify panel Enter call up coordinates of data modify panel Decimal BIN Maximum Minimum Data Register upper Enter device range upper limit value of Data Register D 0 to 9999 values limit value Data Register lower Enter device range lower limit value of Data Register D 0 to 9999 limit value Link Register upper Enter device range upper limit value of Link Register W 0 to FFFF limit value Link Register lower Enter device range lower limit value of Link Register W 0 to FFFF limit value File Register upper Enter device range upper limit value of File Register 0 to 9999 limit value File Register lower Enter device range lower limit value of File Register 0 to 9999 limit value Spec Register uppef Enter device range upper limit value of Spec Register SD 9000 to 9999 limit value Spec Register lower Enter device range lower limit value of Spec Register SD 9000 to 9999 limit value Timer Value upper Enter device range upper limit value of Timer Value TN 0 to 9999 limit value Timer Value lower Enter device range lower limit value of Timer Value 0 to 9999 limit value Counter Value upper Enter device range upper limit valu
333. of the write execution devices in each group turning ON Recipe data has individual group configuration Device 3 Device 4 device ON A group is a function used when the write timings of the recipe data on the external device differ within the same recipe Up to four groups can be set and the write execution device of the data can be specified to each group when recipe data is to be written by controlling devices on the PLC B Recipe Settings 4 2 Recipe The recipe data parameters are set at Configuration Information Recipe Data in AP Editor recipe display and operations during writing comply with the content of this setting information In the recipe data settings enter the following Number of recipes The number of files to save recipe data to Number of recipe data items The number of recipe data items to save to a single recipe Recipe name The name of each recipe The name can be changed on smart objects Parameters The parameter settings of each recipe data group write device address etc Data settings The settings of all recipe data For details see the Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Application Preparation Manual No CP SP 1088E B Area Required for Recipe Functions Dedicated storage area Dedicated storage area Dedicated storage area Dedicated storage area Dedicated storage area Dedicated storage area When the recipe function is use
334. oil TC 0 to 4095 limit value Counter contact Enter address range upper limit value of Counter contact CS 0 to 4095 upper limit value Counter contact Enter address range lower limit value of Counter contact lower limit value i Counter coil upper Enter address range upper limite value of Counter coil CC 0 to 4095 limit value Counter coil lower Enter address range lower limit value of Counter coil CC 0 to 4095 limit value 0 to 4095 CS 0 to 4095 4 94 4 5 PLC monitor Supplementary Explanation The monitor start address becomes the lower limit value address when the monitor start address is changed by the device modify panel under the monitor range of one screen with less than 32 words The device displays between the PLC and monitor smart object are partially different from those of the manufacturer The following shows the cross reference of each device Mio aich Relay Loox Counter Col The detail of smart object settings is given in 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions Set the driver for monitor smart objects to be used for each channel with Setup information Basic setting gt Communications setting of the AP Editor For detail on the settings refer to Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Application Preparation Manual No CP SP 1088E When the monitor range is less than 32 words in one screen and the data of
335. oll key B Configuration Basic Alarm Monitor Cmnt Basic Design Type C Alarm lamp Display alarm Type P e This item is for selecting the type of ii opel teem alarm monitor smart object C Monitor Details Summary History Count Details This item is for selecting the display Smart object size do 3 content of the alarm information 320 X180 display Items Message display x Smart object size dot This item is for selecting the smart object size Items This item is for selecting the display eos res e Smart object size dot Selects only at the EST555Z application preparation Selects the 320 x 180 size automatically on the EST240Z tems Selects the display content When the 640 x 370 smart object size is selected Selects only at the EST555Z application preparation Message display Displays the messages of alarm occurrence Display all Displays the name and messages of alarm occurrence Design This sheet is for setting the graphic to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic Set the display text color of the string to be displayed on the smart object 3 171 3 11 Alarm Monitor Example1 EST240Z Mo ALARM ALARM ALOS Convair has stopped Name charcters MESSRGE ALARMODI STAGEDNI Motor over load Alarm Messa
336. olor Enterthe display text color when OFF 7 BinkwhenOFF SeleciocamebinkngatOFF TON string Enterthe display string when the numeric keypad is caledup FON color Selectihe display text color when the numerickeypadiscaledup Blink when ON Select to cause blinking when the numeric keypad is called up Keyboard Enter the call coordinates of the keyboard panel Select the display setting when the keyboard panel is called up Swih communications Switch communications Select the switch communications function function Interlock Bit state Interlock action according to ON OFF state of bit device Interlock action according to bit device range Supplementary Explanation For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 For details the keyboard panel see 5 3 Keyboard page 5 8 1 Handling Precautions Enter the word device on the PLC as the String device Do not enter bit devices such as relays Enter the bit device on the PLC as the Notification Hide device Do not enter word devices such as registers When a registered graphic is used for the switch graphic the OFF graphic and ON graphic to be displayed must be created at the same size When a registered graphic is used for the switch graphic the smart object size becomes the size of the graphic and the smart object cannot be scaled When an opened pop
337. ommunications channel the device address and the bit device Interlock use Select when the interlock function is used Graphic Select genera EE OFF Graphe Select the display graphic Tor when alarm monitoring e stopped Color when OFF Select tne graphic display color for when alarm monitoring is stopped Blink when OFF Select to cause Blinking when alarm monitoring is ON Graphic Select the display graphic for when alarm monitoring is in progress Color when ON Select the graphic display color for when alarm monitoring isin progress BinkwhenON Select to cause binking when alarm monitoring is in progress Fontsize Selectithe fontsize rom8 and 16 90 Valignmeni Select vertical alignment from topicenterbotom Halignment Select horizontal aignment rom eeen OFF string Enter tne display string for when aarm monitoring is soppe OFF color Select ne display text colar for when alarm monitoring is stopped Blink when OFF Select to cause blinking when alarm monitoring is stopped ON string Enter tne displey strina for when alarm monitoring isin progress ON color Select the display text color for when alarm monitoring isn progress Blink when ON Select to cause blinking when alarm monitoring is in progress Interlock Bit state Interlock action according to ON OFF state of bit device Po Interlock action according to bit device range il
338. on Basic Method Crant This item is for selecting the startup method of Basic SW comm Interlock panel selection panel change switch Method Type SW start C Extemal start This item is for selecting the type of panel change switch operation others Type Selector Dedicated package Mode C Overlay c This item is for selecting the operation mode of Pop up the smart object background panel selector mmm SW comm selector Select this item when using switch communications functions 3 Interlock Calpe i al p ib i Select this item when using the interlock function panel This item is for entering the startup panel No and the panel call coordinates Design Set the switch graphic and the display string Switch Communications Set the operation of switch communications functions Interlock Set the entry enabled conditions for the switch 3 42 3 4 Panel Change Switches B Example Call panel 110 Panel 5 in operation status Panel 5 in operation status Background panel Background Selector switch ON Background selector selector Background panel 100 Background panel 110 B Smart Object Parameters Selection seting tem Basic Select background selector Call Calpanel O Callpanel the background panel No to be started up 10899 to 10899 Coordinates
339. on Bit device that notifies that writing of recipe data ended abnormally The group must be set individually to recipe data The data write timing write execution device normal end notification abnormal end notification can be specified individually to each group on recipe auto write smart objects 4 2 Recipe Smart object name Manual write Recipe Scaling Paste Scalingfactor Textsize coordinates dd B Function This smart object shows the data currently set to the selected recipe No its data name and comments in the form of a table Touching the Select switch calls the recipe selection panel On the recipe selection panel select the recipe No to be displayed on the recipe smart object The currently display recipe data can be corrected The data of the recipe No currently displayed for the recipe smart object can be written to the external device by touching the Write switch B Configuration Basic Recipes This item displays the number of recipes set in the recipe data settings Data This item displays the number of data items set in the recipe data settings Type This item is for selecting the type of recipe smart object Items a This item is for selecting the display item Write interlock Interlock Notify dev This item is for entering the bit device for enabling editing of recipe data Notify dev setup
340. on For details on the numeric keypad panel see 5 2 Numeric Keypad page 5 4 Upper value Lower value Enter the valid range of the data when the data is set on the numeric keypad panel When the data entered on the numeric keypad panel exceeds the valid range when the ENT key is touched an error occurs a short high pitched alarm buzzers and the set data 1 cleared to 0 Data entry range Upper limit value 2 Setting data 2 Lower limit value 3 6 Numeric Indicators Switch Communications This sheet is for setting the operation of switch communications functions Interlock This sheet is for setting the entry enabled conditions for the switch B Example Alarm display use numeric device D100 number of digits 4 decimal point position 1 alarm upper limit value 1000 alarm lower limit value 100 PLC data Up to 99 100 to 1000 1001 on wards EST display ON display OFF display ON display alarm display normal display alarm display Displa Numeric keypad use numeric device D100 number of digits 4 decimal point position 1 write device D100 notification device M000 numeric keypad entry upper limit value 1500 numeric keypad entry lower limit value 1000 Pop up display 20 0 Touch the numeric indicator Numeric keypad 20 0 panel call ON state display Display when numeric device 0100 100 0 Data other than 100 to 1500 results in a setting error and ate display
341. onds while the battery alarm state is occurring The notify device is not reset to OFF even if the EST battery alarm state is recovered EST 000 is set to ON at approx 10 seconds intervals Battery alarm occurring 3 203 3 13 State Control B Example Selection setting item Basic Notify device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Notify device M000 B Smart Object Parameters B Supplementary Explanation When this smart object is pasted to the panel used as background panel the EST battery alarm can be monitored at all times This is a transparent smart object and may be pasted anywhere For details on how to replace the battery see the Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Installation Manual Manual No CP SP 1065E Handling Precautions Enter the bit device on the PLC as the Notify device Do not enter word devices such as registers 3 204 Smart object name State contro Data write when opening the panel Scaling T ub eT y 3 13 State Control Paste Text size coordinates Enter the bit device on the PLC as the Notify device Do not enter word B Function B Configuration Basic devices such as registers This smart object writes data set at Write data to the Write device on the PLC when panel startup is activated State Control Basic Type C Backlight con
342. ons Used in Smart Object Specifications 2 1 Basic Layout of Specification Descriptions 2 1 Name and Attributes of Smart 2 2 F nclilOll er ees pU RUE Re REIR ars SUR USUS sedan she asses bee 2 2 B Settings ooo egg i ey RP Eq iS DEN He Ea 2 2 B Examples 2 2 Smart Object Parameters 2 3 Supplementary 2 4 Main Configuration Items for Smart 2 5 B Smart Object Properties 2 5 B Basic io eda le Mies 2 6 B 2 7 ee 2 9 B interlock Erste RUE 2 10 B Switch 2 13 Dedicated storage area information 2 16 BASIC SMART OBJECTS SWIHGCHES Rds tee CERE ERG 3 1 lio RTAS ia RE Tea 3 1 Function 3 5 Radio era na 3 5 Inching os eet hn ete ees ege ee e acerba ced 3 8 Clock Adjustment
343. or E n _ ou o os Y er Graphic Set the graphic to display with smart objects and set the display color Panel Designate the call up coordinates of the device modify and the data modify panels PLC monitor Device modify panel Enter the call up coordinates of device modify panel Data modify panel HEX Enter call up coordinates of data modify panel HEX hexadecimal Data modify panel BIN Enter call up coordinates of data modify panel BIN decimal Maximum Minimum values Enter the device range to monitor Panel Initialize Initialize the maximum and the minimum values Maximum 0 255 Enter the maximum value of the 0 199 address range to monitor 200 255 0 0 Minimum 1 1 Enter the minimum value of the address range to monitor Initialize This sets the maximum and the minimum values of each device address of devices selected with the CPU kind 4 105 4 5 PLC monitor B Smart Object Parameters Basic CPUKnd O Monitor method Selecttommontorw emontr O SSCS Smart sie 49 Select the smart objets T__ Interlock device Select at interlock use At write monitor selection Modify Graphic Select display graphic Select graphic color Panel Device modify panel Enter call up coordinates of device modify panel Data modify p
344. or example when the SP value is changed while SP3 is selected SP3 will be rewritten The settable range of the SP value is the lower SP limit to the upper SP limit in the setup on the DMC10 For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions Set the communications channel to which the PID controller is to be connected to Yamatake CPL general host link The panel may not function properly when the below items on the DMC10 are changed while a panel to which this smart object is pasted is activated The panel will function properly by restarting the panel after the change has been made Input type Decimal point position PV range lower limit PV range upper limit Lower SP limit Upper SP limit Do not use this smart object for panels that are to be started up as pop up panels When the pop up panel is active a numeric keypad panel cannot be called 4 1 PID controller Smart object name CB508 PID controller Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates cd di B Function This smart object enables monitoring of the run state of the CB508 The SP value can also be changed Name Up to 16 1 byte characters can be entered Channel individual monitors Common monitors Channel individual monitors PV This displays the PV process variable value SP This displ
345. or smart objects is started up by panel overlay the operation is as described below Do not execute the panel overlay startup for the panels pasted with PLC monitor smart objects When the pop up panels displayed by PLC monitor device change or the pop up panels of other smart objects are returned to the panels pasted with PLC monitor smart objects the PLC monitor device and address of PLC monitor smart objects might be changed to the initial status or the device might not be displayed This happens when the panels pasted with PLC monitor smart objects are restarted at panel movement Do not use this smart object for panels that are to be started up as pop up panels When the pop up panel is active a device modify panel and data modify panel cannot be called 4 115 4 5 PLC monitor Smart object name MELSEC C Link Bit device PLC monitor Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates cdi qc B Function This is used in the case of Mitsubishi Q series CPU to be connected via the computer link module Can monitor the CPU bit device zone Can change the PLC device data B Configuration Basic PLC kind Select the PLC kind of PLC monitor monitor O ___________ Basic Graphic Panel Min Max CPU kind PLG kind Select the CPU kind to monitor MELSEG A O Link MELSEC FX CPU IData kind C MELSEC MELSEC
346. orage area being used in the trend recipe recorder special package is displayed Max No Displays the maximum number of dedicated storage areas Max word Displays the maximum size of dedicated storage area in the number of words Type Dedicated storage area is used for trend recipe recorder special package In use No Displays the number of dedicated storage areas used by trend recipe recorder special package In use word Displays the size of dedicated storage areas used by trend recipe recorder special package in the number of words Available Displays the unused areas of dedicated storage area by In use No In use word Total usage Displays in percentage the ratio of dedicated storage area used Total usage displays the larger value when In use No or In use word is displayed in percentage Chapter 2 SMART OBJECT SPECIFICATIONS Usage after pasting smart object The usage of dedicated storage area after enabling the configuration of concerned smart object is displayed Available Displays the unused area of dedicated storage area after enabling the configuration of concerned smart object by In use No In use word Total usage Displays the percentage of the areas being used in dedicated storage area in the form of a green bar The area used by the smart objects other than the concerned one is displayed in the form of a dark blue bar If the ratio after set up exceeded 100 the bar is dis
347. orage area sampled by the recorder or the trend object is erased When a CF card is used with the recorder the data written in the CF card remains without being erased However this data cannot be read from the EST When performing a ring write by using the CF card with the recorder if there is insufficient free space on the CF card data storage area may not be secured When CF card is used for the first time e Use a CF card recommended by Yamatake Yamatake cannot guarantee operation of a CF card other than the one recommended by Yamatake e Be sure to format the CF card according to the EST system screen before using it A CF card formatted by Windows cannot be used for the EST When creating downloading application When data is sampled using the CF card with the recorder if data needs to be saved be sure to save data in the CF card before starting downloading When an application is downloaded including change or specified Ties panel the recorder or the trend smart object starts the sampling anew 4 6 An application which uses two or more recorder smart objects using the CF card and which mixes ring write and linear write cannot be downloaded to the EST Select either of the two write methods to use the CF card When a 64 MB CF card is used with the recorder not only the sampled data but also information attached to the sampled data are written About 2096 is used as attached information
348. owever their operations are suspended There is no change to operation of the background panel For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions When an unregistered panel No is entered there is no operation When an opened pop up panel is active other panels cannot be started by this smart object This smart object does not function even if pasted to a background panel When User is selected at Graphic type and registered graphics are used for the switch graphic the smart object size becomes the size of the graphic and the smart object cannot be scaled 3 53 3 4 Panel Change Switches Smart object name Panel change switch panel to front others Panel change switches Scaling Paste Scaling factor coordinates 9 O Ay B Function This smart object displays the self panel at the front Other active panels remain active B Configuration Basic ew Method This item is for selecting the startup method of exi ESSERI panel selection panel change switch Method SW start C External start Type This item is for selecting the type of panel e change switch operation others C Selector C Dedicated package C Overlay Others Mode Popup This item is for selecting the operation mode of the smart object panel front Mode Panelfro
349. p 4 P 4 RI Startup device 00 call panel 110 Panel 5 in operation status Background selector Background panel 100 M000 ON selector 3 70 M000 ON Background panel Method This item is for selecting the startup method of panel selection external start Type This item is for selecting the type of panel change switch operation other Mode This item is for selecting the operation mode of the smart object BG panel selector Startup device This item is for entering the PLC device for starting up selection of the background panel Call panel This item is for entering the startup panel No and the panel call coordinates Panel 5 in operation status Background selector Background panel 110 000 OFF 3 4 Panel Change Switches B Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic Select background selector Startup device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Enter the background panel No to be started up 1 to 899 Enter the call coordinates of the background panel No to be started up Supplementary Explanation The EST turns the startup device OFF at panel selection This is a transparent smart object and may be pasted anywhere When selection of the background panel is executed all active panels are restarted
350. package selector Panel change switches Scaling Paste Scaling factor 9 O Ay B Function This smart object starts up the special package when a switch is touched and closes the startup source panel and other active panels B Configuration Basic Panel Change Switches x Cmnt Method Basic Design SW comm Interlock This item is for selecting the startup method of panel selection panel Method change switch SW start C External start Type Type i p This item is for selecting the type of panel change switch operation C Overlay C Others 1 special package Pop up SW comm Select this item when using switch communications functions SW comm Interlock Interlock a e AB Select this item when using the interlock function po d qd PF xp al OK Design Set the switch graphic and the display string Switch Communications Set the operation of switch communications functions Interlock Set the entry enabled conditions for the switch 3 34 3 4 Panel Change Switches B Example When the DMC10 is being downloaded Panel 5 in operation status DMC10 Package Special package E selector switch ON Software Menu screen Panel 5 dose Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic Select when using switch communications eee Select when using interlocked operation Po De
351. pe Alarm display C Bargraph C Meter This item is for selecting the alarm isdem papi display function Display format Alm display This item is for selecting the display format of slide meters Disp fint Vertical X Data format puote i This item is for selecting the data of numeric devices Numeric device This item is for entering the word device of the PLC to be displayed as a slide meter Hide device This item is for entering the bit device for clearing the display Display format Select the display format of the slide meter Vertical Displays bar graphs in the vertical direction Horizontal Displays bar graphs in the horizontal direction Data format Select the data of the numeric device from Signed binary Unsigned binary BCD 3 120 3 7 Graphs Meters Slide meter This sheet is for setting the slide meter display Graphs Meters Minimum This item is for entering the minimum value of Basic Slide meter Alarm the graph pes Maximum This item is for entering the maximum value of Graphic the graph Te 4 Graphic This item is for selecting the graphic to be displayed on the slide meter No p 5 Al OK Cancel Help Graphic Select the graphic from the graphics created as registered graphics General graphics prepared in advance are not available A g
352. pe No Enter the bit device on the PLC at Norm dev Error dev Do not enter word devices such as registers When recipe data is written if a recipe No to which a recipe name is not set is currently set to the recipe No specified device the recipe data itself is also judged to be undetermined data Writing of this data is not executed to the external device and is processed as an error When recipe data is written re execute the writing after entering the recipe name Writing of recipe data is executed on recipe data currently set to group 1 and is not executed on the recipe data of groups 2 to 4 Do not use this smart object for panels that are to be started up as pop up panels When the pop up panel is active a numeric keypad panel and keyboard panel cannot be called 4 40 4 2 Recipe Smart object name Auto write Recipe Scaling Paste Scalingfactor Textsize coordinates cd di il sp B Function This smart object shows the data currently set to the selected recipe No its data name and comment in the form of a table Touching the Select switch calls the recipe selection panel On the recipe selection panel select the recipe No to be displayed on the recipe smart object The currently display recipe data can be corrected The recipe No can be specified on the PLC to start writing of recipe data Start of recipe data writing can be set individually to each recipe group B
353. play minimum Peru and maximum values on the X axis Ma p ma b Y axis This item is for entering the display minimum Y axis and maximum values on the Y axis X data fixed This item is for setting the X axis data interval to a fixed value X data This item is for entering the X axis data interval when X axis data fixed is selected Line OK Cancel Help This item is for selecting the display color of the line Min 0 Max 9999 X data fixed mn Data number Enter the number of display points on the line graph The maximum number of display points is 128 You can also enter the PLC device at this item to control the number of display data points on the PLC In this case enter binary data within the range 1 to 128 as the PLC data X data fixed Not fixed Set the number of display points in order X axis then Y axis as the data of the line graph starting from the address of the numeric device Numeric device n Number of data items Fixed Set the number of display points for the Y axis only as the data of the line graph starting from the address of the numeric device Enter the X axis display interval at X axis data Numeric device Y1 data Y1 data Y3 data n Number of data items 3 126 3 7 Graphs Meters Example When X axis data fixed is not selected Numeric device D100 update device M000 number of data items 5 PLC device E
354. played in red Handling Precautions Maximum number of dedicated storage areas At the EST240Z application preparation 5 units At the EST555Z application preparation 64 units Maximum size of dedicated storage areas At the EST240Z application preparation 102400 words At the EST555Z application preparation 208000 words Recorder smart objects are supported only by the EST555Z While creating EST240Z application software the usage status of a recorder is dimmed CF card info Displays the reference for the usage status of CF card It is calculated assuming that the CF card has 25 Mwords i e 50 Mbytes free space Dedicated storage area information E x Dedicated storage area card info Current usage Reference Available size Words 25000000 Type Write Used size Words E GI puso IT Current usage e pemen Displays the usage status of the CF card Usage rate currently being set r Usage after modification to Recorder config Reference Free 20200 Usos ote TN cox Usage after modification to Recorder config Displays the usage status of the CF card after the smart object has been pasted or the configuration has been modified Chapter 2 SMART OBJECT SPECIFICATIONS pul Current usage Reference Displays the status of the CF card used in the recorder Available size Words Displays the maximum available size o
355. plays the MV manipulated variable value RDY This lights when each channel is in the Ready mode MAN This lights when each channel is in the Manual mode AT This lights when auto tuning is being executed on each channel SP SET Touching the SP SET button for each channel causes a numeric keypad to pop up so that the SP value can be changed Common monitors OUT This lights when the output terminal of each channel is ON EV This lights when the EVENT terminal is ON BUS This lights when BUS output is ON The state of the BUS output on the self module and not the OR ed output of the BUS output of linked modules is displayed RSW This lights when the external contact input is ON ALM PV This lights when the PV input terminal error occurs on each channel ALM OTH This lights when other errors occur 4 1 PID controller B Example 2 Name Up to 16 1 byte characters can be entered CHI 02 OH3 Channel individual monitors Common monitors Channel individual monitors PV This displays the PV process variable value SP This displays the SP set point value MV This displays the MV manipulated variable value RDY This lights when each channel is in the Ready mode MAN This lights when each channel is in the Manual mode AT This lights when auto tuning is being executed on each channel SP SET Touching the SP SET button for each channel causes a numeric keypad to pop up
356. properly on circuits that are executed at all times Ladder circuit example Rise condition SET M000 1 Clear device Dedicated storage area The dedicated storage area is the memory area backed up by battery on the EST unit The EST240Z has 5 units of the size 20480 word areas The EST555Z has 64 units of the variable length size areas Total area size is 208000 words More than one dedicated storage area for one smart object are used as a trend buffer on the smart object The dedicated storage area is used for recipe smart object trend smart object dedicated package If all of the dedicated storage areas have been used the recipe smart object cannot be used If a short sampling cycle is set data sometimes cannot be sampled at the set sampling cycle in some applications If data was not sampled at the set sampling cycle the EST sets following value to the sampling data EST2407 0 EST5552 59991 Data format At this time internal special contact SM9068 0 is set to ON During debugging of applications determine the sampling cycle by monitoring SM9068 0 on a switch or lamp smart object Special contact SM9068 0 is a latch operated contact and can be reset by switch smart objects 4 62 4 3 If you conduct the following operation the message Division by 0 may appear opening on the AP Editor Ver 2 2 02 or earlier an application using variable trend smart objects with the AP Editor Ver 3 0
357. r byte after confirmation of the data Size Enter the number of characters currently stored to the string device area on the PLC by 2 byte conversion Set 3 for six 1 byte characters and 2 for three characters The EST reads and displays the data for the number of characters set to Number of display characters from the string device number of display characters number of read words 2 bytes Graphic When a lamp device is used the graphic setting becomes OFF Graphic and ON Graphic When Keyboard use is selected set the display graphic when the keyboard is called up as ON graphic 3 133 3 8 Text Display 3 134 Text Keyboard The string setting is not available as the string data currently stored to the string device on the PLC is displayed Set the text color to be displayed When a lamp device is used the string setting becomes String at OFF and String at ON When Keyboard use is selected set the display text color when the keyboard is called up as the ON text color Text Keyboard sw comm Intextock lt SW comm Interlock Feds 4 Coords qo p 2 Keyboard setup Display string device data at startup Cancel Notify device SW comm Select this item when using switch communications functions Interlock Select this item when using the interlock function Notify device This item is for e
358. r 2 SMART OBJECT SPECIFICATIONS 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects B Smart Object Properties Smart object properties are ocnfiguration items that are required for operation of the smart object Smart objects operate according to the parameters that are set to the smart object properties Smart object properties are categorized by tab according to their content Chant e Comment E Graphic Text SW corm Interlock name up to 18 characters can be set to each smart object Type Momentary Bit set Tab C Alternate C Bit reset Smart object parameters are categorized by tab according to the content of each parameter Interloock Smart object parameters 2 5 Chapter 2 SMART OBJECT SPECIFICATIONS B Basic This sheet is for setting basic operation of each smart object The content of smart object parameters that are set on the Basic sheet differs according to the smart object Settings are described in detail for each smart object Cmnt Basic Graphic SW comm Interlock Type This item is for selecting the Type iuc f Bit set operation type of the smart object C Alternate Bit reset Functions This item is for adding smart SW comm Interloock object functions By selecting a selection item the selected item is enabled and a tab for setting that function is added Swtich dev Device settings This ite
359. r 5 SYSTEM PANELS 5 1 Conventions Used In System Panel Specifications B System Panels System panels are special panels that are called up from specific smart objects System panels are started up by simply pasting a smart object that calls up a system panel on top of a panel in the application data System panels cannot be called up directly from the user application for example by a panel change switch smart object B List of System Panels Numeric keypad Numerickeypad 54 Keyboard Keyboard 58 Crock 5 10 Message 1215 Message 16 x 5 5 12 1216 Message 32 x 5 1217 Message 36 x 11 Alarm message 1245 Alarm message 16 x 4 5 14 Alarm message 32 x 2 Trend menu 1 axis BCD 5 16 Trend menu 1 axis unsigned binary Trend menu 1 axis signed binary Trend menu 2 axis BCD Trend menu 2 axis unsigned binary Trend menu 2 axis signed binary Variable trend menu Trend device select panel Variable trend menu Trend device select panel Recipe 1345 Recipe data display 1355 Recipe data editor PLC Monitor Word device modify panel MELSEC A series Word device modify panel MELSEC FX series Word device modify panel MELSEC Q series Bit device modify panel MELSEC A series Bit device modify panel MELSEC FX series Bit device modify panel MELSEC Q series HEX Hexadecimal Word data modify panel MELSEC PLC BIN Decimal Word data modify panel MELSEC PLC HEX Hexadecimal Word data modify panel MELSE
360. r lower limit values on the Y axis Marker configuration Decimal point This item is for entering the decimal point positions of the upper lower limit values on the Y axis Up Low col This item is for selecting the value colors of the upper lower limit values Graphic No Cancel Help This item is for selecting the graphics to display the recorder Color This item is for selecting the color of the graphics for the recorder Upper val Lower val This item is for entering the upper lower limit values on the Y axis Decimal point This item is for entering the decimal point positions of the upper lower limit values on the Y axis Graphic No This item is for selecting the graphics to display the recorder Color This item is for selecting the color of the graphics for the recorder Up Low col This item is for selecting the value colors of the upper lower limit values Operation Basic Channel Alarm View Marker Control Operation Disp when ON OFF This item is for setting the timing for displaying the marker Alarm Graphic r Alarm2 Graphic o Type m commer Type General common This item is for selecting the graphics of the marker FF Graphic Graphic when an alarm has occurred Color Color This item is for selecting the color of the graphics N Graphic Graphic 3 for the marker fam
361. r smart objects are restarted at panel movement Do not use this smart object for panels that are to be started up as pop up panels When the pop up panel is active a device modify panel and data modify panel cannot be called 4 99 4 5 PLC monitor Smart object name MELSEC A CPU Bit device PLC monitor Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates des di ee B Function This is used in the case of Mitsubishi A series CPU module to be connected Can monitor the CPU bid device zone Can modify the PLC device data B Configuration General PLC kind Select the PLC kind of PLC monitor PLC monitor x MELSEC A CPU ER CPU kind Basic Graphic Panel Min Max Select the CPU kind to monitor PLC kind A C Link C MELSEO FX GPU Data kind Select the data of a device to display GPU kind General Monitor method Data kind Select the monitor method Gilg C Words Smart object size dot Monitor method This item is for selecting the Smart Monitor only With modify object size Smart object size dot EST comm CH 320 x 160 C 640 x 440 Enter the EST communications channel EST comm CH Node Enter the station address of the CPU module 0 fixed Interlock device Select this in the case of interlock function use CPU kind Select the CPU kind to monitor
362. raphic the smart object size becomes the size of the graphic and the smart object cannot be scaled 3 49 3 4 Panel Change Switches Smart object name Panel change switch panel close others Panel change switches Scaling Paste Scaling factor coordinates Ay Ay B Function This smart object stops the self panel and closes the panel display Other active panels stay active B Configuration Basic Panel Change Switches x TT Method Basic Desien This item is for selecting the startup method of panel selection panel change switch Method SW start External start Type This item is for selecting the type of panel hange switch ration other Selector C Special package C Overlay Others Mode C Pop up This item is for selecting the operation mode of the smart object panel close Mode Panel close SW comm ER Select this item when using switch V Qu communications functions E DE pz w Interlock Bi Select this item when using the interlock function OK Cancel Help Design Set the switch graphic and the display string Switch Communications Set the operation of switch communications functions Interlock Set the entry enabled conditions for the switch 3 50 3 4 Panel Change Switches B Example Panel 5 in operation status Pan
363. raphic is displayed as the slide meter with the data display point at the center of the graphic Alarm Graphs Meters Upper This item is for entering the upper limit value of the numeric data An alarm state occurs when the numeric data exceeds the upper limit value Basic Slide meter Alarm Upper pm y Lower p 4 Alarm state numeric data upper limit value graphic Lower This item is for entering the lower limit value of the Type user mi numeric data An alarm state occurs when the numeric data falls below the lower limit value wPo Alarm state lower limit value gt numeric data Alarm graphic OK Cancel Help This item is for selecting the display graphic when an alarm occurs 3 121 3 7 Graphs Meters Example Display format vertical numeric device D100 display maximum value 100 display minimum value 0 alarm upper limit value 70 alarm lower limit value 30 Slide meter display Maximum data value 100 Sin graphi Minimum data gt value 0 PLC data 0100 60 0100 90 0100 20 B Smart Object Parameters Basic Display format Select the display format of the slide meter from vertical horizontal Re Data format Select the data format of the numeric device from unsigned binary signed binary Hex BCD Enter the communications channel the st
364. rary display state Trend display settings are cleared when a panel is switched 5 16 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS B Panel Shapes Trend menu 1 axis BCD Panel No 1301 Display Conf Remarks 1 axis unsigned binary panel No 1304 and 1 axis signed binary 220 x 160 panel No 1307 are also the same shape Trend menu 2 axis BCD Panel No 1311 Display Conf m Remarks 2 axis unsigned binary panel No 1314 and 2 axis signed binary 240 x 200 panel No 1317 are also the same shape Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS Panel classification Variable trend menu 1320 to 1336 B Function B Example This panel is displayed by touching the icon display field on a variable trend smart object for three seconds or more The trend device to be sampled by each channel can be changed The sampling cycle of the trend data can be changed Touching the OK key closes the panel and returns to the state before the menu panel was called Device change switch Selection No name display Trend display T lt i I 70 ce Interval change switch 5 18 Device change switch Touching this switch causes the Device Selection Menu to pop up and you can change the sampling device for each channel The switch is not displayed for unused channels Selection No name display This item displays the No of the currently selected device and its name Trend display Thi
365. ration status Panel 5 in operation status Background panel selector switch ON Background close background panel close Background close Background panel 100 B Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic Select background panel close Select when using switch communications Select when using interlocked operation Design Type Select the graphic type from general user cog SeecthedspayesoroWegepho ST Font size Select he font size from 8 V alignment Select vertical alignment from top center bottom Select horizontal aignment Enerthedaplayooior Text color Enter the display text color coop Switch communications Switch communications function Select the switch communications function f _____ meok Tineroskaston according to ONOFF stato Range lnteoct action according to bit deve range Supplementary Explanation When closing of the background panel is executed all active panels are restarted For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 o Handling Precautions There is no operation when background panels are not active Background panels cannot be closed when a started up pop up panel is currently active This smart object does not function even if pasted to a background panel Wh
366. rdingto bit device range B Supplementary Explanation There is no change to operation of the background panel For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 o Handling Precautions e When an opened pop up panel is active panels cannot be started by this smart object When User is selected at Graphic type and registered graphics are used for the switch graphic the smart object size becomes the size of the graphic and the smart object cannot be scaled 3 55 3 4 Panel Change Switches Smart object name External panel selector Panel change switches Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates o cd di des dii ee B Function This smart object enables panels to be forcibly selected from the PLC e It also starts up the specified panel and closes the startup source panel and other active panels The call coordinates of the panel to be started up can be specified B Configuration Basic Panel Change Switches Method om TT This item is for selecting the startup method of Basic panel selection external Method 5 C SW start External start This item is for selecting the type of panel change switch operation panel selector Type Selector Special package Mode C Overlay C Others This item is for selecting the operation mode C Pop up of the smart object Startup device
367. re displayed on the A axis and channels 5 to 8 are displayed on the B axis Name Enter the data name of each channel using up to 16 1 byte characters at the EST240Z application preparation and using up to 12 1 byte characters at the EST555Z application preparation The trend name of the EST240Z is displayed by touching the Help switch for the trend smart object Display color Select the color of the line to be displayed on the trend graph The trend name and the PV are also displayed using this color 4 55 4 3 Event Omnt Basic Trend Event View Control Sample device Name Color Line col Line color This item is for selecting the display color of the event graph Color This item is for selecting the display text color of the event name Name This item is for entering the name of the event data Sample device This item is for entering the bit device to be sampled and saved OK Sample device Enter the bit device whose events are to be sampled Name Enter the event data name for each channel using up to 16 1 byte alphanumerics The event name of the EST240Z is displayed by touching the Help switch for the trend smart object Color Select the display text color of the event name Line color Select the display color of each event data e View Trends Omnt Basic Trend Event Upper lower value This item is for entering
368. rnal panel selector 3 56 External panel 3 59 External open 3 62 External special package selector 3 64 External multi panel selector 3 66 External multi panel overlay 3 68 External background panel selector others 3 70 External background panel close 3 72 External panel selector background change menu others 3 74 External panel selector background close others 3 76 External panel close 3 78 3 5 Lamps Ree eicere ERSTE 3 81 Bit type 2 state 3 81 Bit type 3 state 3 83 Bit type multi value state lamp 3 86 Word type 2 state 3 88 Word type 3 state 3 91 Word type multi value state 3 94 3 6 N
369. rnal clock Omnt Basic Digital clock C Analog clock C Digital calendar 24 hours Univ No 10176 a Color Text color Cancel Display method Type This item is for selecting the type of clock smart object Display method This item is for selecting the time display method Type This item is for selecting the graphic type to be displayed No This item is for selecting the graphic to be displayed Color This item is for selecting the display color of the graphic Text color This item is for selecting the display text color for the time Select the time display method from 24 hour display 12 hour display 24 hour display 3 hours 45 minutes 8 seconds p m 15 45 08 12 hour display 3 hours 45 minutes 8 seconds p m 3 45 08 pm 3 187 3 12 Clocks B Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic Display method Select from 24hr display 12hr display Select general Co o Select the display graphic Select the display color ofthe graphic ce Select the display text color of the time p B Supplementary Explanation The following smart objects are used for correcting the time Smart object type Smart object name Function switches Clock setting call Corrects the internal clock Clock External clock adjustment Adjusts the internal clock to 0 by external b
370. round panel operation B Example Startup device M000 Panel 5 in operation status Panel 5 in operation status Background close i Background i close i i Background panel 100 M000 ON background close Background close 77077777 M000 M000 OFF 3 72 3 4 Panel Change Switches B Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic Select background panel close EE Startup device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device B Supplementary Explanation The EST turns the startup device OFF at panel selection This is a transparent smart object and may be pasted anywhere When closing of the background panel is executed all active panels are restarted Handling Precautions There is no operation when background panels are not active The EST however turns OFF the startup device Background panels cannot be closed when a started up pop up panel is currently active This smart object does not function even if pasted to a background panel Execute setting of the startup device bits by one shot instructions One shot instructions may not function properly on circuits that set bits to ON at all times Ladder circuit example Rise condition SET M000 start device 3 73 3 4 Panel Change Switches Panel change switches Scaling B Function Smart object name Extern
371. rt Object x Basic Inst a E Switches Function Word type switches switches E E o x Panel Lamps Numeric change indicators Graphs Text Keybord display call Data Alarm Clock setter monitor instrumentation smart object library This library groups together smart objects required for creating various instrumentation applications CENE Recipe Trend Graphic PLG Recorder movement Monitor 1 2 1 2 Chapter 1 SMART OBJECT LIBRARY CONFIGURATION Classification of Smart Object Types There are two types of smart objects basic smart objects and instrumentation smart objects B Basic Smart Objects Switches Function switches Word type switches The basic smart object library contains the following smart objects These smart objects turn the bits of the PLC ON and OFF These smart objects are radio switches and switch smart objects with functions such as buzzer stop These switch smart objects have functions for setting data to the register area Panel change switches Lamps Numeric indicators Graphs meters Text display Keyboard call Data setter Alarm monitor Clock State control These switch smart objects switch panel displays These smart objects display the ON OFF state of the PLC bits These smart objects display the numeric values of the PLC register data These smart objects also have functions for calling up numeric keypa
372. s cannot be started up when a started up pop up panel is currently active When User has been selected at Graphic type numeric values cannot be displayed correctly if the graphic size is smaller than the display data size vertical 16 dots horizontal 8 dots x number of digits When zero suppress is selected the zero suppress display is not active if the upper digit of the number of display digits is not 0 Example Numeric device 0100 data format Hex 2 words number of digits 4 zero suppress display D100 0321h D101 8760h EST display Ls 3 103 3 6 Numeric Indicators Smart object name With calculation Numeric indicator Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates interlocked B Function This smart object executes calculation processing on the numeric device on the PLC and displays the data resulting from that calculation When alarm display is used When the data of the calculation result exceeds the preset upper lower limit value the display graphic and numeric value color to be displayed can be changed When numeric keypad is used When the numeric display is touched the numeric keypad is called as a pop up display At this time the startup source panel and other active panels are closed Data entered on the numeric keypad is written to the write device on the PLC Calculation processing is
373. s for entering the message that is displayed at normal end of writing Error notification message This item is for entering the message that is displayed at abnormal end of writing OK Cancel Help 4 2 Recipe B Smart Object Parameters object size interlock is used interlock is used When the notify Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device device is used Design Data ile Enerihe display ue of the recipe Name title Enterthedisplaytitleoftherecipe namefield Comment tite Enterthe display title of the recipe data comment field Jo o Selea presence of he edi panel callswich Data comment Select when displaying the recipe data comment At the EST240Z Mo Select the display graphic Fill color Select the display color of the graphic Cursor Select the display color of the cursor At REE EST240Z application Numberical Numeric keypad call Enter the call coordinates of the numeric keypad panel keypad coordinates Use decimal point Selectwhenihenumerckeypadpanewihdecmalpontimputisused Keyboard call coordinates Enter the call coordinates ofthe keypad Message Write confirmation message Enter the message to be displayed when confirming wating Communications message Enter the message tobe displayed during communications __ Normal end message Enter the message tobe displayed atnormalen
374. s have been used for the functions other than recipe function the trend smart object cannot be used 4 47 4 3 Trend Displays Data stored to trend buffer is displayed as follows on trend smart objects e EST240Z Menu panel call switch Upper limit value gt PV Trend name Trend display Lower limit value gt cene Event name Event display Haa Scroll keys Help switch EST555Z Upper limit value 2399 LLL Trend display Lower limit value 00 Event gt Event display 02 4350 2500 PE 3330 5550 SCALE Cet Menu panel call mp2 NI switch CODO Trend display Scroll keys Scale switch Process variable 1 5560 Temp4 Trend name 4 48 4 3 Menu panel call switch Touching the icon display area for the trend for three seconds causes the trend menu panel to pop up On this panel you can change the upper and lower limit values and set the trend data display SCALE Switch Upper and lower limit value changeover switch Touching the SCALE switch in case of the EST555Z causes the change of the upper lower limit values on Y axis to enable disable Upper limit value Lower limit value Help switch Trend name Trend display Process variable The display upper and lower limit valu
375. s item controls display of trends on each channel ON Displays the trend data OFF Clears display of the trend data N C Unused channel Interval change switch Touching this switch causes the numeric keypad panel to pop up and you can change the trend data sampling cycle Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS gt a lt lt lt lt lt eei Device selection menu This menu pops up and is displayed by touching the device change switch This menu displays the name of selection devices set in the smart object paste parameters and is used for changing the device to be sampled to the device of the selected name Change channel Selection No name display No Label Cursor 004 DUE 4 Change channel This item displays the channel to be changed Selection No name display This item displays the current selection No and trend name of the channel to be changed Cursor The trend devices to be changed are displayed in the cursor field Select the trend device using the scroll key and apply the selection by the OK switch When No 000 is selected the trend of that channel is not sampled B Supplementary Explanation New values after the upper lower trend limit values trend sampling device and sampling cycle are changed are held in memory even after the EST is reset Trend display settings are the settings of a temporary
376. s item is for entering the bit device to be monitored for switching graphic or text display Hide device This item is for entering the bit device for clearing the graphic or text display Graphic Set the graphic at OFF graphic at ON to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic Text Set the string at OFF ON to be displayed on the smart object and the display text color of the string B Example Lamp device 001 PLC ladder EST display When M001 OFF LEUTE X001 001 OFF IE When M001 ON 3 81 3 5 Lamps Smart Object Parameters mec Lane once Er commons cams aos Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Graphic m e Graphie Select the display graphie when the amp s OFF Coler when OFF Select the display color ofthe graphic when he ampi FF Bink when OFF Select to cause biking when the lampis OFF ON Graphic Select the display graphic when the lamp is ON Color when ON Select the display color of the graphic when the lampis ON Blink when Select to cause blinking when the lampis ON Fowsze Selectthe font size om 8 and T600 V aignment Select vertical alignment fom icone SJ Halgrment Select horizontal aignment OFF sing Enter the display text when the lamp OFF color Emer the display text color when the lamp ink when OFF
377. s only at the EST555Z application preparation Selects the 320 x 180 size automatically on the EST240Z tems Selects the display content When the 640 x 370 smart object size is selected Selects only at the EST555Z application preparation Name display Displays the name messages date of occurrence year month day and time of occurrence hours minutes seconds of alarm occurred Message display Displays the messages messages date of occurrence month day and time of occurrence hours minutes seconds of alarm occurred Design This sheet is for setting the graphic to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic Set the display text color of the string to be displayed on the smart object 3 175 3 11 Alarm Monitor Example 1 EST240Z ALARM 001 9 11 12 15109 11 12 37 recovery text ALARM 005 09 12 18 23 color display Alarm ocurrence text color display NYY Displays the No of the alarm that occurred by the alarm name currently registered to the history information e OCCUR Displays the date time month day hours minutes that the alarm occurred RECOVER Displays the date time month day hours minutes that the alarm was recovered A Each touch of these switches scrolls the history display by one history at a time Each touch of these switches scrolls the history display by 5 histories at a time AIL The keys scroll the display to the o
378. s the number of times that alarms have occurred A Each touch of these switches scrolls the alarm No display by one alarm at a time Al el Each touch of these switches scrolls the alarm No display by 15 alarms at a time Each touch of these switches scrolls alarm No display 100 alarms 3 11 Alarm Monitor Example 3 EST555Z Display all System Error 1 Error in carrier system No 1 System Error 2 Error in carrier system No 2 Assenbly Error Assembly part supply halt Assembly Error B Assembly part B supply halt Inspection Err Failure in part inspection Inspection Err B Failure in part B inspection Temperature Error Automatic solder furnace temperature is too high Temperature Error Automatic solder furnace temperature is too low Alarm Message Alarm Message 16 charcters Max 48 charcters Max ALM ID Displays the alarm No ALARM NAME Displays the name of the alarm currently registered to the history information MESSAGE Displays the messages currently registered to the history information using up to 40 1 byte characters Exceeded characters are not displayed COUNT Displays the number of times that alarms have occurred Each touch of these switches scrolls the alarm No display by one alarm at a time Each touch of these switches scrolls the alarm No display by 15 alarms at a time Each touch of these switches scrolls t
379. setting item Basic Select the operation mode from bit type word type 1 42 O Startup device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit When bit type is selected device Call panel Enter the panel No to be started up When bit type is selected 1 to 899 Enter the call coordinates of the panel to be started up When bit type is selected Panel device Enter the communications channel the device address and the word When word type is e d axis Enter the X coordinates of the panel to be started up When word type is selected 0 to 319 NM axis Enter the Y coordinates of the panel to be started up When word type is selected 0 to 239 B Supplementary Explanation Use the following smart objects to close a started panel Smart object type Smart object name Panel change switches Switch start panel selector Starts up the specified panels and stops all other currently active panels External start panel selector Executes the panel selector by the PLC device Switch start panel close Stops the own panel External start panel close Stops the specified panel by the PLC device There is no change to operation of the background panel This is a transparent smart object and may be pasted anywhere When Word type is selected at Mode set the data to be set to the panel device within the binary data range 1 to 899 1 Handling Precautions When Bit is selected at Mode the panel is not selecte
380. settings refer to Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Application Preparation Manual No CP SP 1088E When the monitor range is less than 32 words in one screen and the data of the last device address is modified make sure to have the lower value of the monitor range set as a multiple of 16 When the panel pasted with PLC monitor smart objects is started up by panel overlay the operation is as described below Do not execute the panel overlay startup for the panels pasted with PLC monitor smart objects When the pop up panels displayed by PLC monitor device change or the pop up panels of other smart objects are returned to the panels pasted with PLC monitor smart objects the PLC monitor device and address of PLC monitor smart objects might be changed to the initial status or the device might not be displayed This happens when the panels pasted with PLC monitor smart objects are restarted at panel movement Do not use this smart object for panels that are to be started up as pop up panels When the pop up panel is active a device modify panel and data modify panel cannot be called 4 119 4 5 PLC monitor 4 120 4 6 4 6 Recorder Recorders are smart objects that sample the data of external devices at a fixed cycle and display changes in data as a trend graph The data of the sampled device set on the recorder smart object is stored to the dedicated storage area on the EST or the CF cards at the inter
381. sic Panel Panel device This item is for entering the panel selector device when Word type is selected at Mode Panel dev X axis p e Y axis 0 X axis This item is for entering the X coordinates of the call panel Y axis This item is for entering the Y coordinates of the call panel OK Startup device 010 call panel 10 call coordinates 20 20 Panel 5 in operation status Panel 5 close Call coordinates 20 20 Panel 10 startup Panel selector M010 ON 5 M010 OFF Panel device D100 call coordinates 40 40 Panel 5 in operation status Panel 5 close Call coordinates 40 40 Panel 10 startup Panel selector D010 10 0100 0 3 57 3 4 Panel Change Switches B Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic Select the operation mode from bit type word type Startup device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit bit type is selected device Call panel Enter the panel No to be started up When bit type is selected 1 to 899 Enter the call coordinates of the panel to be started up When bit type is selected Panel device Enter the communications channel the device address and the word When word type is X axis Enter the X coordinates of the panel to be started up When word type is selected 0 to 319 Y axis Enter the Y coordinates of the panel to be
382. sign the graphic type from general user No the display graphic Po Select the display color of the graphic Po Font size 7 Selectthefontsizefrom8and 16 dots Valgnmen Selec verica aiment fom Toplenterbotom Sect horizontal alignment rom iftcenentigi Dis sin 2202222122108 ST communications CN 7 Biste Tinerockation according to ONOFF state Range itetook action according to bt device range Supplementary Explanation Special packages are library software packages such as the DMC10 package prepared by Yamatake They cannot be created nor modified For details on special packages refer to Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Application Preparation Manual No CP SP 1088E For details on DMC10 packages refer to Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual DMC10 Package Volum EST240Z CP SP 1091E EST555Z CP SP 11124E There is no change to operation of the background panel For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 1 Handling Precautions Touching the switch will not select the special package when the special package is not being downloaded to the EST When an opened pop up panel is active other panels cannot be started by this smart object When User is selected at Graphic type
383. sing switch communications functions White dev NROO000 Write device This item is for entering the word device to which data entered on the numeric keypad is entered OK Cancel Help Write device Write data is 2 word numeric data Enter the start word register on the PLC to write the data to as the write device Graphic This sheet is for setting the graphic to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic Switch communications Set the operation of switch communications functions 3 151 3 10 Data Setter B Example Write device D100 DOO z PLC device Rea Smart Object Parameters Tabname name Parameter name Selection setting item Basic Write device Enter the communications channel the device address and the word device SWcomm Select when using switch communications Graphic Select the general graphic Select the display graphic of the password numeric keypad Select the display color of the graphic Switch Switch code Enter the switch code communications Switch communications function Select the switch communications function Po Supplementary Explanation Write data is 2 word data Even if the data entered on the numeric keypad is data of four digits or less the data is written to the write device on the PLC as 2 word data For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects
384. splay format vertical numeric device 000 maximum display value 100 minimum display value 0 alarm upper limit value 70 alarm lower limit value 30 Bar graph display Maximum data value 100 34 Bar gt lt u Minimum data value PLC 0100 60 0100 90 0100 20 Smart Object Parameters Selecionseting Basic Display format Select the display format of the bar graph from vertical horizontaltank type Data format Select the data format of the numeric device from unsigned binary signed binary Hex BCD Enter the communications channel the device address and the word device Hide device Enter the communications channel he device address andinebidevoe Alarm display Selectwhenthealamdspiyfuntonisused Bar graph Minimum Enter the minimum value ofthe display data Jooo o o o o y CSS Type Select general tank type is selected No Select from the tank graphics When tank type is selected Color Select the display color of the graphic When tank type is selected Enter the constant or the communications channel the device address and the word device Lower Enter the constant or the communications channel the device address and the bit device Alarm bar Select the bar display color for when an alarm occurs Blink at alarm Displays the bar display as blinking when an alarm occurs rot 3 115
385. started up When word type is selected 0 to 239 B Supplementary Explanation Screens other than the newly started up panel stay displayed however their operations are suspended There is no change to operation of the background panel This is a transparent smart object and may be pasted anywhere When Word type is selected at Mode set the data to be set to the panel device within the binary data range 1 to 899 Handling Precautions When Bit is selected at Mode the panel is not selected if an unregistered panel No is entered The EST however turns the startup device OFF When Word is selected at Mode the panel is not selected if a panel No not registered to the panel device is entered The EST however resets the panel device to 0 Note however that when panel No 0 or 900 or above has been specified the data of the panel device is not set to 0 When an opened pop up panel is active other panels cannot be started by this smart object To execute panel selection by this smart object execute setting of the data to the startup device or panel device by one shot instructions One shot instructions may not function properly on circuits that are executed at all times Bit type SET M000 Start device Word type mov K10 D100 Panel device 3 58 3 4 Panel Change Switches Smart object name External panel overlay Panel change switches Sc
386. state of the SDC10 The SP value can also be changed Name Up to eight 1 byte characters can be entered PV This displays the PV process variable value SP This displays the SP set point value ALM This blinks when an alarm occurs EV1 This lights when EV1 is ON EV2 This lights when EV2 is ON AT This blinks during auto tuning RDY This lights when the SDC10 is in the Ready mode SP SET This button causes a numeric keypad to pop up so that the SP value can be changed B Configuration Basic PID controller Basic Desien Numeric keypad Type This item is for selecting the IMEC type Smart object size dot Su DMcI0 COH This item is for selecting the Smart object size 50020721 C via CMC10B C SDC30 81 68508 Select this item when connecting the SDC10 C 506404 STD RSP via the CMC10B Smart object size dot E EST comm CH 226 This item is for entering the communications channel on the EST via CMC10B EstcommcH CMC10B device address This item is for entering the device address of derede the CMC10B Controller dev adrs 1 E Contoller device address This item is for entering the device address of Decimal point the SDC10 Cancel El Decimal point This item is for entering the decimal point via CMC10B display pos
387. state of the write execution device If an error occurs in communications with the external device when writing of recipe data is being executed recipe data write completion notify success notify error cannot be notified normally On devices that control writing of recipes monitor the time until write completion notify success notify error turns ON from when the write execution device turns ON This is monitoring of the time out time The time to be set as the time out time differs according to the application Determine the time out time from the time required for writing the recipe data during normal operation When executing retry processing when an error occurs set the write execution device to ON after providing the OFF state for the write execution device Do not use this smart object for panels that are to be started up as pop up panels When the pop up panel is active a numeric keypad panel and keyboard panel cannot be called 4 3 4 3 Trend Trends are smart objects that sample the data of external devices at a fixed cycle and display changes in data as a trend graph The data of the sampled device set on the trend smart object is stored to the internal buffer on the EST at the intervals of the sampling cycle The data of trends 1 to 8 channels and events 0 to 3 channels can be sampled and displayed on a single trend smart object When a variable trend smart object is used the samplin
388. string Switch Communications Set the operation of switch communications functions Interlock Set the entry enabled conditions for the switch 3 52 3 4 Panel Change Switches B Example Call panel 20 Panel 5 in operation status Panel 5 in operation status Panel 7 Panel 10 Panel 7 Panel 20 in operation in operation in operation in operation status status status status Panel replace switch ON replace panel 10 with 20 B Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic nr Enter the panel No to be started up Enter the call coordinates of the panel to be started up Select when using switch communications Select when using interlocked operation Design Select the graphic type from general user P de 77 Font sap Select he font size from 8 and 16 dois O Serectverical alignment from preme Haignment horizontal alignment rom eicere Display string Enter the display color Text color Enter the displaytextcolor __ Em communications Switch communications function Select the switch communications function Wei Sisti Iferock acion according to ONOFF state Range Interlock action accordingtobitdevicerange Jo Supplementary Explanation Screens other than the newly started up panel stay displayed h
389. t The backlight goes out when the set time has elapsed This is a transparent smart object and may be pasted anywhere Handling Precautions Enter the bit device on the PLC as the Control device Do not enter word Ladder circuit example Rise condition SET M000 Control device 3 198 3 13 State Control Smart object name External buzzer control State control Scaling Paste Scalingfactor Textsize coordinates po qd do eos dl a devices such as registers Execute setting of the bits on the control device by one shot instructions B Function This smart object enables the EST buzzer to be turned ON and OFF from the PLC Buzzer is turned ON when the control device is activated and turned OFF when the control device is deactivated State Control Basic C Backlight control C Backlight ON Type This item is for selecting the type of external control smart object C Buzzer OFF C Notify batt alam C Write data at startup Control dev Control device This item is for entering the bit device for controlling the buzzer B Configuration Basic EST EST 000 ON VA N P d Alarm tone 000 OFF ea eee buzzer ON buzzer OFF 3 199 3 13 State Control B Example Selection setting item Basic Control device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit devi
390. t Parameters fom Basic Select panel selector BG close Ie Enter the panel No to be started up Enter the call coordinates of the panel to be started up Po Select when using switch communications Interlock Select when using interlocked operation e ype generals eT color ofthe S Font sa ont size rom and tes Valigimen_________ Selectvertcalalignmentfromtop centerbotem__ Fragment horizontal alignment rom eticemeig A Foispiaysting Text color Enter the display text color Switch communications Switch communications function Select the switch communications function Interlock Bit state Interlock action according to ON OFF state of bit device Ee O Supplementary Explanation e When closing of the background panel is executed all active panels are restarted For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions When an unregistered panel No is entered the panel is not opened even if the switch is touched When an opened pop up panel is active other panels cannot be started by this smart object This smart object does not function even if pasted to a background panel When User is selected at Graphic type and registered graphics are used for the switch g
391. t device of a PLC to control the interlock operation When the bit device is ON it will be possible to call up the data modify panel 4 88 4 5 PLC monitor Graphic This sets the Graphic to display and the display colors of the graphic with the smart objects Panel This specifies the call up coordinates of the device modify and data modify panels PLC monitor o zip 26 Device modify panel ri Bt Enter the call up coordinates of device modify panel Data modify panel HEX n pg Enter call up coordinates of data modify panel HEX hexadecimal s aj Eae Data modify panel BIN Enter call up coordinates of data modify panel BIN decimal Maximum Minimum values Enter the device range to monitor PLC monitor Initialize Initialize the maximum and the minimum values Maximum Enter the maximum value of the address range to monitor Minimum Enter the minimum value of the address range to monitor Initialize This sets the maximum and the minimum values of each device address of devices selected with the CPU kind 4 89 4 5 PLC monitor B Smart Object Parameters Selection setting Basic CPU kind Select CPU kind Monitor method Select from monitor write monitor Smart object size dot Select the smart object size Enter EST communications channel 1104 Node Enter station address of computer link m
392. t device that is to Ueediome iene s be manipulated when a switch is touched Used items This item is for selecting the number of radio Switches to be used OK Switch device Enter the start bit device to be manipulated when a switch is touched The smart object manipulates the number of bits set to Number of used items continuous from the start bit device Graphic Set the switch graphic to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic The graphic setting becomes OFF Graphic and ON Graphic Text Set the string to be displayed on the smart object and the display text color Set strings for the number of switches selected at Used items SW Communications Set the operation of switch communications functions Interlock Set the entry enabled conditions for the switch 3 5 3 2 Function Switches B Example 3 radio switch array Switch device M000 number of items used 3 000 OFF 001 M002 OFF When SW3 is touched 000 OFF 001 OFF M002 ON Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic Enter the communications channel device address and bit device Select the number of radio switches Select when using switch communications Po Select when using interlocked operation 0 Grape Select general a Select the graphic displayed at OFF ce ie RR REY ON Graphic Select the display ON Graphio J FGolorwhen ON Seleciihe graphic displa
393. t lamp device EST display tate 2 device No display State 2 State 3 May be either ON or OFF Configuration Basic Omnt Basic Graphic Text Type i Type c E m This item is used for selecting the lamp type State PR C 2 state 3 state C Multi State This item is used for selecting the operation function of the lamp smart State 1 dev object a State 1 2 3 device State2 dev un sob zi This item is for entering the bit device State3 dev to be monitored for switching graphic or text display OK Cancel Help Set the display graphic in states 1 2 3 and the display color of that graphic Text Set the display string in states 1 2 3 and the display color of that text 3 83 3 5 Lamps Example State 1 device M000 state 2 device M002 state 3 device M010 EST display gt SB sse IE Dd SS 000 OFF 000 ON 000 M002 OFF M002 OFF M002 ON M002 M010 OFF M010 OFF M010 OFF M010 ON Either of ON or OFF is acceptable B Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device 000 Type Select the graphic accord
394. ta in AP Editor The cursor is displayed in the data display field if the recipe data can be set The recipe data indicated by the cursor is the data that is to be set by the data setting keys This field displays the comment for the recipe data corresponding to the data No indicated by the cursor The data comment that is displayed is set at Application Manager Configuration Information Recipe Data in AP Editor These keys scroll the data to be displayed Display the start final data 2 Scroll display data five items or fifteen items at a time Holding down these switches scrolls the display data at high speed A Scroll display data one item at a time Holding down these switches scrolls the display data at high speed If the cursor 15 displayed the cursor display is scrolled 4 29 4 2 Recipe 4 30 Data setting keys Entering the data setting key at the EST240Z application preparation causes the numeric keypad panel to pop up enabling to change the recipe data value of cursor display Touching the data display area at the EST555Z application preparation causes the numeric keypad panel to pop up enabling to change the recipe data value on the line touched The setting range that can be entered by the numeric keypad for each recipe data is set at Application Manager Configuration Information Recipe Data in AP Editor The setting enabled disabled state of the data setting keys can b
395. tails y format o Trend buffe Data format This item is for selecting the display data Points words This item is for entering the buffer size per channel OK Cancel Help f the trend data rs This item displays the number of trend buffers t be used on the smart object Alarm monitoring 4 3 Trend Type This item is for selecting the type of trend smart object Smart object size dot This item is for selecting the Smart object size Alarm monitoring This item is for sampling the alarm information CH Total A This item is for entering the number of channels to be displayed as a trend 2 axes This item is for configuration trend display to the 2 axis format Enter the number of channels to be displayed on the two axes Intervals This item is for entering the data sampling cycle With events This item is for setting sampling and display functions for the event data Enter the number of event channels to be used Clear device This item is for entering the bit device for clearing the data Details This item is for displaying the usage of dedicated storage area This item is selected for sampling the alarm information Only at the time of the EST555Z application preparation CH Total A Enter the number of channels by which trends are to be sampled and displayed The number of channels that can be sampled an
396. tarted up 3 39 3 4 Panel Change Switches Design Set the switch graphic and the display string Switch Communications Set the operation of switch communications functions Interlock Set the entry enabled conditions for the switch B Example Call panel No 1 10 No 2 20 No 3 30 Panel 5 in operation status Panel 5 in operation status Panel 10 in operation status Panel 20 in operation status Multi panel overlay Panel 30 switch ON in operation status B Smart Object Parameters Selectior setting item Basic Select multi panel overlay 2 Select when using switch communications o Select when using interlocked operation Design Select the graphic type from general user we Sete spy graphic i Color Selectthe display color of the graphic FFonsus the font size rom Band 16 dots LVaignmen verica alignment ron Topenterbotom Select horizontal alignment ST Display sting Emerhedepycdo Text color Enter the displaytextcolor __ coordinates Enter the cal coordinates of the panel obo te No2 coordinates Enter the cal coordinates ofthe peneito be sarei coordinates Enter the call coordinates of the panel tobe ST communications Switch communications function Select the switch communications function
397. ted to Yamatake CPL general host link Do not use this smart object for panels that are to be started up as pop up panels When the pop up panel is active a numeric keypad panel cannot be called 4 8 4 1 PID controller Smart object name SDC20 21 PID controller Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates obi B Function This smart object enables monitoring of the run state of the SDC20 21 The SP value can also be changed PV This displays the PV process variable value SP This displays the SP set point value MV This displays the MV manipulated variable value ALM This blinks when an alarm occurs EV1 This lights when EV1 is ON EV2 This lights when EV2 is ON EV3 This lights when EV3 is ON AT This blinks during auto tuning RDY This lights when the SDC10 is in the Ready mode SPSET This button causes a numeric keypad to pop up so that the SP value can be changed B Configuration Basic PID controller Type This item is for selecting the IMEC type Basic Desien Numeric keypad Type 50010 C Smart object size dot SDC20 21 C DMC10 This item is for selecting the Smart 50630 91 68508 object size via CMC10B C SDC40A STD RSP Select this item when connecting the SDC20 21 via the CMC10B EST comm CH This item is for entering the communications channe
398. ter Leftwards 100 x 180 Slide meter Vertical 1x100 Slide meter Horizontal 100 x 1 Pie chart 40 x 40 Line graph 80 x 80 Text display Registered string data Variable string data Message call Keyboard 40 x 40 Data setter Password numeric keypad 160 x 200 UP DOWN setter 80 x 40 Bit pattern setter 320 x 40 Alarm monitor Aggregation display alarm lamp 8 point 320 x 40 Aggregation display alarm lamp 5 point 200 x 40 Aggregation display alarm lamp 4 point 160 x 40 Aggregation display alarm lamp 1 point 40 x 40 Representative lamp alarm lamp 40 x 40 Alarm buzzer 40 x 40 Monitor start stop 40 x 40 Summary display alarm information display 320 x 180 Summary display alarm information display message display 640 x 370 Summary display alarm information display all display 640 x 370 History display alarm information display 320 x 160 History display alarm information display name display 640 x 360 History display alarm information display message display 640 x 360 Number of occurrence display alarm information display 320 x 160 Number of occurrence display alarm information display message display 640 x 360 Number of occurrence display alarm information display all display 640 x 360 Alarm information clear 40 x 40
399. ters Basic Smart object size dot Select the smart object size EEE Select when connecting the DMC10 via the CMC10B Enter the communications channel on the EST Enter the device address of the CMC10B Enter the device address of DMC10 FGmphewpe Select Fil color dieplay coor orme gapio PV color the numeric display color of he PV SP color Seleciihenumercdiplay color ofrese J MV color the numeric value display color of MW i Enter the name AT Numeric Select when using a numeric keypad panel with decimal keypad Enter the call coordinates of the numeric keypad panel o 4 15 4 1 PID controller Supplementary Explanation 4 16 Changes to the SP value of each channel are executed on the SP value of the currently selected SP set of the DMC10 For example when the SP value is changed while SP3 is selected SP3 will be rewritten The settable range of the SP value is the lower SP limit to the upper SP limit in the setup on the DMC10 For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions Set the communications channel to which the PID controller is to be connected to Yamatake CPL general host link The panel may not function properly when the following items on the DMC10 are changed while a panel to which this smart o
400. the lamp device data from unsigned binary signed binary Hex BCD Upper value Enter the upper limit value of the lamp ON range Lower value value Enter the lower limit value of the lamp ON range Supplementary Explanation Blinking of graphics is performed alternately between displaying of the state 1 graphic and displaying of the state 2 3 graphic Blinking of text is performed alternately between displaying of the state 1 text and displaying of the state 2 3 text The string currently set to state 2 3 is displayed as the text to be displayed PLC devices can also be set in addition to the constant settings to the upper limit value lower limit value For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configurarion Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions Be sure to enter a multiple of 16 when entering the bit device to lamp devices When a registered graphic is used for the lamp graphic all state 1 2 3 graphics must be created at the same size When a registered graphic is used for the lamp graphic the smart object size becomes the size of the graphic and the smart object cannot be scaled 3 93 3 5 Lamps Smart object name Word type multi value state lamp Lamps Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates cm 4 e Jp Amel B Function This smart object displays the value obtained by adding the offset data to the data of the la
401. time the panel closes and returns to the status before the menu panel call up When the ENT key is touched a short high pitched alarm buzzers in the case of exceeding the upper or lower limit values of device range of the device address entered with the ten key When the Esc key is touched the data entered with the ten key become invalid and the panel closes The mode returns to the status before the menu panel call up B Example hars adrs Lae Le Device kind Le elles Lo Le Le Le ese adrs The entered device address is displayed Device kind A device kind to display is selected Ten key This inputs the device address to display ENT The key determines the device address of adrs display section and makes the menu panel return to the status before call up by closing the panel e ESC The data entered with the ten key become invalid This key makes the panel close and return to the status before menu panel call up 5 26 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS B Panel Shapes Word device modify panel MELSEC A series Panel No 1400 fears EH EI Le Lal Le 5 5 Le Tes JE Lo i Remarks 220x240 Word device modify panel MELSEC FX series Panel No 1401 ASERRE Le e Le Ele Remarks 220 x 240 5 27 Chapter 5 SYSTEM PANELS Word device modify panel MELSEC Q series Panel No 1402
402. tion Design Select the graphic type from general user e Selects display color of he gaphies Fase he fot size fom Band o vammen verica alignment rom penen H a gnmeni Select horizontal alignment rom eicere A Darmo Enterthe display ol Sun communications Switch communications function Select the switch communications function eio Bis Inerlock action according to ONOFF stato TDI Gores Range Ci Interlock action according to bit device range Supplementary Explanation The following smart objects are used for closing opened panels Smart object type Smart object name Panel change switches Switch start panel selector Starts up the specified panels and stops all other currently active panels External start panel selector Executes the panel selector by the PLC device Switch start panel close Stops the own panel External start panel close Stops the specified panel by the PLC device There is no change to operation of the background panel For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 1 Handling Precautions When an unregistered panel No is entered the panel is not opened even if the switch is touched e Up to eight panels including the background panel can be started up simultaneously
403. tion The Edit switch is not displayed for the smart object when the edit function is not used Data comment This item displays a comment for the recipe data currently indicated by the cursor using up to 36 1 byte characters 4 37 4 38 4 2 Recipe Numberical keypad This sheet is for specifying the call coordinates of numeric keypads and keyboards TT Numeric keypad Basic Design Num keypad Message This item is for entering the call coordinates of the numeric keypad panel Coords 160 zb T decimal point Use decimal point Select this item when a numeric keypad panel with decimal point Keyboard setup key is used Coords 0 ED 2 le Keyboard setup This item is for entering the call coordinates of the keyboard panel Cancel Help Messages This sheet is used for entering messages that are displayed when writing of recipe data is executed Write confirmation message This item is for entering the message to be displayed at confirmation of writing Basic Design Num keypad Message Successful completion message Execue data write Normal end Communications mess Enor notification message Transmitting data end Communications message This item is for entering the message that is displayed during writing of recipe data Successful completion message This item i
404. tion the recipe function cannot be used Enter the bit device on the PLC at Settings interlock Do not enter word devices such as registers Be sure to enter a multiple of 16 when entering the bit device to the recipe No device 4 45 4 2 Recipe 4 46 Writing of recipe Enter the bit device on the PLC at Write execution device Notify Success Notify Error Do not enter word devices such as registers When writing of recipes is executed if a recipe No to which a recipe name is not set is currently set to the recipe No specified device the recipe data itself is also judged to be undetermined data Writing of this data is not executed to the external device and is processed as an error When recipe data is written re execute the writing after entering the recipe name In case of automatic writing the confirmation by using notification device cannot be executed Recipe name must be set When writing of recipe is executed if a recipe No currently set to the specified device is 0 or larger than the number of set recipes writing is processed as a write error Writing of recipe data is executed by detection of the write execution device turning ON If the OFF state of the write execution device is short when writing of the recipe data of the same group is executed continuously the EST cannot detect startup of the write execution device and writing of recipe data is sometimes not executed Be sure to provide an OFF
405. tion Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions Enter the bit device on the PLC for the Switch device Do not enter word devices such as registers User cannot be selected at Graphic type 3 7 3 2 Function Switches Smart object name Inching Function switches Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates de qoe ee B Function This smart object manipulates inching B Configuration Basic ae Type Basic Graphic SW coram Interlock This item is for selecting the type of 5 function switch smart object ype Radio switch C Clock adjustment SW comm Inching C Alana silence Select this item when using switch communications functions SW comm Interlock Interlock Select this item when using the interlock function Switch device This item is for entering the start bit device to be manipulated when a switch is touched Switch device Enter the start bit device of the inching switch Smart objects use continuous bit devices for the number of selected switches from the switch device Graphic Function Switches x Cont Basic Graphic sw comm Interlock Type This item is for selecting the graphic Type General m type include Inching mode i 2 C Aways This item is for selecting the inching 200 da switch mode No This item is for selecting the switch graphic Color
406. tion data turns ON The alarm buzzers when a new alarm occurs B Configuration Basic Basic Type C Alam lamp Display alam info Type 0e This item is for selecting the type of alarm monitor smart object C c Setting items are not available xm 2 4 Paste the alarm buzzer as it is on the panel ai a OK Example EST EST _ _ _ _ Alarm tone Occurrence of new alarm buzzer OFF buzzer ON 3 166 3 11 Alarm Monitor B Smart Object Parameters Parameter type Selection setting item Select alarm buzzer e 2 Supplementary Explanation Regular alarms can be monitored by pasting this smart object to the panel to be used as the background panel Only functions are pasted Functions may be pasted anywhere The buzzer does not automatically turn OFF even if the alarm monitor contact turns OFF The following smart objects are used to turn the buzzer OFF Smart object type Smart object name Function switches Buzzer OFF Buzzer is stopped by the switch being touched State control External buzzer OFF Buzzer is stopped by PLC bits turning ON The alarm buzzers again when a new alarm monitor contact turns ON even if the alarm has stopped The alarm monitor contacts the alarm names and the messages are registered at Set Alarms in AP Editor For details see th amp mart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Application
407. tion of smart object size 3 173 3 11 Alarm Monitor B Supplementary Explanation The history display No shows the order in which alarms occurred No 001 indicates the oldest alarm The initial display shows the latest record To create an alarm history Record History must be selected at Set Alarms in AP Editor If the number of records in the alarm history exceeds 400 when Ring is set as the history recording method in the alarm history settings the records are overwritten in order from the oldest record onwards When Fixed is set as the history recording method sampling of the alarm history is stopped when the number of records in the alarm history reaches 400 To resume sampling in this case Clear alarm information must be executed For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 The alarm monitor contacts the alarm names and the messages are registered at Set Alarms in AP Editor For details see the Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Application Preparation Manual No CP SP 1088E Handling Precautions 3 174 If the ON time of the alarm contacts is shorter than one alarm monitoring communications cycle alarm monitoring may not function correctly User cannot be selected as the graphic type selection Past history data still remains after the application data is downloaded To clear the history data touch the alarm information cle
408. tions inside the smart object BitON Enables input on touch switches when the state of the bit device that is specified as the interlock device is ON Bit OFF Enables input on touch switches when the state of the bit device that is specified as the interlock device is OFF Enter the bit device on the PLC by which interlock control is to be controlled Range Switch range Format Interlock device Upper lower values Chapter 2 SMART OBJECT SPECIFICATIONS Input on touch switches is controlled enabled disabled by the data value of the word device that is specified as the interlock device Omnt Switch range Basic Graphic Text SW comm Interlock ge This item is for selecting the conditions ON OFF state of the interlock device for enabling input on touch switches Device useage C Bit state Range Range Switch range Format This item is for setting the data format of the interlock device Upper Lowwer Emu Interlock device Unsiened binary i This item is for setting the word Interlock dev device Upper val 999 Upper lower values UT p a This item is for setting the upper lower limit values that are specified by Switch enabled range Select the conditions data range of the interlock device for enabling touch switch input conditions inside the smart object Switch range 1
409. torage area The settings where the trend buffer exceeds the capacity of dedicated storage area cannot be executed Set by confirming the remained capacity from the detail information Details This item displays the usage window of dedicated storage area Sample device name This item is for selecting the word device to be sampled and saved when the application is downloaded Line type This item is for selecting the display line type of the trend graph Display color This item is for selecting the display color of the trend graph 4 OK Cancel Sample device name Select the word device from which trend samples after the application is downloaded Select from the data set at Selection When 2 axis display is selected for trends channels 1 to 4 are displayed on the A axis and channels 5 to 8 are displayed on the B axis Display color Select the color of the line to be displayed on the trend graph The trend name and the PV are also displayed using this color Event e View Trend Omnt Basic Trend Event view Control Selection OK Line col Sample device 4 3 Trend Line color This item is for selecting the display color of the event graph Color This item is for selecting the display text color of the event name Name This item is for entering the name of the event data Sample device This item is for entering t
410. touched B Configuration Basic Cmnt Basi Graphic Text SW comm Type C Radio switch C Clock adjustment Type MP H This item is for selecting the type of Bess sie function switch smart object SW comm e SW comm Select this item when using switch communications functions Graphic Set the switch graphic to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic Text Set the string to be displayed on the smart object and the display text color Switch Communications Set the operation of switch communications functions B Smart Object Parameters SWsomm Select when using switch communications Grape ye Select genera 210022 N Select the display graph O SoS Coor Selecthedisplaycooroffhegraphic Fonsze Select the font size from 8 and 16 dots M Select vertical alignment from top centeribatiom horizontal aignment letvcenteright Tero Such communications Switch communications function Selec the switch communications funcion lt 3 14 3 2 Function Switches B Supplementary Explanation This smart object is used to turn OFF the buzzer sound output that is initiated by an alarm buzzer smart object used in alarm monitoring For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configurarion Items for Smart Ob
411. trol B Example Selection setting item Basic Control device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Control device M000 B Smart Object Parameters B Supplementary Explanation When this smart object is pasted to the panel used as background panel the buzzer can be turned OFF on the PLC at all times This is a transparent smart object and may be pasted anywhere Handling Precautions Enter the bit device on the PLC as the Control device Do not enter word Ladder circuit example Rise condition SET M000 Control device 3 202 B Function B Configuration Basic Smart object name ES 3 13 State Conirol Battery alarm notification State control Scaling Paste Scaling factor Goordinales devices such as registers Execute setting of the bits on the control device by one shot instructions This smart object turns the notify device on the PLC ON when a battery alarm occurs on the EST State Control x Crant Basic Type Backlight control Backlight ON Type This item is for selecting the type of Buzzer control Buzzer OFF external control smart object 6 Notify batt alarm Write data at startup Notify device This item is for entering the bit device for notifying occurrence of the battery alarm Notify device Sets the notify device ON at approximately every 10 sec
412. trol C Backlight ON C Buzzer control C Buzzer OFF C Notify batt alarm 6 Write data at startup Format White dev si Write data Panel 10 Type This item is for selecting the type of external control smart object Format This item is for selecting the data format of the write data Write device This item is for entering the word device to which the data is to be written when the panel is started up Write data This item is for entering the write data PLC device 100 is written to 0000 when anel 10 is started up P 0100 3 205 3 13 State Control B Smart Object Parameters binary Hex BCD me ee m the word device Write data Enter the write data Unsigned binary 0 to 65535 Signed binary 32768 to 32767 Hex BCD 0 to FFFF B Supplementary Explanation The operating panel on the EST can be confirmed by setting the write data to the same data as the panel No and pasting this smart object to each panel This is a transparent smart object and may be pasted anywhere Handling Precautions Be sure to enter a multiple of 16 when entering the bit device to the write device 3 206 Chapter 4 INSTRUMENTATION SMART OBJECTS 4 1 PID controller Smart object name SDC10 PID controller Scaling Paste Scaling factor Text coordinates dd ae B Function This smart object enables monitoring of the run
413. ttings see 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 Handling Precautions Set the communications channel to which the IMEC is to be connected to Yamatake CPL general host link The panel may not function properly when the following items on the SDC30 31 are changed while a panel to which this smart object is pasted is activated The panel will function properly by restarting the panel after the change has been made C02 Temperature unit C04 Input range C05 Decimal point position C09 Lower SP limit C10 Upper SP limit When the SP value has been changed in the Remote mode when REM is lit the execution SP does not change However the new SP value after the change becomes valid when the Local mode is returned to Do not use this smart object for panels that are to be started up as pop up panels When the pop up panel is active a numeric keypad panel cannot be called 4 9 4 1 PID controller Smart object name SDC40A standard remote SP type PID controller Scaling Paste Scalingfactor Textsize coordinates obi B Function This smart object enables monitoring of the run state of the SDC40A The SP value can also be changed PV This displays the PV process variable value SP This displays the SP set point value MV This displays the MV manipulated variable value ALM This blinks when an alarm occurs EV1 This lights when EV1 is ON EV2
414. turning ON the power automatically starts writing of the data sampled by the recorder to the CF card If the CF card is inserted after the power is turned ON writing is not automatically started Press START of the recorder smart object to start writing Recorder Display Data stored to the recorder buffer is displayed as follows on the recorder smart object screen Upper limit value gt Trend information display Scale switch for switching upper lower limits Sampling cycle display change switch Lower limit value gt CF free space Trend display selection CF card access LED panel call switch CF card error LED 7 Scroll keys Trend digital panel CF card check panel call switch call switch Range change switch CF card write enable Marker ON OFF switch disable switch Trend display Data of up to 16 channels can be sampled 8 channels of them can be displayed as a trend graph You can select the 8 channels to be displayed on the trend display selection panel The alarm device ON OFF information for each channel is displayed on the trend as a marker and the alarm LED goes on Trend information display Displays the information of up to 8 channels from among the selected channels of which the data is displayed as trend graphs Displays the current values units trend names alarm information and line colors of the trend graphs Data name 4 124 Line color
415. tus 000 Panel selector Panel 5 close Panel 10 in operation status Background panel 110 M000 5 M000 OFF 3 74 3 4 Panel Change Switches B Smart Object Parameters Basic Mode Selectpanelselector BG change Startup device Enter the communications channel the device address andthe bit device __ Enter the call coordinates of the panel to be started up Po Background panel Enter the background panel No to be started up 1 to 899 Enter the call coordinates of the background panel No to be started up Supplementary Explanation The EST turns the startup device OFF at panel selection When selection of the background panel is executed all active panels are restarted This is a transparent smart object and may be pasted anywhere o Handling Precautions When an unregistered panel No is entered the panel startup is ignored The EST however turns the startup device OFF Panels cannot be started up when a started up pop up panel is currently active This smart object does not function even if pasted to a background panel Execute setting of the startup device bits by one shot instructions One shot instructions may not function properly on circuits that set bits to ON at all times Ladder circuit example Rise condition I SET M000 start device 3 75 3 4 Panel Change Switches Smart object name
416. two axes enter the number of channels on the A axis axes interval Dus 640 to 207800 Data format Select the data format of the trend data from unsigned binary signed i eemper 88880 Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device 111 With events Enter the number of samples and display channels for the event data When with event is selected CH Total B Enter the number of channels on the B axis When 2 axes is selected 1 104 Sample device Enter the communications channel the device address and the word device Display color Select the display color of the trend graph for each channel 1 21 Enter the trend data name for each channel 16 single byte alphanumeric characters EST240Z 12 single byte alphanumeric characters EST555Z Select the display line type of the trend graph for each channel 2000 Sample device Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Name Enter the event data name for each channel 16 single byte alphanumeric characters Enter the display text color of the event name Select the display color of event data View 1300151713 Control Enter the communications channel the device address and the bit device Enter the sampling start time of the trend data Enter the sampling end time of the trend data Selection Sample device the sample device aes to 40 Enter the name ofthesampl
417. umber of occurrence display alarm information display Alarm monitor Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates o de AE B Function This smart object displays the number of times that alarms registered to the alarm monitoring information of the application data have occurred e The number of times that alarms No 1 to 512 have occurred is displayed The display can be scrolled by the scroll key The cursor or displayed alarm can be scrolled by using the scroll key B Configuration Basic Alarm Monitor Basic Design Type Alarm lamp Display alarm info Type T Amb Clos alm Ff This item is for selecting the type of CI SS alarm monitor smart object C Monitor 7 Details Details T This item is for selecting the display C Summary History 6 content of the alarm information Smart object size dot display LO Sus Smart object size dot This item is for selecting the display Message display smart object size Items This item is for selecting the display items e Smart object size dot Selects only at the EST555Z application preparation Selects the 320 x 180 size automatically on the EST240Z tems Selects the display content When the 640 x 370 smart object size is selected Selects only at the EST555Z application preparation Message display Displays the messages of alarm occurrence
418. umeric 0 3 97 Basie S v d Ex En eR IP 3 97 With calculation Ses oro ek e gy 3 104 3 7 3 113 ENIM TE ELSE 3 113 Meler dex er a ERA A ete Es 3 117 Slide meler seere es lcs 3 120 Pie chart leue 3 123 Line graph os Seas EIE IP err aa 3 125 3 8 Text Display ene Bard n a nS emis 3 129 Registered string 3 129 Variable string data 3 132 Message call 3 138 3 9 Keyboard 3 141 Numeric 3 141 Pasi asl 3 147 3 10 Data Setter Ra eia V exacte da de d AR 3 151 Password numeric 3 151 UP DOWN seller epi E v S e nee RIA TUS 3 153 Bit pattern 3 156 3 11 Alarm 3 159 Aggregation lamp alarm lamp 3
419. up coordinates of data modify panel Hexadecimal e modify panel Enter call up coordinates of data modify panel Decimal Maximum Minimum Data Register upper Enter device range upper limit value of Data Register D 0 to 8191 values limit value Data Register lower Enter device range lower limit value of Data Register D 0 to 8191 limit value Link Register upper Enter device range upper limit value of Link Register W 0 to 1FFF limit value Link Register lower Enter device range lower limit value of Link Register W 0 to 1FFF limit value File Register upper Enter device range upper limit value of File Register R 0 to 9999 limit value File Register lower Enter device range lower limit value of File Register R 0 to 9999 limit value Spec Register uppef Enter device range upper limit value of Spec Register SD 9000 to 9255 limit value Spec Register lower Enter device range lower limit value of Spec Register SD 9000 to 9255 limit value Timer Value upper Enter device range upper limit value of Timer Value TN 0 to 2047 limit value TN Timer Value lower Enter device range lower limit value of Timer Value TN 0 to 2047 limit value Counter Value upper Enter device range upper limit value of Counter Value CN 0 to 1023 limit value Counter Value lower Enter device range lower limit value of Counter Value CN 0 to 1023 limit value B Supplementary Explanation The monitor st
420. upplementary 5 3 B Panel Shapes 5 3 Numeric 5 4 Keyboard ait Rene eed anb eb eer neg 5 8 Clock Correction e CORR ie 5 10 Messages VEN QUE EU D I aat 5 12 Alarm 5 14 5 7 Trend Menus ere eR die n i 5 16 5 8 Recipe 5 22 Recipe read 5 22 Recipe edit 5 24 5 9 PLC monitor 5 26 Word device modify 5 26 Bit device modify 5 29 Word data modify panel 5 32 Bit data modify 1 5 35 5 10 Recorder he a RIS DRE ed SAS 5 37 Trend digital 5 37 Trend display selection panel 5 39 CF card check
421. uration Basic Type This item is for selecting the type of keyboard call smart object SW comm Select this item when using switch Keyboard Call Type communications functions nerd Interlock Select this item when using the interlock comm function String device This item is for entering the word device on the PLC for writing the string data entered on String dev NR00000 the keyboard panel v Notify dev Hide dev Characters 4 A OK Cancel Help Notify device This item is for entering the bit device to be Set turned ON at completion of writing of the data entered on the numeric keypad Hide device This item is for entering the bit device for clearing the switch graphic or text display Characters This item is for entering the number of characters that can be entered on the keyboard panel by 2 byte conversion String device Enter the start device on the PLC for writing the string data entered on the keyboard panel Notify device The bit of the notify device is set to ON when the data entered on the numeric keypad panel is written The EST does not reset the notify device to OFF Set the device on the PLC after confirming the ON state of the bit Characters Enter the number of characters that can be entered on the keyboard panel by 2 byte conversion For example set 3 for six 1 byte characters and 2 for three byte characters 3 147 3
422. use this smart object for panels that are to be started up as pop up panels When the pop up panel is active a device modify panel and data modify panel cannot be called 4 111 4 5 PLC monitor Smart object name MELSEC Q C Link Word device PLC monitor Scaling Paste Scaling factor Textsize coordinates di ee B Function This is used in the case of Mitsubishi A series CPU module to be connected Can monitor the CPU word device zone Can modify the PLC device data B Configuration Basic PLC kind PLO monitor Select the PLC kind of PLC monitor MELSEC C Link Basic Graphic Panel Min Max CPU kind kind Select the CPU kind to monitor C MELSEO A C Link C MELSEO FX CPU Data kind MELSEC 6 MELSEO Q Select the data kind of a device to display GPU kind General Data kind Monitor method C Bits lords Select the monitor method Monitor method Smart object size dot Monitor only With modify This item is for selecting the smart object size Smart object size dot 6 320 160 640 x 440 EST comm CH Enter the EST communications EsTcommcH 2 channel Node Enter the station address of C Link module Interlock device Select this in the case of interlock function use CPU kind Select the CPU kind to monitor from the pull menu
423. used and the external dimensions of system panels LIST OF SMART OBJECT GRAPHICS This Appendix lists the graphic elements that are included in the smart object library Use this list as an index when you need to search a smart object vi Contents The Role of This Manual Organization of This User s Manual Conventions Used in This Manual Chapter 1 1 1 1 2 1 4 Chapter 2 2 1 Chapter 3 3 1 3 2 3 3 SMART OBJECT LIBRARY CONFIGURATION Library Configuration ree EE REOR EL c been e teti cere 1 1 B SmartObjects ry etes eR see ERE RI EE E DR E ce be 1 1 Smart Object 1 2 Classification of Smart Object 1 3 B Basic Smart 1 3 B Instrumentation Smart Objects 1 4 List of Smart 1 5 B List of Basic Smart 1 5 B List of Instrumentation Smart Objects 1 6 List of Smart Object Sizes Applicable Models 1 7 B Basic Smart 1 7 B Instrumentation Smart Objects 1 9 SMART OBJECT SPECIFICATIONS Conventi
424. ut is ON The state of the BUS output on the self module and not the OR ed output of the BUS output of linked modules is displayed RSW This lights when the external contact input is ON ALM PV This lights when the PV input terminal error occurs on each channel ALM OTH This lights when other errors occur 4 1 PID controller B Example 2 Name Up to 16 1 byte characters can be entered Channel individual monitors Common monitors Channel individual monitors PV This displays the PV process variable value SP This displays the SP set point value MV This displays the MV manipulated variable value RDY This lights when each channel is in the Ready mode MAN This lights when each channel is in the Manual mode AT This lights when auto tuning is being executed on each channel SP SET Touching the SP SET button for each channel causes a numeric keypad to pop up so that the SP value can be changed Common monitors OUT This lights when the output terminal of each channel is ON EV This lights when the EVENT terminal is ON BUS This lights when BUS output is ON The state of the BUS output on the self module and not the OR ed output of the BUS output of linked modules is displayed RSW This lights when the external contact input is ON ALM PV This lights when the PV input terminal error occurs on each channel ALM OTH This lights when other errors occur B Smart Object Parame
425. vals of the sampling cycle A single recorder smart object can sample data of up to 16 channels and display up to 8 channels of them on the EST Recorder Buffers The buffer area recorder buffer for storing data sampled by the recorder smart object is secured in the dedicated storage area on the EST A recorder smart object secures the recorder buffer to be used by that object in the dedicated storage area to sample and display data according to the number of channels to be sampled and the number of storage points per channel Dedicated storage area Dedicated storage area Recipe buffer 1 ee Recorder smart object 2 Recipe buffer 2 2 channels 1000 store points C Recipe buffer 3 i mar Dedicated storage area 2 unused Recorder smart object 1 Dedicated storage area 1 unused 2 channels 500 store points Dedicated storage area 3 unused 3 dedicated storage areas are Dedicated storage area 64 unused 9529 as the trend buffer Dedicated storage area 64 unused Handling Precautions e Recorders are smart objects available for the EST555Z only There are 64 areas of variable length in the dedicated storage area of the EST555Z Total area size is 208000 words The dedicated storage area is used for recipe smart object trend smart object dedicated package If all of the dedicated storage areas have been used the recorder smart object cannot be used 4 121 4 6
426. vice Set the bit device to ON at completion of writing of the data entered on the numeric keypad The EST does not turn the notification device OFF Turn the notification device OFF on the PLC after confirmation of the ON state of the bit This sheet is for selecting the border graphic for numeric displays When Alarm display use has been selected sets the display graphic of the alarm state by ON graphic When Numeric keypad use has been selected sets the display graphic at numeric keypad call by ON graphic Crent Basic Graphic Value Num keypad View mode This item is for selecting the display View mode mode of the numeric data OFF numeric color This is for selecting the display text color of the numeric data Color at ON OER runner colon ia This item is for selecting the display text color of an alarm state or a numeric keypad call Blink when OFF Blink when OFF Blink when ON This item is for setting blinking at a normal display state Blink when ON This item is for setting blinking at an alarm state or a numeric keypad call OK View mode Select the display mode of the numeric data Zero suppress Displays numeric data with zeros suppressed sign Displays plus data prefixed with when signed binary data is to be displayed Lower case Displays A to in the lower case as a to when displaying hexadecimal data
427. vice range lower limit value of File Register R 0 to FF7FE limit value Spec Register upper Enter device range upper limit value of Spec Register SD 0 to 2047 limit value Spec Register lower Enter device range lower limit value of Spec Register SD 0 to 2047 limit value imit value limit value upper limit value lower limit value Counter Value upper Enter device range upper limit value of Counter Value CN 0 to 1023 limit value Counter Value lower Enter device range lower limit value of Counter Value CN 0 to 1023 limit value B Supplementary Explanation The monitor start address becomes the lower value device address when monitor 0 to 1FFF start address is changed by the device modify panel under the monitor range of one screen with less than 48 words The device display of PLCs and monitor smart objects may be partially different from those of the manufacturer The following shows the cross reference of each device The detail of smart object settings is given in 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 4 114 4 5 PLC monitor o Handling Precautions Set the driver for monitor smart objects to be used for each channel with Setup information Basic setting gt Communications setting of the AP Editor For detail on the settings refer to Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Application Preparation Manual No CP SP 1088E When the panel pasted with PLC monit
428. y different from those of the manufacturer The following shows the cross reference of each device MELSEC Mitsubishi Corp Monitor smart object EDEN Output Relay The detail of smart object settings is given in 2 2 Main Configuration Items for Smart Objects page 2 5 4 110 4 5 PLC monitor o Handling Precautions e Set the driver for monitor smart objects to be used for each channel with Setup information gt Basic setting gt Communications setting of the AP Editor For detail on the settings refer to Smart Terminal EST Z Series User s Manual Application Preparation Manual No CP SP 1088E When the monitor range is less than 32 words in one screen and the data of the last device address is modified make sure to have the lower limit value of the monitor range set as a multiple of 16 When the panel pasted with PLC monitor smart objects is started up by panel overlay the operation is as described below Do not execute the panel overlay startup for the panels pasted with PLC monitor smart objects When the pop up panels displayed by PLC monitor device change or the pop up panels of other smart objects are returned to the panels pasted with PLC monitor smart objects the PLC monitor device and address of PLC monitor smart objects might be changed to the initial status or the device might not be displayed This happens when the panels pasted with PLC monitor smart objects are restarted at panel movement Do not
429. y color when ON _ 1 0 Valigameri Select verical alignment rom pene TT Fragment Select horizontal alignment rom lecenteriigit er E I Enter the display text of switch item 3 Wu number of items used is set to 3 or 4 Item 4 Enter the display text of switch item 4 When number of items used is set to 4 Color when OFF Selestihe display text olor when the switch device s OFF ON cor display text color when the switch device isON 2 communications Enter the switch code of switch item 3 When number of items used is set to 3 or 4 32768 to 32767 Enter the switch code of switch item 4 When number of items used is set to 4 32768 to 32767 Switch communications function Select the switch communications function Po Interlock Bit state Interlock action according to ON OFF state of bit device 2 01 Interlock action according to bit device range 3 6 3 2 Function Switches B Supplementary Explanation Switch items are arranged in order item 1 item 2 item 3 and item 4 from the left switch The code setting in switch communications becomes code 1 code 2 code 3 and code 4 from the left switch Select the OFF graphic for the graphic selection The OFF graphic is paired with the ON graphic and is automatically selected For details on smart object settings see 2 2 Main Configura
430. y direction of meters from Upwards Downwards Leftwards Rightwards Data format Select the data of the numeric device from Signed binary Unsigned binary BCD 3 117 3 7 Graphs Meters Meter Example 3 118 This sheet is for setting the meter display Graphs Meters Cmnt Basic Meter Mi Max ee Needle 1 Graphic Type General No 37001 a Color idth 1 dot OK Minimum This item is for entering the minimum value of the graph Maximum This item is for entering the maximum value of the graph Width This item is for selecting the thickness of the pointer displayed on the meter Needle This item is for setting the color of the pointer displayed on the meter Graphic This item is for selecting the graphic of the meter display Numeric device D000 70 minimum value 0 maximum value 100 Upwards Mimimum value 0 Pd Maximum value 100 Downwards Mimimum value 0 Maximum value 100 Leftwards Mimimum value 0 SX Maximum value 100 Rightwards Mimimum value 0 Maximum value 100 3 7 Graphs Meters B Smart Object Parameters Selection setting item Basic Display format Select the meter display format from upwards downwards leftwards rightwards Data format Select the numeric data format from unsigned binary signed b
431. ype asic Design Numeric keypad This item is for selecting the IMEC piene type 50010 DMC10 C SDC20 21 C DMC10 via CMC10B C 08 Select this item when connecting the SDC30 81 via the CMC10B EST comm CH This item is for entering the communications channel on the EST CMC10B device address This item is for entering the device address of the CMC10B 500404 STD RSP Smart object size dot A 200 via GMC10B ESTcommcH p dey ade l Controller dev adrs 2 Decimal point OK Help Controller device address This item is for entering the device address of the SDC30 31 via CMC10B Select this item when the SDC30 31 is to be connected to the EST via the CMC10B CMC10B s Eus SDC30 31 SDC30 31 SDC30 31 4 1 PID controller Design This sheet is for setting the graphic to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic Set the display text color and name of the PV SP and MV values to be displayed on the smart object Numeric keypad Cmnt Basic Design Numeric keypad Use decimal point Select this item when a numeric keypad panel with decimal point entry Coons p is to be used Coordinates This item is for entering the call coordinates of the num
432. ype of alarm monitor smart object Lamp type This item is for selecting the type of alarm lamp operation Displays This item is for selecting the number of alarm displays for aggregate lamps Start alarm No This item is for entering the first alarm No to be displayed on the lamps Call panel Select this item when using the panel call function Set the OFF ON Graphic to be displayed on the smart object and the display color of the graphic Set the display text color when OFF ON to be displayed on the smart object The entry field for the display string is not available as the alarm name set to the alarm monitoring information is displayed on the smart object 3 159 3 160 3 11 Alarm Monitor Panel This sheet is for setting the panel call when Call panel is selected Alarm Monitor x Cmnt Basic Graphic Text Panel Panel type System z Panel 240 AJ p H p zb Panel type This item is for selecting the type of panel to be called Panel This item is for entering the panel No to be called and the call coordinates Cancel Panel type Select the type of panel to be called when the switch is touched System Call up the alarm message panel system panel as a pop up panel On the alarm message panel the alarm message corresponding to the alarm No is displayed For details on the alarm message panel see 5 6 Alarm M

SMART TERMINAL EST-Z Series User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents